Skip to main content

Full text of "Beyond the shadow; or, The resurrection of life"

See other formats


NYPL  RESEARCH  LIBRARIES 


3  3433  07994392  8 


"Z.FTU 


■    Uniform  with  1hi*  Volume. 
sixth  Edition.    Crown  8vo,  MM  pages.    Price  3s.  Od. 

THE     FREEDOM     OF     FAITH. 
By  Rev.  THEO.  T.  MUNGEK, 
Congregational  Minister,  Mass.,  U.S. 
Contents. 
Prefatory  Essay:  "The  New  ;  Science.  10.  Immortality  and  Na- 
Theology."   Sermons,   l.  On  Re-   tore.    11.  Immortality  asTaugnl 
ception  of  New  Truth.     -J.  God  I  by  the  Christ.    12.    The  Christ's 
our  shield.     I.— 3.  God  our  Re-  ;  Treatment  of    Death.      18.    The 
warrl.    11.—  1.  Love  to  the  Christ     Resurrection  from  the  Dead.    14. 
as  a  Person.    5.  The  Christ's  Pity.    The  Method  of  Penalty.    15.  The 
»;.    The   Christ    as   a    Preacher.  !  Judgment,     lij.  Life  a  Gain.    1". 
7.  Laud  Tenure.     8.   Moral  En-    Things  to  he  Awaited. 
vironment.    9.  Immortality  and  . 


•■  Earnest  and  helpful  in  a  rare 
degree."  —  Evaniielical  Maga- 
zine. 

"  One  of  the  ablest  attempts  to 
define  ihat  isomewnat  nebulous 
phase  of  present-day  thought  and 
feeling  which  is  popularly  spoken 


of  as  '  The  New  Theology,"  so 
that  it  may  he  delivered  from  the 
charge  of  vagueness."—  Christian 
Leader. 

"  A  book  of  unusual  strength, 
freshness,  and  inspiration."— 
Boston  Li  I  era>  n  World. 


London:  James  Clarke  and  Co.,  13  and  14,  Fleet-street,  E.C. 


IFwt&om  of  JfatiFj  SSeros. 


BEYOND    THE    SHADOW 


BEYOND  THE   SHADOW 


OR, 


THE  RESURRECTION  OF  LIFE. 


\u* 


BY 


JAMES    MORRIS    WHITON,    Ph.D., 

Pastor  of  the  First  Congregational  Church,  New  Jersey,  U.S.A. 


THIRD    THOUSAND. 


0ffo    IfOtk: 

THOMAS    WHITTAKER,    2    &    3,    BIBLE    HOUSE. 


^vvW\ 


747373 

\ND 

*  1917  L 


TO  THE 

BROTHERHOOD  OF  THE  BEREAVED, 

WHO   LONG    TO    KNOW   ALL    THAT   MAT   EE    KNOWN 
OF  THE 

STATE  OF  THE  DEAD, 

QHjcse  Stitofcs  upon  tfje  Eesurrectton 

ARE   DEDICATED 
BY 

ONE   OF   THEIK    NUMBER. 


PEEFACE. 


The  following  pages  are  reprinted  from  the 
last  edition,  revised  by  the  Author  for  the 
present  publication,  of  a  work  which,  since  its 
first  appearance  in  America,  three  years  ago, 
lias  received  very  favourable  notice  from 
journals  of  the  highest  character,  particularly 
from  such  as  insist  upon  the  need  of  recasting 
some  ancient  forms  of  thought. 

Though  a  question  may  not  be  capable  of 
receiving  a  complete  answer,  it  will  not  cease 
to  be  asked,  until  it  receives  an  answer,  both 
as  complete  and  as  correct  as  the  conditions  of 
the  case  permit.  Hence  it  is  that  the  question 
of  Paul's  time,  How  are  the  dead  raised  tip, 
and  with  what  body  do  they  come  ? — notwith- 
standing our  conviction  that  only  experience 
can  completely  answer  it — is  repeated  to-day, 
with  an  interest  still  unsatisfied.  We  are  not 
satisfied  with  the  beliefs  expressed  in  the 
inscriptions    to    be    read    upon    the    ancient 


X  TREFACE. 

monuments  :  "  Here  ive  expect  the  Besurrec- 
tion"  "  Here  awaiting  the  coming  of  our  Lord 
Jesus  Christ." 

Christian  feeling,  instructed  by  the  spirit  of 
the  Gospel,  has  silently  swung  away  from 
notions  so  drearily  comporting  with  the  repul- 
sive emblems  of  decay  and  death  that  are  fre- 
quently associated  with  them  by  monkish  art. 
Especially  has  modern  learning  come  to  regard 
with  invincible  repugnance  the  claim  of  resus- 
citation for  that  which  has  seen  corruption, 
and  returned  to  elemental  forms. 

The  materials  of  a  more  Christian,  reason- 
able, and  comforting  view  oi  the  subject  have 
been  slowly  accumulated,  and  it  seems  high 
time  to  attempt  some  well-digested  expression 
of  what  is  widely,  though  more  or  less  co- 
herently thought.  This,  partly  for  the  sake 
of  removing  a  scandal  to  Christian  intelli- 
gence, and  partly  to  reveal  the  cheering 
reality  of  the  Christian  hope  to  those  on 
whom  the  shadows  have  fallen. 

The  notion  of  a  grand  and  far-off  miracle, 
simultaneously  reclothing  the  disembodied 
spirits  of  the  innumerable  dead  with  the 
revitalised  dust,  or  any  part  of  it,  that  once 


PEE  FACE.  XI 

"belonged  to  them,  is  fit  company  for  the 
notion,  once  equally  respectable,  of  the  dam- 
nation of  unbaptized  infants,  or  the  notion  of 
the  universe  created  in  a  week  out  of  nothing. 

What  Christ  has  taught  us,  if  we  can 
receive  it  directly  from  Him,  and  not  at 
second-hand,  with  additions  or  subtractions, 
is,  that  each  of  us,  at  death,  comes  to  Resur- 
rection  in  the  orderly  processes  of  nature, 
not  by  miracle ;  while  they  in  whom  the 
Spirit  of  Christ  is  "the  soul  of  the  soul" 
enter  into  that  fulness  of  life  which  is  the 
Resurrection,  the  Christian  Resurrection,  the 
perfected  state  to  which  the  New  Testament 
points,  as  the  goal  of  Christian  endeavour. 

Christian  feeling  has  already  groped  its  way 
toward  this  conception,  and,  with  more  or 
less  vagueness  of  thought,  habitually  speaks  of 
the  blessed  dead  as  in  heaven.  It  is  em- 
barrassed, however,  by  certain  notions  about 
the  Second  Advent  and  the  Last  Judgment, 
which  have  been  borrowed  substantially  from 
Jewish  rabbis,  and  linger  to-day  as  a  pro- 
digious anachronism  in  Christian  thought. 
Consequently,  a  Christian  revision  of  current 
ideas   of    the  Advent   and   the    Judgment    is 


Xll  PREFACE. 

inseparable  from  any  satisfactory  treatment  of 
the  subject  of  the  Resurrection.  And,  indeed, 
in  view  of  the  wearisome  fiction  and  absurdity 
in  which  these  themes  of  central  importance 
have  been  involved,  there  can  hardly  be  any 
better  service  to  faith  in  the  conflict  with 
scepticism  than,  if  possible,  to  extricate  Chris- 
tian thought  from  modes  of  thinking  upon 
Christ's  transcendent  promises  and  warnings, 
which  are  essentially  pagan  or  Judaistic, 
rather  than  Christian. 

For  the  sake  of  keeping  the  main  track  of 
thought  unimpeded  and  clear,  the  discussion 
of  many  inevitable  questions  of  interpretation 
has  been  thrown  into  Notes  appended  to  the 
several  chapters.  Thoughtful  readers  will  find 
some,  at  least,  of  these  Notes  as  interesting 
as  any  part  of  the  book. 

The  occasional  use  of  the  pronoun  I  is  due 
to  the  fact  that  these  studies  upon  the  Resur- 
rection were  originally  given,  in  the  form  of 
lectures  and  sermons,  to  a  congregation,  in 
response  to  whose  request  their  first  publica- 
tion, in  an  expanded  form,  was  made. 

J.  M.  W. 

Wylde  Green,  Birmingham, 
August  26,  1884. 


CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

I.  The  Present  Difficulty — Christian  Thought 

OUTGROWING   THE   CREEDS 1 

Note  A.— The  Testimony  of  the  Principal  Christian 

Creeds 15 

Note  B. — The  Opinions  of  the  Jews  concerning-  the 

Resurrection 25 

II.  The  Resurrection  a  Continuous  Reality  .  29 
Note  A. — Christ's  Argument  with  the  Sadducees. — 

Luke  xx.  34—38 42 

Note  B.— Resurrection  now  and  henceforth. — John 

v.  24-29 44 

III.  The  Resurrection  Exemplified  in  the  Risen 

Christ 40 

Note  A. — Christ's     Resurrection     not    completely 

Manifested  till  His  Ascension. — John  xx.  14 — 17  .  CC 
Note  B. — Resurrection  Distinct  from  Reanimation. 

—1  Cor.  xv.  20 G8 

Note  C— The  Resurrection  of  the  Jewish  Saints. — 

Matt,  xxvii.  51—53 60 

Note  D.—  Where  was   Christ  between  His  Death 

and  Resurrection  ? — Lxike  xxiii.  43  .  .  .  .71 
Note  E.— Mortal     Bodies     Quickened.— Rom.   viii. 

10-14 73 

Note  F. — The  Redemption  of  our  Body. — Rom.  viii. 

23 75 

IV.  The    Resurrection   an  Object   of   Christian 

Endeavour,  Attained  at  Death  .  .  .79 
Note  A — Anastasis  and  Exanastasis. — Phil.  iii.  11.  99 
Note  B.—  Augustine's  View  of  Future  Punishment.  100 


XIV  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  TAGE 

V.  The  Coming  of  Christ  in  His  Kingdom  a 
Reality  of  the  Past,  the  Present,  and  the 
Future 101 

Note  A.—'"  The  Regeneration." — Matt.  xix.  28         .  125 

Note  B.— The  Judgment  of  the  World  by  the 
Saints.-l  Cor.  vi.  2 12S 

Note  C. — The  Angels'  Prophecy  of  Christ's  Coming. 
—Acts  i.  10,  11 130 

Note  D. — The  Resm-rection  at  Christ's  Coming. — 

1  Cor.  xv.  22,  23 133 

VI.  Judgment  a  Present  and  Perpetual  Reality 

in  both  Worlds 139 

Note  A. — Physical  Catastrophes  and  Wonders  con- 
sidered as  "Judgments" 158 

Note  B. — Judgment  as  Represented  in  the  Creeds  .  159 
VII.  The   Last   Judgment  not  Delayed   till   the 

Resurrection 1G3 

VIII.  Particulars   Elucidated  by  Principles  .        .  193 

Note  A. — Resurrection  a  Reality  prior  to  the  His- 
torical Appearance  of  Christ- — 1  Cor.  xv.  20    .         .  224 

Note  B. — The  Doctrine  of   a  Past  Resurrection. — 

2  Tim.  ii.  18 226 

Note  C. — David's  Resurrection. — Acts'  ii.  34      .         .  227 
Note  D— The  End  of  the  World  at  the  Day  of  the 

Lord.— 2  Pet.  iii.  10— 13 228 

IX.  The    Resurrection    a    Development,    not    a 

Miracle 231 

Note  A.— The  "Thousand  Years,"  or  "The  Mil- 
lennium." — Rev.  xx.  4 258 

Note  B. — "  The  First  Resurrection." — Eer.  xx.  5     .  260 

Note  C. — The  Binding  and  Loosing  of  Satan,  con- 
nected in  Prophecy  with  the  First  Resurrection. 
— Rev.  xx.  1— 3,  7— 9 2G3 

Note  D.— "  The  End  "— "  God  All  in  all. "—1  Cor. 

xv.  24-28 .  267 

X.  Summary  and  Conclusion     .       .       .       •       .271 


AUTHORS  NOTE   TO  THE  SECOND 
AMERICAN  EDITION. 

The  notices  which  this  work  has  received  during  the 
few  months  since  its  first  publication  are  characteristic 
of  our  period  of  transition  from  old  to  new  ways  of  think- 
ing. Some  have  regarded  it  as  fairly  expressing  the 
unformulated  convictions  of  many  devout  believers ; 
others,  as  unsettling  fundamental  Christian  verities. 
Such  divergences  of  the  judgment  of  Christian  readers 
betoken  the  progressing  change  in  the  Christian  way  of 
thinking.  A  Christian  reviewer  may  still  call  it  "  un- 
sound "  to  say  that  all  of  God's  workings  are  according  to 
law,  and  eminent  preachers  may  still  hold  that  the  Divine 
redemption  of  man  is  essentially  "  abnormal."  But  the 
time  is  nearing,  when  intelligent  Christians  will  cease  to 
think  that  even  the  Resurrection  is  abnormal.  It  will 
ultimately  appear  rather  as  a  coherent  part  of  an  orderly 
system  operating  in  every  part  according  to  law,  as  shown 
in  Chapter  ix.  And  the  point  of  .vital  interest  in  these 
studies,  as  it  is  in  the  New  Testament, — our  relation  to 
the  Resurrection-power  of  Christ, — will  appear  as  that 
of  the  subjects  of  a  spiritual  development,  rather  than  of 
a  physical  miracle. 

Newark,  New  Jersey. 


CHAPTEE  I. 

THE   PEE  SENT   DIFFICULTY : 

CHRISTIAN    THOUGHT    OUTGROWING 
THE    CREEDS. 


CHAPTER  I. 

THE  PEE  SENT  DIFFICULTY  :   CHRISTIAN  THOUGHT 
OUTGROWING   THE    CREEDS. 

"  Tliey  all  shall  wax  old  as  doth  a  garment." — Hebrews  i.  11. 

Whoever  will  take  the  trouble  to  glance  at 
the  testimony  of  the  principal  creeds,  as  cited 
in  the  following  pages,  will  be  made  aware  of 
a  wide  difference  between  their  testimony  on 
the  subject  of  the  Resurrection  and  the  views 
which  are  gaining  predominance  among  edu- 
cated people.  It  is  a  misfortune  that  such  a 
difference  should  exist  even  in  appearance. 
The  time-honoured  phrase  of  the  most  ancient 
of  all  the  creeds,  "  I  believe  in  the  resurrection 
of  the  body,"  suggests  the  idea  that  the  buried 
body  is  to  be  raised  out  of  its  grave,  an  idea 
which  modern  thought  generally  repudiates. 
This  idea  is  not  necessarily  connected  with 
that  venerable  phrase,"  but  is  so  closely  related 
to  it  as  to  require  to  be  disavowed  and  dis 

#  See  Chapter  iii 


4  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

sociated  from  it.  When,  however,  one  finds 
on  examination  that  this  was  the  very  idea 
which  that  phrase  originally  carried — "  the 
resurrection  of  the  flesh  "  (according  to  the 
exact  translation  of  the  original) — when  one 
finds,  moreover,  other  and  more  modern  creeds 
affirming  the  resurrection  of  "the  bodies,"  of 
"  the  self-same  bodies  and  none  other,"  it 
becomes  apparent  that  the  generality  of 
Christian  believers  down  to  recent  times  have 
agreed  in  a  belief  which  is  now  regarded  as 
impossible  by  multitudes  of  thinking  people 
both  in  the  church  and  out  of  it.  That  this 
belief  affects  one  of  the  cardinal  doctrines  of 
the  Christian  faith,  renders  it  all  the  more  im- 
portant to  know  whether  it  is  the  substance  or 
only  the  form  of  the  doctrine  that  is  challenged. 
For  so  closely  connected  with  each  other  are 
all  the  leading  truths  of  the  Christian  system, 
that  the  loosening  of  faith  in  any  one  of  them 
is  speedily  followed  by  a  loosening  hold  on  the 
rest. 

It  is  a  common  mistake,  both  of  sceptics 
and  of  believers,  to  identify  the  permanent 
substance  of  truth  with  the  transient  form  in 
which,  for  the  time,  it  is  presented,  and  to 
imagine  that,  if  the  form  is  untenable,  the 
substance  is  indefensible.      Thus  an  outworn 


I.]  THE   PRESENT  DIFFICULTY.  5 

and  untenable  form  of  Christian  doctrine  may 
become  a  serious  stumbling-block  to  intelligent 
minds,  and  a  mischievous  hindrance  to  the 
reception  of  the  substance  of  Christian  faith. 

The  interest  of  Christian  thought  has  for 
some  time  been  flowing  in  a  stronger  current 
toward  the  study  of  the  Biblical  testimony  to 
the  things  that  shall  be  hereafter.  Among 
these  things  the  Resurrection  has  always  been 
elassed.  To  those  who  now  or  at  any  time 
are  Jiving  in  this  world,  the  Resurrection  is,  of 
course,  one  of  the  future  things.  The  belief 
has  reigned  throughout  the  Christian  world 
from  the  time  of  Christ,  and  from  before 
Christ's  time  among  the  Jews,  that  the  Resur- 
rection is  still  future  to  those  in  the  world  of 
the  dead,  just  as  it  is  to  those  in  the  present 
•state  of  being, — that  it  is  an  event  to  occur 
hereafter  at  the  same  moment  to  all  mortals 
who  have  ever  passed  through  the  gate  of 
death  into  the  unseen.  The  general  thought 
of  Christian  believers  to-day  is,  that,  at  that 

"  far  off  Divine  event, 
To  which  the  whole  creation  moves," 

the  countless  multitudes  of  the  dead,  till  then 
waiting,  disembodied,  in  some  middle  state, 
shall  in  a  moment  be  clothed  with  bodies, 
which    bodies   are   to  be  reconstituted  out  of 


6  BEYOND   THE   SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

some,  at  least,  of  the  elements  of  the  long 
since  buried  bodies  which  have  returned  to 
dust.  This  being  done,  these  re-embodied 
spirits  are  to  assemble  before  the  judgment 
throne  of  the  Christ,  whose  coming  in  visible 
glory  has  given  the  Resurrection-call,  and,  after 
hearing  their  final  sentence,  to  depart  into 
their  final  state,  either  heaven  or  hell. 

That  the  Christian  world  has  for  eighteen 
centuries  been  at  rest  in  this  belief,  will  be  to 
many  a  sufficient  evidence  of  its  truth.  Those, 
however,  who  know  that  Christian  study  has 
hitherto  been  turned  mainly  upon  other 
doctrines,  will  deem  it  not  unlikely  that  study 
may  make  such  improvements  in  the  statement 
of  this  doctrine  as  it  has  confessedly  made  in 
the  statement  of  others.  Nor  can  any  one 
whose  desire  it  is  to  secure  such  statements  of 
Christian  doctrine  as  are  most  consonant  with 
the  teachings  of  Christ,  least  vulnerable  to 
anti-Christian  objections,  least  puzzling  to 
candid  inquirers,  and  most  strengthening  to 
Christian  hope,  fail  to  regard  with  a  benevolent 
fairness  a  sincere  attempt,  like  this,  in  that 
direction. 

But,  if  the  Christian  world  has  rested  for 
eighteen  centuries  in  the  doctrine  of  the  Resur- 
rection above  outlined,  it  is,  as  I  think,  not 


I.]  THE   PEE  SENT  DIFFICULTY.  7 

merely  because  study  has  been  turned  mainly 
upon  other  doctrines.  Why  has  study  of  this 
doctrine,  appealing  as  it  does  to  our  strongest 
hopes  and  fears,  been  so  postponed?  Not 
because  there  is  any  lack  of  material  in  the 
Holy  Scriptures,  which  contain  the  Gospel  of 
the  Resurrection.  But  rather,  as  I  am  dis- 
posed to  think,  because  of  certain  prejudg- 
ments which  foreclose  the  case.  Such  are 
these : 

(1.)  The  Resurrection  pertains  not  to  the 
present  course  of  things,  but  to  the  far  future. 

But  may  it  not,  though  future  to  us,  be 
present  to  those  who  have  entered  the  un- 
seen? 

(2.)  It  is  an  event  hereafter  to  be  wrought 
by  a  catastrophic  Divine  power,  operating  by 
an  external  miracle,  and  simultaneously  on  all 
alike. 

But  may  it  not  be  a  process,  continuously 
going  on  by  uniformly  working  laws  of  spiritual 
growth,  according  to  individual  endeavours 
and  the  resulting  conditions  ? 

(3.)  Chiefly,  however,  this  :  the  Resurrection 
is  to  be  the  mighty  work  of  Christ  at  His 
coming. 

But  what  if  Christ,  in  the  true  significance 
of  His  promise,  has  already  come,  and  is  ever 


8  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

coming,  in  the  power  of  His  Resurrection,  with 
a  constantly  increasing  glory  ? 

Such,  as  I  think,  are  the  prejudgments, 
borrowed  from  Jewish  believers*  in  a  Resurrec- 
tion at  the  advent  of  the  Messiah,  which  have 
operated  to  "  seal  the  booh  "  on  this  subject, 
as  a  subject  on  which  no  more  can  be  known 
"  till  the  time  of  the  end." 

Together  with  these  prejudgments,  false 
principles  of  interpretation  have  operated  as  a 
blind  in  the  same  direction. 

One  of  these  may  be  described  as  putting 
Paul  before  Christ,  or,  rather,  putting  what 
we  understand  Paul  to  say  before  what  every 
one  may  readily  perceive  that  Christ  has 
implied. 

For  instance,  in  Christ's  argument  with  the 
Sadducees  (see  Note  A,  Chapter  ii.),  He  con- 
siders it  enough  to  prove  that  the  dead  rise  by 
showing  that  the  dead  live.  His  argument 
rests  on  the  assumption  that  living  after  death 
and  rising  after  death  are  equivalent  terms. 
So,  in  His  dialogue  with  Martha  (see  Chapter 
ii.),  He  asserts  this  present  agency  as  the  Resur- 
rection-Power in  the  same  emphatic  present 
tense  in  which  He  declares  His  present  and 
perpetual   activity  for  our   salvation  in    other 

*  See  Note  B,  appended  to  this  chapter. 


I.]  THE    PRESENT   DIFFICULTY.  9 

respects:  "I  am  the  Resurrection  and  the  Life.''' 
But  Paul,  in  his  letters  to  the  Corinthians  and 
Thessalonians,  speaks  of  the  Eesurrection  as 
future  (as  indeed  it  must  ever  be  to  all  on 
earth).  And  so  we  have  discarded  the  obvious 
implication  of  the  Master's  teaching,  that  the 
Eesurrection  is  not  that  far-off  and  catastrophic 
event  to  all  at  once  that  Martha  and  her 
countrymen  supposed.  If  we  think  we  find  an 
inconsistency  between  the  present  Eesurrection 
that  Christ  plainly  implies,  and  the  future 
Eesurrection  that  Paul  prophesies,  is  it  not  the 
wiser  way — whatever  we  are  able  to  make  of 
the  Apostle's  words — to  put  Christ  before  Paul, 
by  accepting  the  Master's  teachings,  in  their 
obvious  and  natural  meaning,  as  the  ground- 
work of  our  belief  ?*  We  shall  do  this,  unless 
we  think  we  may  rely  on  our  understanding  of 
the  Epistles  better  than  on  our  understanding 
of  the  Gospels. 

Paul  is  generally  regarded  as  teaching  a  far 
future  Eesurrection,  and  some  of  his  expressions 
seem  hardly  reconcilable  with  the  idea  that 
he  entertained  any  other  view.  And  yet,  as  if 
his  thought  was  in  that  process  of  transition 

*  A  clergyman,  of  high  reputation  as  an  exegete,  remarked  to 
he  writer  that  what  Christ  said  to  the  Sadducees  would  be  to 
him  conclusive  of  this  point,  ivere  it  not  for  certain  things  that 
Paul  has  said. 


10  BEYOND   THE   SHADOW,  [CHAP. 

from  a  Jewish  to  a  Christian  way  of  thinking, 
of  which  the  history  of  the  Apostles  furnishes 
familiar  instances,  he  repeatedly  uses  language 
which  obviously  accords  best  with  the  thought 
of  the  Eesurrection  as  a  now  existing  reality. 

"  There  is  a  spiritual  body." 

"So  is  the  Besurrectio7i  of  the  dead.''1 

"  It  is  raised  in  glory." 

"  We  have  a  house  eternal." 

These,  and  much  more  than  these,  the  teach- 
ings of  Christ,  have  been  generally  overlooked 
under  the  influence  of  a  Jewish  bias  toward 
the  Futurist  view,  which  has  assimilated  to  its 
own  way  of  thinking  whatever  it  could.  And 
yet  these  testimonies  are  on  the  record,  appeal- 
ing to  all  whose  study  is  to  seek  truth  rather 
than  to  buttress  opinions  preconceived  or  in- 
herited. Happily,  the  doctrine  of  the  Eesurrec- 
tion is  one  where  such  latitude  of  opinion  is 
accorded  within  the  limits  of  recognised  ortho- 
doxy, that  the  malign  influence  of  religious 
timidity  and  theological  suspicions  need  not  be 
feared,  as  in  some  other  directions,  as  likely  to 
restrict  the  freedom  and  lessen  the  candour 
which  are  requisite  to  a  fair  hearing  of  both 
sides,  in  order  to  find  that  true  point  of  view 
which  includes  all  the  facts,  and  does  equal 
justice  to  apparently  conflicting  testimonies. 


I.]  THE   PEE  SENT   DIFFICULTY.  H 

Another  principle,  absurd  as  well  as  false, 
which  deserves  notice,  is  the  rejection,  at  sight, 
of  whatever  view,  or*  interpretation  of  a  text, 
has  been  associated  with  names  deemed  un- 
sound or  heretical.  I  knew  a  Presbyterian 
minister,  a  thorough-going  believer  in  the 
Nicene  Creed,  to  be  taken,  in  Mississippi,  as 
a  Unitarian,  because  of  a  sermon  which  he 
preached  on  the  Humanity  of  Christ,  a  theme 
which,  though  admitted  by  his  creed,  a  certain 
elder  regarded  with  suspicion,  because  specially 
emphasized  by  Unitarian  preachers.  And  I  am 
quite  sure  that,  in  the  minds  of  such  as  follow 
this  method  of  forming  conclusions,  the  idea 
advanced  in  this  volume,  that  the  Resurrection 
is  now  going  on  in  the  future  state,  will  be 
scouted  at  once  as  "  Swedenborgian."  If  it 
would  be  of  any  benefit  to  say  it,  I  would  say 
to  such  that  I  utterly  dissent  from  the  "  Swe- 
denborgian "  view  of  Holy  Scripture,  and  am 
no  more  a  "Swedenborgian"  than  I  am  a 
Romanist,  in  however  few  or  many  particulars 
I  may  agree  with  each  of  those  religious  deno- 
minations. If  one  is  conceited  enough  to 
assume  that  his  creed  holds  all  the  truth,  and 
any  other  creed  holds  none  of  it,  then  it  will 
be  a  sure  method,  as  well  as  a  swift  one,  to 
dispose    of    this    book     by    saying,    "  You're 


12  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

Swedenborgian."  And  I  shall  be  quite  content, 
at  this  point,  to  leave  all  such  readers  where  they 
belong,  in  the  company  of  that  "  orthodox  " 
church  which  the  Eev.  Mr.  Murray  described 
in  his  notorious  lecture  on  "  Deacons,"  as 
declaring  that  they  would  allow  only  beef  sand- 
wiches at  their  picnic,  because  the  Unitarians 
used  ham  sandwiches. 

Lastly,  I  am  aware  that  some  exception  will 
be  taken  to  any  mode  of  studying  this  subject 
which  refuses  to  be  bound  by  the  obvious  sense 
in  which  the  Apostles  seem  to  have  used  the 
language  which  they  employed  in  delivering 
their  testimony  to  the  fact.  "It  is  time," 
says  an  able  advocate  of  views  which  I  criticise 
throughout  this  volume,  "that  the  language 
of  the  Sacred  Books  should  be  used  in  its  own 
sense,  the  sense  which  it  is  manifestly  intended 
to  convey."  Yes,  but  by  whom  intended — by 
the  human  seer,  or  by  the  Spirit  from  whom 
the  human  seer  derived  his  message?  The 
limitation  of  the  teaching  of  the  Spirit  of  pro- 
phecy by  the  conceptions  of  the  prophet  is 
■flatly  against  the  declaration  of  Scripture, 
that  "  no  prophecy  is  of  private  interpretation 
(2  Pet.  i.  20),  that  is,  limited  by  the  mind  of 
the  individual  interpreter.  It  is  as  absurd  as 
to  limit  the  ideas  of  a  statesman  by  the  ideas 


I.]  THE    PRESENT   DIFFICULTY.  13 

of  the  schoolboy  who  declaims  the  statesman's 
oration.  The  teaching  power  of  the  Divine 
Oracles  is  cut  down  thereby  to  the  measure 
of  the  minds  that  have  transmitted  them  to 
us.  The  promise  of  our  Lord  that  His  Spirit, 
when  come,  should  "guide  into  all  truth," 
cannot  be  regarded  as  limited  to  the  first 
generation  of  the  Church.  Greater  insight 
into  "  the  things  concerning  the  kingdom  of 
God"  than  even  Apostles  possessed,  who  be- 
lieved the  final  catastrophe  of  the  physical 
heavens  and  earth  to  be  imminent  in  their 
own  lifetime,  must  be  accorded  to  those  who 
have  the  teaching  of  Christ's  Spirit  together 
with  the  commentary  upon  Christ's  words 
which  is  furnished  by  the  instructive  expe- 
rience of  the   Christian  centuries. 

The  claim,  however,  that  "  the  obvious 
sense,"  which  we  deem  that  any  writer  in  the 
Scriptures  must  have  attached  to  prophecies 
which  we  deem  inspired,  determines  the  sense 
which  we  must  attach  to  them,  may  be  tested 
by  a  case  in  which  Christ  Himself  has  declared 
a  prophecy  to  have  been  fulfilled.  Malachi  had 
prophesied  the  coming  oi" Elijah  the  %)rophet" 
before  the  coming  of  the  Lord.  Christ  affirms 
that  this  was  fulfilled  in  the  advent  of  John  the 
Baptist. 


14  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

The  Prophecy.  The  Fulfilment. 
Behold  I  will  send  you  Elijah  For  all  the  prophets  and  the 
the  prophet  before  the  coming  law    prophesied    until   John. 
of  the  great  and  dreadful  day  And  if  ye  are  willing  to  re- 
ef the  Lord.  ceive  it,  this  is  Elijah,  which  is 
Mai.  iv.  5.  to  come. 

Matt.  xi.  13, 14. 

It  is  far  more  likely  that  Malachi  and  his 
contemporaries  understood  this  prophecy  as 
we  know  it  was  generally  understood  by  the 
Scribes  in  Christ's  time,  in  the  sense  of  an 
actual  return  of  the  ancient  Elijah.  It  was 
something  that  only  experience  could  disclose, 
that  the  fulfilment  would  not  be  literal,  but 
spiritual,  by  the  coming  not  of  Elijah,  but  of 
an  Elijah  who  would  come  not  in  the  form  of 
Elijah  but  "  in  the  spirit  and  power  of  Elijah" 
(Luke  i.  17.)  The  Scribes,  when  they  pressed 
against  the  claims  of  Jesus  the  prophecy  that 
V  Elijah  must  first  come  "  (Mark  ix.  11),  were 
simply  holding  to  the  literal  and  obvious  sense, 
as  contended  for  to-day.  After  such  a  refuta- 
tion it  will  not  do  to  press  their  principle  in 
the  interpretation  of  prophecy,  however  we  are 
sometimes  required  by  the  nature  of  other 
subjects,  as  in  precepts  and  in  arguments,  to 
insist  upon  it. 

The  object  of  these  studies  upon  the  Resur- 
rection is  to  redeem  a  vital  Christian  doctrine 
from    obsolete    and    obsolescent    crudities    of 


I.]       TESTIMONY  OF  THE  CREEDS.       15 

statement  which  provoke  scepticism,  and  to 
promote  clearness  and  consistency  in  Christian 
thinking  upon  the  great  Christian  Hope,  as 
based  upon  Christ's  words  of  life.  Thus  it 
is  hoped  to  contribute  somewhat  toward  a 
thoroughly  Biblical  doctrine  of  the  Eesurrection, 
that  shall  be  congruous  with  the  best  ten- 
dencies of  modern  thought. 


NOTE  A. 

THE     TESTIMONY     OF     THE     PRINCIPAL     CHRISTIAN     CREEDS 
UPON    THE    DOCTRINE    OF    THE    RESURRECTION. 

The  Apostles'  Creed. 

This  was  developed  during  the  second  century.  Its 
testimony   on   this   subject   is  comprised  in  the  words: 

He  ascended  into  heaven,  and  sitteth  on  the  right  hand 
cf  God  the  Father  Almighty.  From  thence  He  shall 
come  to  judge  the  quick  and  the  dead.  I  believe  in 
.  .  .  .  the  resurrection  of  the  body  and  the  life  ever- 
lasting." 

Irenoeus  (a.d.  180)  uses  the  words  :  "  His  appearing 
from  heaven  in  the  glory  of  the  Father  ...  to  raise 
up  all  flesh  of  all  mankind  .  .  .  and  that  He  may 
execute  righteous  judgment  over  all."  Tertullian  (a.  d. 
200)  uses  the  words  :  "  Coming  to  judge  the  quick  and  the 
dead  also  through  the  resurrection  of  the  flesh."  Also 
the  following  form  :  "  He  will  come  again  with  glory 
to  take  the  saints  into  the  enjoyment  of  eternal  life 
and  the  celestial  promises,  and  to  judge  the  wicked  with 


1G  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

eternal  fire,  after  the  resuscitation  of  both,  with  the  resti 
tution  of  the  flesh." 

All  the  ancient  fomis  of  the  Apostles'  Creed  which 
refer  to  the  resurrection  of  mankind  use  the  phrase 
o-apnhs  avdaraaiv,  "  carnis  resurrectionem,"  the  resur- 
rection of  the  flesh.  See  Table  in  Schaffs  "  Creeds  of 
Christendom/'  ii.  pp.  52-55,  covering  the  period  from  200 
to  G50  A.D. 

The  Nicccno-Constantinopolitan  Creed,  a.d.  381. 

[Consented  to  by  all  Trinitarian  Churches — Greek,   Eoman, 

Protestant.] 

— He  shall  come  again  with  glory  to  judge  both  the 
quick  and  the  dead ;  whose  kingdom  shall  have  no  end. 
.  .  .  And  I  look  for  the  resurrection  of  the  dead,  and 
the  life  of  the  world  to  come. 

The  Athanasian  Creed. 

[Originating  probably  in  the  seventh  century,  and  current 
mostly  in  the  Catholic  churches  of  Western  Europe.] 

—  He  ascended  into  heaven,  He  sitteth  on  the  right 
hand  of  the  Father  God  Almighty,  from  whence  He  shall 
come  to  judge  the  quick  and  the  dead.  At  whose  coming 
all  men  shall  rise  again  with  their  bodies,  and  shall  give 
account  for  their  own  works.  And  they  that  have  done 
good  shall  go  into  life  everlasting,  and  they  that  have 
done  evil  into  everlasting  fire. 


The  Council  of  Trent,  a.d.  15G3. 

This  is  the  authoritative  exponent  of  Eoman  Catholi- 
cism, and  bears  testimony  on  this  subject  only  in  re- 
affirming the  words  of  the  Nicamo-Constantinopolitan 
Creed,  quoted  above. 


I.]       TESTIMONY  OF  THE  CREEDS.       17 


The  Orthodox  Confession  of  the  Eastern  Church, 
a.d.  1G43. 

Setting-  forth  the  faith  of  the  Greek  (and  Eussian)  Church.] 

Q.  CXX.  What  is  the  eleventh  Article  of  the  faith  ? 

A.  I  look  for  the  resurrection  of  the  dead. 

Q.  CXXI.  What  does  this  Article  of  the  faith  teach  ? 

A.  It  teaches  positively  and  with  perfect  truth,  that 
there  will  be  a  resuscitation  of  human  bodies,  alike  of  the 
righteous  and  the  wicked,  from  the  death  that  has  passed 
upon  them.  .  .  .  Moreover  they  shall  be  altogether 
the  same  bodies  with  which  they  have  lived  in  this  world.. 

The  Confession  of  the  Eastern  Church,  above  quoted, 
is  in  the  form  of  a  catechism  upon  the  ancient  Nicene 
Creed,  as  the  quotation  shows.  Somewhat  more  explicit 
we  find — 

The  Longer  Catechism  of  the  Eastern  Church, 
a.d.  1839. 

Q.  3G7.  How  shall  the  body  rise  again,  after  it  has 
rotted  and  perished  in  the  ground  ? 

A.  Since  God  formed  the  body  from  the  ground  origin- 
ally, He  can  equally  restore  it  after  it  has  perished  in 
the  ground.  The  Apostle  Paul  illustrates  this  by  the 
analogy  of  a  grain  of  seed,  which  rots  in  the  earth,, 
but  from  which  there  springs  up  afterwards  a  plant  or 
tree. 

Q.  369.  When  shall  the  resurrection  of  the  dead  be  ? 

A.  At  the  end  of  this  visible  world. 

According  to  the  statements  of  this  Catechism,  the 
resurrection  is  to  be  ushered  in  by  the  coining  of 
Christ  in  visible  glory,  to  execute  judgment  upon  alL 
mankind. 

2 


18  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP 

Luther's  Small  Catechism,  a.d.  1520. 

[In  use  among  the  Liitheran  Churches  of  America.] 

This,  besides  teaching  the  Apostles'  Creed,  teaches  upon 

it  the  comment  that  Christ  "will  raise  up  me  and  all  the 

dead  at  the  last  day,  and  will  grant  everlasting  life  to  me 

and  to  all  who  believe  in  Christ." 

The  Scotch  Confession,  a.d.  15G0. 

Art.  XXV. 

....  Secondly,  in  the  general  judgment  there  shall 
"be  given  to  every  man  and  woman  resurrection  of  the 
flesh.  For  the  sea  shall  give  up  her  dead  ;  the  earth,  they 
that  be  therein  enclosed  ;  yea,  the  ternal  our  God  shall 
stretch  out  His  hand  on  the  dust,  and  the  dead  shall  arise 
incorruptible,  and  that  in  the  substance  of  the  self- same 
flesh  that  every  man  now  bears,  to  receive  according  to 
their  works,  glory  or  punishment,  etc. 

The  Bc'tgic  Confession,  a.d.  1561. 
[Of  the  Eeformed  (Dutch)  Church  in  America. 
Art.  XXXVII.    Of  the  Last  Judgment. 
Finally,  we  believe,  according  to  the  Word  of  God,  when 
the  time  appointed  by  the  Lord  (which  is  unknown  to  all 
creatures)  is  come,  and  the  number  of  the  elect  complete, 
that  our  Lord  Jesus   Christ  will  come  from  heaven  cor- 
porally and  visibly,  as  He  ascended,  with  great  glory  and 
majesty,  to  declare  Himself  Judge  of  the  quick  and  dead, 
burniug  this  old  world  with  fire  and  flame  to  cleanse  it. 
And  then  all  men  will  personally  appear  before  this  great 
Judge,  both  men  and  women,  and  children,  that    have 
been  from  the  beginning  of  the  world  to  the  end  thereof, 
being  summoned  by  the  voice  of  the  archangel,  and  by 


I.]  TESTIMONY   OF   TIIE    CREEDS.  19 

the  sound  of  the  trumpet  of  God.  For  all  the  dead  shall  he 
raised  out  of  the  earth,  and  their  souls  joined  and  united  with 
their  proper  hodies  in  which  they  formerly  lived.  As  for 
those  who  shall  then  he  living,  they  shall  not  die  as  the 
others,  hut  he  changed  in  the  twinkling  of  an  eye,  and 
from  corruptible  become  incorruptible.  Then  the  books 
(that  is  to  say,  the  consciences)  shall  be  opened,  and  the 
dead  judged  according  to  what  they  have  done  in  this 
■world,  whether  it  be  good  or  evil,  etc. 

The  Thirty -nine  Articles  of  Beligion  of  the  Church  of 
England   a.d.  15G2. 

These,  held  likewise  in  a  revised  form  by  the  Protestant 
Episcopal  Church  in  the  United  States  of  America,  are 
marked  by  greater  reserve  upon  this  subject  than  any 
of  the  other  creeds.  The  only  reference  to  it  is  the 
following : — 

IV.    Of  the  Resurrection  op  Christ. 

Christ\lid  truly  rise  again  from  death  and  took  again 
His  body,  with  flesh,  bones,  and  all  things  appertaining  to 
the  perfection  of  man's  nature  ;  wherewith  He  ascended 
into  heaven,  and  there  sitteth,  until  He  return  to  judge  all 
men  at  the  last  day. 

The  Anglican  Catechism,  a.d.  1549, 
teaches  on  this  subject  simply  the  Apostles'  Creed. 

The  Heidelberg  Catechism^  a.d.  1563. 
[Of  the  German  Reformed  Church  of  the  United  States.] 

Q.  52  [upon  the  Apostles'  Creed] .  What  comfort  is  it 

to  thee  that  Christ  shall  come  again  to  judge  the  quick 
and  the  dead  ? 

A.   That  in  all  my  sorrows  and  persecutions,    wit 


20  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

uplifted  head,  I  look  for  the  self-same  One  who  has  before 
offered  Himself  for  me  to  the  judgment  of  God,  and 
removed  from  me  all  curse,  to  come  again  as  Judge 
from  heaven  ;  who  shall  cast  all  His  and  my  enemies 
into  everlasting  condemnation,  but  shall  take  me,  with 
all  His  chosen  ones,  to  Himself,  into  heavenly  joy  and 
glory. 

Q.  57.  What  comfort  does  the  resurrection  of  the  body 
afford  thee  ? 

A.  That  not  only  my  soul,  after  this  life,  shall  be  imme- 
diately taken  up  to  Christ  its  Head,  but  also  that  this 
my  body,  raised  by  the  power  of  Christ,  shall  again  be 
united  with  my  soul,  and  made  like  unto  the  glorious 
body  of  Christ. 

The  Westminster  Confession,  a.d.  1G47. 

[Of  the  Presbyterian  Churches  generally.] 

Chapter  XXXII.    Of  the   State  op  Men   after  Deat 

AND    OF   THE   BeSHRRECTION   OF    THE    DEAD. 

I.  The  bodies  of  men,  after  death,  return  to  dust,  and 
see  corruption  ;  but  their  souls  (which  neither  die  nor 
sleep),  having  an  immortal  subsistence,  immediately  re- 
turn to  God  who  gave  them.  The  souls  of  the  righteous 
being  then  made  perfect  in  holiness,  are  received  into  the 
highest  heavens,  where  they  behold  the  face  of  God  in 
light  and  glory,  waiting  for  the  full  redemption  of  their 
bodies;  and  the  souls  of  the  wicked  are  cast  into  hell, 
where  they  remain  in  torments  and  utter  darkness,  reserved 
to  the  judgment  of  the  great  day.  Besides  these  two  places 
for  souls  separated  from  their  bodies,  the  Scripture  acknow- 
ledgeth  none. 

II.  At  the  last  day,  such  as  are  found  alive  shall  not 
die,  but  be  changed,  and  all  the  dead  shall  be  raised  up 
■with  the  self-same  bodies  and  none  other,  although  with 


I.]       TESTIMONY  OF  THE  CREEDS.        21 

different  qualities,  which  shall  be  united  again  to  their 
souls  for  ever. 

III.  The  bodies  of  the  unjust  shall,  by  the  power  of 
Christ,  be  raised  to  dishonour ;  the  bodies  of  the  just,  by 
His  Spirit,  unto  honour,  and  be  made  conformable  to  His 
own  glorious  body. 

Chapter  XXXIII.    Of  the  Last  Judgment. 

I.  God  hath  appointed  a  day  wherein  He  will  judge  the 
world  in  righteousness  by  Jesus  Christ,  to  whom  all  power 
and  judgment  is  given  of  the  Father.  In  which  day,  not 
only  the  apostate  angels  shall  be  judged,  but  likewise  all 
persons  that  have  lived  upon  earth,  shall  appear  before 
the  tribunal  of  Christ,  to  give  an  account  of  their  thoughts, 
words,  and  deeds  ;  and  to  receive  according  to  what  they 
have  done  in  the  body,  whether  good  or  evil. 

II Then  shall  the  righteous  go  into  everlasting 

life,  and  receive  that  fulness  of  joy  and  refreshing  which 
shall  come  from  the  presence  of  the  Lord ;  but  the  wicked, 
who  know  not  God,  and  obey  not  the  Gospel  of  Jesus 
Christ,  shall  be  cast  into  eternal  torments,  and  be  punished 
with  everlasting  destruction  from  the  presence  of  the 
Lord,  and  from  the  glory  of  His  power. 

The  Savoy  Declaration,  a.d.  1G58. 

[Adopted  by  the  Congregational  Churches  of  England.] 

Affirms  the  same  as  the  "Westminster,  above  quoted. 

The  Boston  Confession,  a.d.  1C80. 
Adopted  by  the  Congregational  Churches   of  New  England.j 
Affirms  the  same  as  the  Westminster,  above   quoted. 

The  Methodist  Articles  of  Religion,  a.d.  1784. 
These    agree    on    this    subject  with    the    Thirty-nine 


22  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

Articles  of  the  Church  of  England,  above  quoted,  of  which 
Dr.  SchafT  says  that  the  Methodist  Articles  "  are  a  liberal 
and  judicious  abridgment "  of  them. 

The  Declaration  of  The  Congregational  Union  of 
England  and  Wales,  a.d.  1S33. 

XIX.  They  believe  that  Christ  will  finally  come  to 
judge  the  whole  human  race  according  to  their  works ; 
that  the  bodies  of  the  dead  will  be  raised  again  ;  and  that, 
as  the  Supreme  Judge,  He  will  divide  the  righteous  from 
the  wicked,  will  receive  the  righteous  into  "  life  ever- 
lasting," but  send  away  the  wicked  into  "everlasting 
punishment." 

The  New  Hampshire  Baptist  Confession,  a.d.  1833. 

[Widely  adopted  by  Baptists,  especially  in  the  Northern  and 
Western  States.] 

XVIII.    Of  the  World  to  Come. 

We  believe  that  the  end  of  the  world  is  approaching  • 
that  at  the  last  day  Christ  will  descend  from  heaven,  and 
raise  the  dead  from  the  grave  to  final  retribution;  that 
a  solemn  separation  will  then  take  place ;  that  the  wicked 
will  be  adjudged  to  endless  punishment  and  the  righteous 
to  endless  joy;  and  that  this  judgment  will  fix  for  ever 
the  final  state  of  men  in  heaven  or  hell,  on  principles  of 
righteousness. 

Confession  of  the  Free  Will  Baptists,  a.d.  1834, 
18G8. 

Chapter  XVIII.     Death  and  the  Intermediate  State. 

1.  Death. — As  a  result  of  sin,  all  mankind  are  subject 
to  the  death  of  the  body. 

'2.  The  Intermediate  State. — The  soul  does  not  die 
with  the  body  ;   but  immediate^  after  death,  enters  into 


I.]       TESTIMONY  OF  THE  CEEEDS.       23 

a  conscious  state  of  happiness  or  misery,  according  to  the 
moral  character  here  possessed. 

Chapter  XIX.     Second  Coming  of  Christ. 

The  Lord  Jesus,  who  ascended  on  high  and  sits  at  the 
right  hand  of  God,  will  come  again  to  close  the  gospel 
dispensation,  glorify  His  saints,  and  judge  the  world. 

Chapter  XX.    The  Eesurrection. 

The  Scriptures  teach  the  resurrection  of  the  bodies  of 
all  men  at  the  last  day,  each  in  its  own  order  ;  they  that 
have  clone  good  will  come  forth  to  the  resurrection  of 
life,  and  they  that  have  done  evil  to  the  resurrection  of 
damnation. 

Chapter  XXI.     The   General    Judgment  and  Future 
Retributions. 

1.  The  General  Judgment. — There  will  he  a  general 
judgment,  when  time  and  man's  probation  will  close  for 
ever.  Then  all  men  will  be  judged  according  to  their 
works. 

2.  Future  Eetributions.  —  Immediately  after  the 
general  judgment  the  righteous  will  enter  into  eternal 
life,  and  the  wicked  will  go  into  a  state  of  endless 
punishment. 


The  Declaration  of  Faith  of  the  National    Council  of 
Congregational  Churches,  Boston,  a.d.  1S85. 

This,  after  a  declaration  of  adherence  "  substantially  " 
to  the  older  confessions,  i.e.,  to  the  Boston  Confession  and 
its  predecessors,  above  quoted,  goes  on  to  say  : — 

We  believe  also  in  the  organised  and  visible  Church,  in 
the  ministry  of  the  Word,  in  the  Sacrament  of  Baptism 
and  the  Lord's  Supper,  in  the  resurrection  of  the    body 


24  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

and  in  the  final  judgment,  the  issues  of  which  are  eternal 
life  and  everlasting  punishment. 

Articles  of  Religion  of  the  Reformed  Episcojial  Church 
in  America,  a.d.  1875. 

Art.   III.     Or    the    Resurrection    of  Christ  and   His 
Second  Coming. 

Christ  did  truly  rise  from  death,  and  took  again  His 
body  with  flesh,  bones,  and  all  things  appertaining  to  the 
perfection  of  man's  nature,  wherewith  He  ascended  into 
heaven  and  there  sitteth,  our  High  Priest  and  Advocate, 
at  the  right  hand  of  the  Father,  whence  He  will  return  to 
judge  the  world  in  righteousness.  This  Second  Coming 
is  the  blessed  hope  of  the  Church.  The  heavens  have  re- 
ceived Him  till  the  times  of  the  restitution  of  all  things. 
To  those  who  look  for  Him  shall  He  appear  a  second  time 
without  sin  unto  salvation.  Then  shall  He  change  the 
body  of  our  humiliation  that  it  may  be  fashioned  like 
unto  His  glorious  body.  He  will  take  to  Himself  His 
great  power,  and  shall  reign  till  He  have  put  all  enemies 
under  His  feet. 

Statement  of  Doctrine  published  ly  the  Commission 
appointed  under  the  direction  of  the  National 
Council  of  the  Congregational  Churches  of  the 
United  States,  a.d.  1884. 

XII.  We  believe  in  the  ultimate  prevalence  of  the 
kingdom  of  Christ  over  all  the  earth  ;  in  the  glorious 
appearing  of  the  great  God  and  our  Saviour  Jesus  Christ  ; 
in  the  resurrection  of  the  dead ;  and  in  a  final  judgmen 
the  issues  of  which  are  everlasting  punishment  and 
everlasting  life. 


I.]  TTIE   OPINIONS   OF   THE   JEWS,  25 


NOTE   B. 

ON    THE    OPINIONS     OF     THE     JEWS      CONCERNING     THE 
RESURRECTION. 

The  Eesurrection  was  a  current  doctrine  of  the  Jews 
in  the  time  of  Christ,  but  so  presented  as  to  provoke  a 
degree  of  scepticism,  which,  in  the  case  of  the  Sadducees, 
went  to  the  length  of  denying  the  Eesurrection  utterly. 
Some  of  the  Rabbis  taught  a  purer  doctrine,  holding  that 
in  the  Eesurrection  the  just  would  neither  eat,  drink,  nor 
marry.  But  the  majority,  both  of  the  Eabbis  and  of  the 
people,  held  a  doctrine  extremely  gross.  The  dead  were 
to  be  raised  not  only  in  their  former  bodies,  but  even  with 
their  bodily  appetites  and  passions.  They  would  eat  and 
drink  and  marry.  The  case  cf  the  woman  with  seven 
husbands,  which  the  Sadducees  proposed  to  Christ,  might 
have  been  suggested  to  these  sceptics  by  a  case  in  one  of 
the  books,  in  which  it  was  decided  that  a  woman  who  had 
had  two  husbands  would  be  given  to  the  first.  If  men 
were  buried  in  their  usual  clothes,  in  these  clothes  they 
would  rise,  and  even  their  bodily  blemishes  and  defects 
would  be  perpetuated  in  the  Eesurrection. 

While  the  extreme  grossness  of  these  notions  was 
abated  in  the  thinking  of  the  Christians,  the  Jews' 
general  conception  of  the  Eesurrection  passed  over  into 
Church  teaching,  as  the  writings  of  many  of  the  Fathers 
show.  Witness  such  a  passage  as  this  in  the  writings  of 
Augustine  : — 

"  Every  body,  however  dispersed  here,  shall  be  restored 
perfect  in  the  Eesurrection.  Every  body  shall  be  com- 
plete in  quantity  and  quality.  As  many  hairs  as  have 
been  shaved  off,  or  nails  cut,  shall  not  return  in  such 
enormous  quantities  to  deform  their  original  places,  but 
neither  shall  they  perish  :  they  shall  return  into  the  body 
into  that  substance  from  which  they  grew." 


26  BEYOND    THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

Ezekiel's  vision  of  the  Resurrection  of  the  dry  bones  in 
the  valley,  which  he  narrates  in  his  37th  chapter,  pro- 
phesying the  revival  of  the  national  life  of  Israel  after  tho 
Captivity,  furnished  the  original  type  of  this  doctrine, 
around  which  the  later  accretions  grew  in  the  course  of 
speculation.  It  was  believed  that  at  the  coming  of  the 
Messiah  all  Israelites  would  be  gathered  from  their 
dispersion  throughout  the  world  to  the  Holy  Land,  and 
that  the  Kesurrection  of  the  dead  would  take  place 
thereupon. 

Thereupon,  also,  it  was  believed  that  a  final  judgment 
would  take  place  in  the  valley  of  Jehoshaphat,  as  the 
ravine  which  separates  Jerusalem  from  the  Mount  of 
Olives  on  the  east  was  called.  That  valley  became  in 
consequence  a  favourite  burial  place,  as  the  place  where 
the  Messiah,  as  was  believed,  would  appear  to  raise  the 
dead  preparatory  to  that  final  judgment.  The  last  wish 
of  the  venerable  Eabbi  was  to  be  laid  there  with  staff  in 
hand,  in  readiness  for  the  coming  of  the  Messiah. 

Joel's  prophecy  (hi.  2,  12)  of  a  judgment  of  "  all 
nations'''  in  the  Valley  of  Jehoshaphat  gave  rise  to 
these  expectations.  It  is  doubtful,  however,  whether 
that  ravine  to  the  east  of  Jerusalem  bore  the  name  of 
the  Valley  of  Jehoshaphat  in  Joel's  time.  Jehoshaphat 
signifies  "  the  judgment  of  Jehovah,"  and  might  apply  to 
any  valley  in  which  a  signal  overthrow  in  battle  took 
place.  Some  such  event  was  probably  the  object  of  Joel's 
reference. 

To  match  the  Jews'  belief  concerning  the  appearance  of 
the  Messiah  in  the  Valley  of  Jehoshaphat,  the  Christians 
had  their  generally  received  belie  ,  that  the  Mount  of 
Olives,  from  which  Christ  ascended,  was  to  be  the  locality 
of  His  second  advent,  to  raise  the  dead  and  judge  the 
world. 

Whoever  will  trace  the  doctrine  of  the  Advent,  the 
Resurrection,  and  Final  Judgment,  that  prevailed  while 


I.]  THE    OPINIONS   OF   THE   JEWS.  27 

as  yet  the  Temple  stood,  will  not  fail  to  mark  the  like- 
ness, at  least  in  general  outline,  but  especially  in  the 
whole  mechanical  way  of  conceiving  the  subject,  as 
things  externalised  to  the  senses  in  show  and  catastrophe, 
in  which  these  doctrines  passed  over  from  the  Temple  to 
the  Church,  to  flourish  in  the  Church  to  this  day. 

Whether  this  Jewish  mode  of  thought  upon  the  subject 
has  not  been  the  grand  mistake  which  the  Church  has 
made  in  its  doctrine  of  the  Kingdom  of  Christ — whether 
it  is  not  to-day  a  prodigious  anachronism  in  a  period 
which  Christians  speak  of  as  "  the  Dispensation  cf  the 
Spirit,"  can  by  no  means  be  deemed  a  groundless 
question. 

Remark. — As  soon  as  one  who  studies  the  doctrine  of 
the  Resurrection  historically,  as  every  doctrine  must  be 
studied  that  is  studied  intelligently,  marks  the  similarity 
in  essentials  between  the  conception  presented  in  the 
Christian  creeds  and  that  held  among  the  countrymen  of 
Christ,  this  question  rises  :  Did  Christ  teach  or  indorse 
the  Jewish  doctrine,  that  the  Messiah  should  come  in 
visible  form  to  make  an  end  of  things  terrestrial,  and  that 
the  dead,  at  His  appearing,  were  to  be  re-embodied  amid 
the  glories  and  terrors  of  a  day  of  fire,  wherein  the  earth 
itself  shall  melt  ?  This  was  a  rabbinical  doctrine.  But 
is  it  Christ's  ?  If  the  Apostles  seem  to  favour  it,  did 
they  get  it  from  their  Master,  or  from  their  earlier 
teachers ? 


CHAPTEE   II. 

THE  BESUEBECTION  A    CONTINUOUS 
REALITY. 


CHAPTER   II. 

THE  RESURRECTION  A  CONTINUOUS  REALITY. 
"  I  am  the  Resurrection  and  the  Life." — John  xi.  25. 

The  general  subject  of  the  Resurrection 
divides  into  three  main  questions  :  When  shall 
it  be  ?  What  shall  it  be  ?  How  shall  it  be  ? 
To  each  of  these  the  words  of  Christ  give  clear 
and  sufficient  answers.  Only  one  of  these 
questions,  however,  can  be  answered  at  a  time. 
Which,  then,  shall  we  take  first?  If  we 
should  first  take  up  the  question,  How  ?  we 
might  find  reason  in  the  words  of  Christ  to 
think  that  the  Resurrection  is  not  a  miraculous 
operation  from  without,  but  a  spiritual  develop- 
ment from  within  the  man.*  This  of  itself 
would  go  far  to  show,  when  the  Resurrection 
shall  be  ;  that  it  is  no  long-waiting  and  far-off 
event,  but  a  continuous  reality  now  manifest  in 
the  unseen  world.  Such,  however,  has  been  the 
predominance  of   mistaken   conceptions,   that 

*  Eor  this,  see  Chapter  ix. 


32  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

they  will  only  give  way  gradually,  if  they  give 
way  at  all.  For  a  gradual  approach  to  a  true 
conception,  it  is  better  to  take  the  other 
question  first,  namely  :  When  is  the  Resurrec- 
tion? We  may  thus,  perhaps,  the  better 
extricate  ourselves,  point  by  point,  from  the 
grasp  of  false  ideas,  and  gradually  prepare 
the  basis  of  conclusions  in  which  we  may 
intelligently  rest. 

The  answer  to  the  question,  When  ?  is  given 
in  our  Lord's  answer  to  Martha  in  her  mourn- 
ing for  Lazarus's  death  :  "  I  am  the  Resurrec- 
tion and  the  Life." 

I.  In  order  to  understand  an  answer,  we 
must  know  the  question  to  which  the  answer 
came.  So  here.  These  words  of  our  Lord 
were  spoken  in  answer  to  the  implied  denial  of 
a  present  Resurrection  which  Martha  had  just 
made.  As  she  wept  for  her  dead  brother, 
Christ  said,  "  Thy  brother  shall  rise  again." 
We  must  not  suppose  these  words  to  bear  a 
special  sense,  to  refer  to  the  miracle  He  was 
about  to  perform  in  restoring  the  brother  to 
the  sister.  That,  strictly  speaking,  was  reani- 
mation,  not  resurrection.*  Christ's  following 
utterances  show  that  He  was  speaking,  in  a 
general  way,  of  the  Resurrection,  as  the  truth 

*  See  Note  B,  appended  to  the  next  chapter. 


II.]  A   CONTINUOUS   BEAUTY.  33 

most  comforting  to  any  mourner.  But  to 
Martha,  with  her  ideas  of  it,  it  was  poor  com- 
fort. She  knew  that  her  brother  should  rise 
again.  But,  like  the  Jews  of  her  time,  ay,  like 
most  Christians  now,  who  inherit  their  Kesur- 
rection-doctrine  more  from  the  Jews  than  from 
Christ,  Martha  thought  only  of  a  grand  and 
general  Kesurrection-day  far  distant.  Long  ere 
that  day  she  would  be  with  her  brother  in  the 
supposed  place  of  expectant  souls,  in  waiting 
till  the  buried  body  should  be  raised  and  given 
back.  "  I  know"  she  cried,  "  that  he  shall  rise 
again  in  the  Resurrection  at  the  last  day." 

This  was  equivalent  to  saying:  "Yes,  he 
will  rise  again,  but  not  till  that  far-off  day  shall 
come.  Tell  me  more  and  better  than  that ; 
tell  me  something  I  do  not  know,  if  you  would 
comfort  me  now." 

To  meet  this  want,  to  give  a  consolation 
stronger  than  that  far-off  hope  because  a 
reality  of  the  present  hour,  our  Lord  replied, 
"  I  am  the  Resurrection  and  the  Life."  Poorly 
did  Martha  comprehend  it,  as  the  sequel 
showed,  though  she  sincerely  declared  her 
belief  in  it.  Poorly  do  many  other  sincere 
believers  to-day  comprehend  the  comforting 
significance  of  this  sublime  "I  am."  Who- 
ever would  comprehend  it  must  start  from  this. 


34  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

fact,  that  by  these  words  our  Lord  undertook 
to  comfort  a  mind,  uncomforted  by  a  far-off 
hope,  with  the  disclosure  of  a  present  reality. 
If  the  reality  was  not  a  thing  of  the  present, 
then  it  was  no  better  than  the  far-off  hope. 
But  our  Lord  offers  it  as  evidently  better. 

II.  Two  truths  are  presented  in  our  Lord's 
words  to  Martha,  which  demand  distinct 
recognition. 

(1.)  The  first  is  that  of  a  Power.  "I  am" 
expresses  personality,  and  personality  is  not 
an  event,  but  a  power.  The  central  thing  in 
the  Resurrection  is  not  an  occurrence,  an  event, 
an  effect.  It  is  a  spiritual  cause,  a  vital  power. 
Paul  seems  to  have  understood  it  thus,  when 
he  described  his  own  endeavour,  "  that  I  may 
know  Him,  and  the  yoioer  of  His  Resurrection." 
Our  Lord  here  declares  Himself  to  be  the 
personal  power  which  is  the  efficient  cause 
of  what  we  call  the  Resurrection.  It  is  in  a 
derived  and  secondary  sense  that  we  speak  oi 
the  effect  of  this  power  as  the  Resurrection. 
This  personal  power  and  the  manner  of  its 
working  will  be  understood,  when  we  come 
to  study  the  Resurrection  as  a  development. 
(Chap,  ix.)  Only  let  it  be  borne  in  mind  from 
the  first,  to  avoid  misunderstandings,  that  it  is 
power  working  by  orderly  growth  from  within 


II.]  A  CONTINUOUS  REALITY.  35 

the  man,  not    by    miraculous   operation  from 
without 

(2.)  The  second  truth  involved  in  our  Lord's 
words  is,  that  His  Eesurrection-power  is  a 
power  in  present  activity.  He  did  not  say,  "  I 
shall  be,"  but  "  I  am."  We  should  never  fail 
to  place  emphasis  on  the  word  am,  in  our 
reading  of  this  passage. 

The  full  significance  of  this  short  but  preg- 
nant word  grows  upon  us,  as  soon  as  we  place 
it  in  the  list,  to  which  it  belongs,  of  these 
sublime  self-assertions  with  which  our  Lord 
declared  the  various  relations  of  His  saving 
power  to  mankind.  In  every  instance,  at  least 
until  we  come  to  this,  He  expresses  by  the 
words,  "  I  am,"  the  present  activity  of  that 
power. 

"  I  am  the  Light  of  the  world."  We  know 
that  His  light-giving  power  is  operative  con- 
stantly. 

"  I  am  the  Good  Shepherd."  We  know  that 
His  pastoral  care  is  in  exercise  to-day. 

"I  am  the  Living  Bread."  We  know  that 
He  is  now  the  nourisher  of  believing  souls. 

"  I  am  the  Door."  We  know  that  He  is 
now  and  constantly  our  means  of  coming 
into  spiritual  life  to  God. 

How  is  it,  then,  that  any  one  can  doubt  Him 


36  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

to  be  the  Resurrection-power,  with  the  same 
present  efficiency,  the  same  continuity  of 
action,  which  we  ascribe  to  Him  as  the  Light- 
giver,  the  Shepherd,  the  Food,  the  Door  t 
How  can  we  deem  it  any  more  doubtful  that 
His  power  raises  the  departed  Christian  to-day 
into  the  fulness  of  spiritual  life  in  the  spiritual 
body,  than  that  He  to-day  enlightens  and  guides 
and  feeds  the  Christian  in  his  pilgrimage  to  the 
heavenly  country  ? 

I  have  no  doubt  that  here  we  have  been  mis- 
led by  a  misunderstanding  of  some  other  parts 
of  Holy  Scripture, — chiefly  those  which  relate 
to  the  coming  of  the  Lord, — into  a  palpable 
perversion  of  our  Lord's  direct  testimony. 
Dominated  by  prepossessions  concerning  the 
advent  of  the  Messiah,  and  His  judgment  of 
the  world,  which  we  have  inherited  from  the 
Jews  of  Christ's  time,  our  minds  have  been 
blinded  to  the  significance  of  some  of  His  most 
precious  words.  And  this  is  the  poor  result 
we  have  come  to  on  the  subject  of  the  Resur- 
rection :  All  the  other  powers  which  our  Lord, 
by  his  majestic  "  I  am,"  asserts  as  His  present 
prerogatives,  we  regard  as  in  present  and 
perpetual  activity.  Not  so,  however,  His 
Resurrection-power.  This,  though  claimed  for 
the  present,  like   ail  the  others,  by  the  same 


II.]  A   CONTINUOUS   REALITY.  37 

significant  "  I  AM,"  we  conceive  of  as  somehow 
reserved,  suspended,  inactive,  latent,  to  be  ex- 
hibited all  at  once  and  explosively,  at  some 
"  last  day"  of  time,  precisely  as  Martha  and 
other  Jews  supposed,— precisely  as  our  Lord 
forbade  her  to  suppose,  when  He  corrected  her 
disconsolate  confession  of  hope  in  a  far-off 
rising  from  the  dead  by  the  revelation  of  a 
better  thing :  "I  am  the  Besurrection"  Evi- 
dently He  intended  to  correct  her.  But  where 
is  the  correction  recognisable,  if  not  in  the  con- 
trast between  her  word,  "  He  shall "  and  His 
word  "I  am"? — "I  am  the  Kesurrection." 

We  see  the  other  powers  claimed  by  our 
Lord  all  in  active  operation  to-day.  His  Kesur- 
rection-power,  claimed  in  the  same  terms  as 
all  the  rest,  is  the  only  one  of  all  which  we  do 
not  see.  Has  the  exceptional  denial  of  its 
present  and  perpetual  activity  any  more  valid 
ground  of  support  than  the  fact  that  the  sphere 
of  its  activity  lies  beyond  our  sight  ? 

III.  Here,  then,  is  the  answer  that  we  must 
give  to  the  question,  When  is  the  Kesurrection  ? 
If  we  do  not  regard  our  Lord's  Kesurrection- 
power  as  somehow  outside  the  circle  of  the 
powers  which  He  likewise  claims  under  His 
peculiar  and  oft-repeated  "  I  am," — though  we 
can  assign  no  more  valid  reason  for  so  regarding 


33  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

it  than  that  its  activity  is  hidden  from  our 
sight ; — if  we  do  not  feel  competent  to  alter  His 
solemn  words,  and  transform  "I  am  "into  I 
shall  be,  then  must  we,  in  all  consistency, 
believe  that  He  exercises  that  mysterious  power 
to-day  ;  that  He  has  ever  exercised  it  since  He 
first  asserted  it, — perhaps  also  before,  as  I 
think  we  shall  find  reason  to  believe  ;  *  that  He 
will  continue  to  exercise  it  henceforth  as  here- 
tofore ;  that  He  exercises  it,  just  as  He  exercises, 
all  His  powers,  according  to  the  eternal  laws  of 
spiritual  action,  that  is,  according  to  Christian 
endeavour  here  to  prepare  the  conditions  of  the 
Christian  Resurrection,  and  our  resulting  fitness 
there  to  experience  the  Resurrection  in  Christian 
power  and  in  Christian  joy.t  In  other  words, 
and  more  briefly,  men  are  raised  from  the  dead 
through  the  power  of  Christ,  according  to  their 
Christly  capacity  to  rise,  through  their  having 
received  from  Him  the  power  to  "  attain  unto 
the  Besurrection."  This  is  a  fact  of  to-day  as 
really  as  of  any  future  day.  And  the  manner 
in  which  this  comes  to  pass  is  capable,  as  we 
shall  see,  of  being  so  exhibited  to  the  under- 
standing as  to  redeem  it  from,  at  least,  a  part 
of  the  mystery  which  has  enveloped  it. 

Does  this  seem  to  be  a  great  conclusion  to 

*  See  Chapter  viii.,  Note  A.  f  See  Chapter  iv. 


II.]  A   CONTINUOUS   EEALITY.  39 

build  on  a  little  word?  Some  little  words, 
such  as  yes  or  no,  are  strong  enough  to  sustain 
the  most  extensive  conclusions.  Such  a  word 
as  I  am  is  strong  enough  to  claim  for  the  pre- 
sent whatever  it  is  coupled  with.  Were  this 
all,  it  would  be  enough  to  rest  on.  But  it  is 
not  all.  We  shall  find,  as  we  go  forward  with 
our  inquiry,  that  other  material  comes  in  to 
broaden  the  base  of  our  conclusion.  As  we 
view  the  subject  in  other  lights,  we  shall  find  a 
brightening  assurance  that  we  are  on  the  track 
of  the  truth. 

IV.  With  reference  to  other  points  to  come 
up  hereafter,  thus  much  may  be  advanced  here 
by  way  of  anticipation. 

Whatever  notions  we  may  have  imbibed  to 
the  contrary,  the  fact  will  be  clear  to  any  care- 
ful reader  of  the  Bible  that  the  simultaneous 
resurrection  of  all  the  dead,  which  the  creeds 
teach,  is  not  taught  by  the  Bible.  Nay,  more 
than  this  is  true.  In  that  Apostolic  teaching 
of  "  the  first  Besurrection" '*  which  has  been 
strangely  dropped  out  of  Christian  recognition 
■ — and  also  elsewhere — the  Bible  explicitly 
affirms,  so  that  I  wonder  how  it  can  bethought 
otherwise,  that  the  Resurrection  of  the  dead  is 
not    simultaneous ;    that  they  do  not   rise  all 

#  See  Chapter  ix.  and  Note  B. 


40  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

together,  but  in  a  certain  succession.  More- 
over, the  Bible  teaches  that  the  Eesurrection,  in 
the  Christian  sense  of  the  word,  is  not  a  power 
that  operates  on  all,  as  the  spring  sun  operates 
on  the  leaf-buds,  irrespective  of  personal  voli- 
tion, but  a  power  which,  like  the  wind  which 
the  sail  is  set  to  catch,  must  be  appropriated 
by  voluntary  action  in  Christian  endeavour,  like 
that  of  Paul,  to  "  attain  unto  the  Eesurrection 
of  the  dead." 

Erom  such  teachings  we  shall  find,  as  we 
advance,  that  fresh  light  is  shed  upon  that 
declaration  of  our  Lord  which  we  have  now 
studied.  In  every  generation  of  those  that  are 
born,  through  death,  into  the  unseen  world,  He 
is  not  a  remote  and  waiting,  but  the  immediate 
and  active  Eesurrection-power,  to  as  many  as 
uhear  the  voice  of  the  Son  of  God"  to  as  many 
as  are  led  by  His  Spirit,  and  in  fellowship  with 
Him.  Through  "  Jesus  Christ,  the  same  yester- 
day and  to-day  and  for  ever"  the  invisible  world 
now  and  evermore  beholds  "  the  spirits  of  just 
men  made  perfect"  rising  from  the  dead  in  the 
spiritual  body,  "  clothed  upon  with  our  habita- 
tion which  is  from  heaven." 

V.  This  truth,  when  we  have  grasped  it,  will 
give  us  a  more  vivid  sense  of  the  relation  which 
Christ  holds  to  us,   as  the  Lord  both  of  the 


II.]  A  CONTINUOUS  REALITY.  41 

present  and  of  that  veiled  future  to  which  we 
are  advancing.  It  enforces  His  great  saying 
(Eev.  i.  18),  "I  hold  the  keys  of  death  and  of 
the  unseen.'"  (E.V. — Hades.)  Near  as  may  be 
the  dissolution  of  our  house  of  clay,  so  near  is 
our  Resurrection  in  the  spiritual  body.  We 
need  not  imagine  any  such  thing  as  that, 

"  that  still  garden  of  the  souls 
In  many  a  figured  leaf  enrolls 
The  total  world  since  time  began." 

We  need  not  think  of  the  departed  Christian 
as  in  any  house  of  detention,  however  com- 
fortable, or  in  a  middle  state  of  disembodiment, 
awaiting  a  distant  day  to  obtain  a  body,  and 
with  a  body  the  full  measure  of  such  life  as  his 
relation  to  Christ  capacitates  him  for.  Christ 
not  only  is  our  Life,  but  He  is  also  our  'Resur- 
rection. This  "  is  "  is  more  than  a  shall  be. 
It  assures  us  that  immediately  beyond  the 
valley  of  the  shadow  there  rise  the  hills  of 
light  ;  that  One  is  there  to  take  at  once  the 
hand  of  those  who  hear  His  voice,  and  lead 
us  quickly  through  the  shadow  into  the  light, 
and  up  the  mount  of  God  in  an  undelayed 
progress  of  power,  purity,  and  peace,  in  a  full 
experience  of  "  the  power  of  His  Besurrection." 


42  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

NOTE  A. 

ON   CHRIST'S   ARGUMENT    WITH  THE    SADDUCEES. 

And  Jesus  said  unto  them,  The  sons  of  this  world  marry 
and  are  given  in  marriage  :  but  they  that  are  accounted 
worthy  to  attain  to  that  world,  and  the  Resurrection  from 
the  dead,  neither  marry,  nor  are  given  in  marriage :  for 
neither  can  they  die  any  more  :  for  they  are  equal  unto 
the  angels;  and  are  sons  of  God,  being  sons  of  the  Resur- 
rection. But  that  the  dead  are  raised,  even  Moses 
shelved,  in  the  place  concerning  the  Bush,  when  hecalleth 
the  Lord  the  God  of  Abraham,  and  the  God  of  Isaac, 
and  the  God  of  Jacob.  Now  He  is  not  the  God  of  the 
dead,  but  of  the  living  :  for  all  live  unto  Jlim.  (Luke  xx. 
34—38.) 

There  is  a  marvellous  force  in  this  argument,  which 
must  he  apparent  to  any  one  who  is  at  all  competent  to 
judgtf  of  arguments  according  to  the  recognised  laws  of 
logic. 

Christ  is  here  arguing  with  Sadducees,  who  deny  that 
there  is  any  Besurrection.  (Acts  xxiii.  8.)  He  aims  to 
prove  to  them  "  that  the  dead  are  raised,  or,  trans- 
lating more  literally,  that  the  dead  rise.  He  deems  it 
sufficient  for  this,  simply  to  prove,  by  a  quotation  from 
the  Old  Testament,  that  the  dead  live.  But  the  living 
of  the  dead  could  prove  the  rising  of  the  dead  only  on 
the  assumption  that  living  and  rising  arc  equivalent 
terms. 

Moses,  says  Christ,  shows  that  the  dead  rise,  because 
he  calls  God  the  God  of  Abraham,  Isaac,  and  Jacob,  who 
died  long  ago.  But  since  God  is  not  a  God  of  the  dead, 
but  the  God  of  the  living,  Abraham,  Isaac,  and  Jacob,  are 
now  living.  Therefore  the  dead  rise.  But  this  would  bo 
no  demonstration   at  all,  but   a  complete  ?wn-sequiiur9 


II.]  CHEIST   AND   THE    SADDTTCEES.  43 

except  on  the  assumption  that  life  after  death  is  life  in  the 
Resurrection  state.  On  this  assumption  only  can  Christ's 
reasoning  be  logically  good.  If  this  assumption  be  made, 
then,  indeed,  all  that  will  be  necessary,  in  order  to  estab- 
lish to  any  Sadducee  the  fact  of  a  Resurrection,  will  be  to 
establish  the  fact  of  life  after  death,  as  Christ  does  by  His 
quotation  from  Moses. 

In  the  language  of  logicians,  Christ's  argument  is  called 
an  "enthymeme";  a  condensed  form  of  reasoning,  in 
which  a  proposition  is  tacitly  assumed  as  true,  which,  if 
formally  stated,  would  here  constitute  what  is  called  "  the 
major  premiss  "  of  "  a  syllogism."  Drawn  out  in  the  full 
form  of  a  syllogism,  this  enthymeme  would  stand  as 
follows,  the  major  premiss  being  assumed  as  true,  and  the 
minor  premiss  being  proved  by  the  quotation  : — 

Major.  Those  who  live  after  death  live  in  the  Resur- 
rection state. 

Minor.  Abraham,  Isaac,  and  Jacob  live  after  death. 

Conclusion.  Abraham,  Isaac,  and  Jacob  ["  the  dead  "] 
live  in  the  Resurrection  state. 

Supposing  that  this  passage  were  the  only  text  in  the 
New  Testament  on  the  subject  of  the  Resurrection,  should 
we  conclude  the  Resurrection  to  be  a  present  reality,  or  a 
thing  still  in  the  future  ? 

If  our  main  difficulty  in  accepting  this  reasoning  as 
conclusive  be  the  impressions  we  have  derived  from  cer- 
tain statements  of  the  Apostles,  is  it  not  wise,  first  to  let 
the  Master's  reasoning  make  its  due  impression,— to  let 
Christ  teach  us  how  to  use  the  sayings  of  Paul,  rather 
than  let  Paul  teach  us  how  to  use  the  sayings  of  Christ  ? 
Here  let  us  remember  what  our  Lord  Himself  has  said 
to  us  :  "  One  is  your  Master,  even  the  Christ."  (Matt. 
xxiii.  8.) 

But  it  would  be  quite  unfair  to  the  Apostles  to  suppose 
that  they  utterly  failed  to  get  hold  of  this  teaching  of  their 
Master.   Whoever  will  carefully  look  into  what  John  says- 


44  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP 

of"  the  first  Besurrection,'"  can  see  that  he  follows  Christ 
in  regarding  living,  and  rising,  after  death,  as  equivalent 
terms.  "  They  lived  .  .  .  the  rest  of  the  dead  lived  not 
.  .  .  this  is  the  first  Besurrection."1  (Kev.  xx.  4,  5.) 

NOTE  B. 

ON   RESURRECTION   NOW   AND    HENCEFORTH. 

Verily,  verily,  I  say  unto  you,  He  that  hcarcth  My  word, 
and  believeth  Him  that  sent  Me,  hath  eternal  life,  and 
comeih  not  into  judgment,  but  hath  passed  out  of  death 
into  life.  Verily,  verily,  I  say  unto  you,  The  hour  cometh, 
and  7ioiv  is,  ivhen  the  dead  shall  hear  the  voice  of  the  Son 
of  God  ;  and  they  that  hear  shall  live.  For  as  the  Father 
liath  life  in  Himself,  even  so  gave  He  to  the  8o?i  also  to 
have  life  in  Himself :  and  He  gave  Him  authority  to  exe- 
cute judgment,  because  He  is  the  Son  of  man.  Marvel  not 
at  this  :  for  the  hour  cometh,  in  which  all  that  are  in  the 
tombs  shall  hear  His  voice,  and  shall  come  forth;  they 
that  have  done  good,  unto  the  resurrection  of  life;  and 
they  that  have  done  ill, unto  the  resurrection  of  judgment. 
— (John  v.  24— 29.) 

The  proper  interpretation  of  this  passage  strongly  corro- 
borates the  exposition  above  given  of  John  xi.  25,  which,  in 
turn,  indisputable  by  itself,  throws  light  on  our  Lord's  true 
meaning  here. 

Three  great  truths  are  here  announced,  namely,  (1.) 
Spiritual  awakening  to  life  now  to  all  who  receive  Christ's 
word  in  faith  ;  verse  24.  (2.)  Resurrection  now  and  hence- 
forth to  the  dead  through  obedience  to  His  life-giving 
word  ;  verse  25.  (3.)  Judgment  under  Christ  extending 
ultimately  over  the  entire  race  of  men  in  the  world 
of  the  Resurrection  ;  verses  28,  29.  Upon  this  outline 
observe, — 

(1.)  The  emphatic  "  Verily,  verily,'"  which  introduces 


II.]  NOW  AND   HENCEFORTH.  45 

both  the  24th  and  the  25th  verses.  According  to  a  very 
common  interpretation,  verse  25  refers  to  the  spiritually 
dead,  to  those  who  are  now  "dead  in  trespasses  and  sins" 
(Eph.  ii.  1),  and  now  awakened  by  the  hearing  of  the 
Gospel.  If  so,  then  verse  25  is  merely  a  repetition  of 
verse  24.  But  it  is  introduced  by  the  "  Verily,  verily,'" 
with  which  Jesus  customarily  prefaces  a  new  as  well  as 
striking  thought. 

(2.)  The  passage  plainly  emphasizes  the  present  in  verses 
24  and  25,  and  emphasizes  the  future  in  verses  28  and  29. 
But,  in  verse  25,  there  is  a  plain  transition  from  the  pre- 
sent, as  in  verse  24,  to  the  future,  mention  of  an  hour  that 
cometh,  and  now  is,  and  inclusive  emphasis  both  of  the 
present  and  the  future,  a  result  that  is  to  be  now  and 
henceforth.  Instead  of  verse  25  being  simply  a  repetition 
of  what  is  stated  in  verse  24  as  a  present  fact,  it  is  an  em- 
phatic advance  to  a  new  statement.  This  is  marked  not 
only  by  the  solemn  asseveration,  "  Verily,  verily,"  but 
also  by  the  express  revelation  of  an  "  hour "  which 
includes  both  time  that  is  and  time  that  shall  be.  The 
spiritual  awakening  that  now  is  (verse  24)  leads  on,  both 
in  thought  and  in  fact,  to  the  Besurrection  that  is  now  and 
is  to  be  henceforth. 

(3.)  This  conception  of  our  Lord's  thought  in  verse  25, 
as  a  marked  advance  from  the  doctrine  in  verse  24,  of  a 
present  spiritual  awakening  through  faith  in  Him,  to  the 
doctrine  of  a  present  and  a  coming,  that  is,  a  continuous 
Besurrection  through  the  hearing  of  His  voice,  is  confirmed 
by  the  reference  of  verse  27  to  "judgment."  Besurrection 
and  judgment  are  closely  united  in  the  New  Testament 
doctrine  of  the  future.  Judgment  is  here  spoken  of 
because  naturally  suggested  by  the  restrictive  clause  in 
verse  25,  "  they  that  hear  shall  live."  All  do  not  hear, 
therefore  all  do  not  live  (though  all  exist ;  "  live,"  here 
used  in  a  pregnant  sense,  suggests  the  difference  between 
mere  being  and  ivell-heing.)    Besurrection  and  judgment 


46  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

thug  coupled  in  these  two  verses  (25  and  27),  are  more 
explicitly  set  forth  together  in  verse  29. 

(4.)  The  "  marvelnot,"  in  verse  28,  is  to  be  understood 
thus  :  Do  not  wonder  whether  I  have  claimed  the  power 
of  such  judgment  as  is  connected  with  the  Eesurrection. 
I  do  claim  it ;  for  the  hour  cometh  in  which  all  that  arc  in 
the  tombs  shall  hear  His  voice  (for  life,  as  in  verse  25,  or 
tor  the  contrary),  etc.  The  omission  here  of  the  words, 
"  and  now  is"  which  occur  in  the  Resurrection -doctrine 
of  verse  25,  marks  a  shifting  of  the  thought  so  as  to  fore- 
tell chiefly  the  ultimate  extension  of  Eesurrection  and 
judgment  over  all  mankind.  Not,  however,  so  as  to  deny 
of  the  present  what  it  affirms  of  the  future. 

(5.)  Hearing  the  voice  is  stated  in  verse  25  as  the  means 
to  the  Resurrection-life,  hut  in  verse  28  as  the  means 
not  only  to  this,  but  also  to  judgment  upon  evil.  Con- 
sequently it  bears  a  wider  sense  in  the  latter  verse. 
Obedient  hearing  tends  to  life.  But  there  is  also  disobe- 
dient hearing,  tending  to  judgment.  All  shall  ultimately 
hear  the  voice  of  the  Son  of  God.  But  while  truth 
accepted  is  a  word  of  life,  truth  rejected  is  a  word  of 
judgment.  (John  xii.  48.)  Rejected  truth  shall  ulti- 
mately make  its  judgment-voice  ring  through  the  spirit 
that  heard  and  hearkened  not.  Entering  into  the  future 
with  this  judgment-voice  resounding  in  conscience  is 
"  the  resurrection  of  judgment:'  This,  too,  is  through 
the  voice  of  the  Son  of  God,  as  the  truth  of  Christ  asserts 
its  judgment-power. 

(6.)  No  general,  simultaneous  event  can  be  supposed 
intended  by  u  the  hour"  of  verse  28,  unless  the  same  can 
be  understood  of  "  the  hour'''  of  verse  25,  which  no 
interpreter  has  ever  ventured  to  do. 

(7.)  With  regard  to  the  restrictive  clause  in  verse  25, 
"  they  that  hear  shall  live,'"  we  observe  that  it  is  precisely 
similar  to  the  restriction  that  accompanies  every  offer 
of  salvation,  "  he  that  believcth  shall  be  saved"      The 


II.]  NOW  AND   HENCEFOKTH.  47 

Resurrection  of  life,  as  distinct  from  the  Resurrection  of 
judgment,  is  conditioned  upon  a  certain  hearing  of  ic  the 
voice  of  the  Son  of  God.''  This  is  not  a  voice  miraculously 
resounding  through  space,  hut  a  voice  making  itself 
heard  within  the  obedient  spirit.  It  is  on  the  obedient 
relation  of  the  soul  to  Christ,  as  the  Author  of  spiritual  life, 
through  the  receiving  of  the  truth,  that  the  result  of  life,  as 
distinct  from  existence,  depends.  How  this  is,  we  shall 
see  from  Paul's  doctrine  of  the  Resurrection  as  the  object 
of  Christian  endeavour.     (Chapter  iv.) 

However  the  interpretation  above  given  differs  from 
any  that  we  may  have  adopted,  it  is  certainly  the  one 
most  consonant  with  the  testimony  that  is  indisputably 
borne  by  our  Lord's  great  saying,  "Jam  the  Resurrection 
and  the  Life."  This  fact  alone  speaks  with  emphasis  in 
its  favour.  The  harmony  of  the  two  speaks  for  the  truth 
of  that  view  on  which  the  light  of  both  converges.  The 
Resurrection  is  a  present  and  'perpetual  reality  in  the 
world  of  the  unseen,  through  the  power  of  Christ, through 
the  obedient  hearing  of  the  voice  of  the  Son  of  God. 


CHAPTEK  III. 

THE   BESUBBECTION    EXEMPLIFIED 
IN  THE  BISEN  CHBIST. 


CHAPTEK  III. 

THE    RESURRECTION   EXEMPLIFIED   IN   THE 

RISEN   CHRIST. 

"  It  is  sown  a  natural  body  ;  it  is  raised  a  spiritual  body." — 
1  Cor.  xv.  44. 

I.  What  is  raised  ?  How  could  the  Apostle 
have  used  the  language  above  quoted,  if  the 
body  that  is  buried  is  not  raised, — or,  if,  at 
least,  as  in  the  case  of  the  seed  that  is  sown, 
some  element  of  the  buried  body  is  not  the 
germ  of  a  body  that  is  to  rise  from  the  very 
grave  ? 

This  question  betrays  two  misconceptions. 

(1.)  The  first  of  these  is  a  confounding  of  two 
things  utterly  different,  the  dead  person  and 
the  dead  body.  The  dead  person  is  raised ; 
the  dead  body  is  not  raised.  This  distinction 
between  the  person  and  his  body  is  clearly 
recognised  by  the  inquirer,  whose  question 
about  the  kind  of  body  to  be  expected  in  the 
Resurrection  the  Apostle   is   here  answering. 


52  BEYOND    THE    SHADOW.  [CHAT. 

"  With  lohat  maimer  of  body  do  they  come  ?  " 
It  is  a  distinction  that  lias  been  before  the 
world,  at  least  ever  since  Socrates,  in  speaking 
of  his  own  funeral,  said  to  his  friends,  "  You 
may  bury  me  if  you  can  catch  me." 

It  is  true,  the  analogy  of  the  seed,  which  the 
Apostle  employs  for  illustration,  directly  sug- 
gests the  survival  in  the  "  spiritual  body  "  of 
some  element  that  was  present  in  the  "natural 
body"  But  it  is  begging  the  question  to 
assume  that  this  surviving  element  is  of  the 
body,  as  well  as  in  it.  If  Paul  was  thinking  at 
all  of  an  element  in  the  seed  that  passes  over 
into  the  new  body  to  which  the  germinating 
seed  gives  place,  we  can  hardly  question  that 
he  recognised  the  analagous  element  that 
passes  from  our  present  body  to  our  future 
body,  as  the  spirit,  which  is  in  the  body  but 
not  of  it.  Not  to  notice  such  a  probability  as 
this  were  to  exhibit  an  obtuseness  like  that 
which  Paul  rebuked  by  addressing  his  ques- 
tioner asa"  simpleton." 

But,  besides  this,  the  notion  of  a  survival  and 
resuscitation  of  the  buried  body,  or  some 
element  of  it,  involves  still  another  radical 
misconception,  namely : — 

(2.)  That  personal  identity  inquires,  at  least 
so  far  as  some  germinant  element  is  concerned, 


III.]     EXEMPLIFIED   IN    THE    RISEN    CHRIST.      53 

identity  of  material  between  the  body  buried 
and  the  Resurrection-body.  But  what  is  it 
that  personal  identity  depends  on?  Surely 
not  on  the  material  that  is  organised,  but  on 
the  power  that  organises  it.  I  am  the  same 
person  that  I  was  twenty  years  ago,  simply 
because  my  body,  though  it  has  changed  in 
every  particle  twenty  times  over,  is  organised 
and  animated  by  the  same  spirit.  People  who 
have  not  seen  me  for  twenty  years  do  not 
always  know  me  at  first  sight  as  the  same,  but 
after  a  while  they  recognise  my  personal 
identity  in  its  familiar  expression.  Identity 
of  person  and  identity  of  material  are  very 
different  things.  The  personal  element  is  the 
spirit.  Recognition  of  identity  depends  on 
the  expression  which  the  spirit  gives  to  the 
organism  which  it  animates. 

k.  thought  very  precious  to  many  sorrowing 
hearts  is  touched  by  the  fact  just  mentioned. 
It  is  by  no  means  unlikely  that,  in  the  Resur- 
rection-state, recognition  after  long  separation 
may  be  even  more  immediate  than  in  this 
world,  conformably  to  that  more  perfect  power 
of  self-expression  which  we  may  attribute  to 
the  spirit  in  the  spiritual  body.  Parents,  who 
have  seen  infant  children  go  before  them 
thither,  may  not  expect  that  their  little  ones 


51  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

will  be  always  babes,  or  as  babes  will  meet 
them  again.  For  life  is  inseparably  connected 
with  growth.  But  that  they  will  know  them, 
perhaps  with  a  more  immediate  recognition 
than  that  with  which  the  mother  in  the  story 
beholds  her  long  lost  sailor-boy  in  the  weather- 
beaten  wanderer,  who  knocks  for  a  night's 
shelter  at  her  door,  I  cannot  doubt,  when  I 
reflect  that  the  flesh  and  blood  of  the 
"natural"  body,  so  often  a  disguise,  will  be 
exchanged  for  a  more  plastic  and  perfect  organ 
of  self-expression  in  the  "  spiritual "  body.  (See 
Chapter  ix.) 

As  to  the  recognition  of  friends  in  the  Ke« 
surrection-state,  it  seems  plainly  taught  in  the 
New  Testament.  Christ  said  that  those  who 
had  received  charity  on  earth  would  welcome 
their  benefactors  in  heaven.  (Luke  xvi.  9.) 
Paul  expected  to  recognise  his  converts  here- 
after with  rejoicing.     (1  Thess.  ii.  19.) 

The  misconception,  that  personal  identity 
requires  the  survival  and  carrying  over  into  the 
Eesurrection-body  of  some  element  of  the 
mortal  body,  rests  partly  on  a  mistaken  notion 
of  the  epithets  "natural"  and  "spiritual?* 
which  the  Apostle  applies  to  the  two  bodies. 
It  is  supposed  that  these  epithets  refer  to  the 
material  of  which  the  two  bodies  are  composed. 


III.]     EXEMPLIFIED  IN  THE   RISEN   CHRIST.      55 

"  Spiritual "  is  supposed  to  denote  a  refined 
or  etberealised  condition  of  the  material,  or  a 
part  of  the  material,  which  belonged  to  the 
"  natural"  body,  and  passed  over  to  the  new 
body  in  the  Eesurrection.  Whereas,  on  the 
contrary,  neither  of  these  terms  refers  to  the 
stuff  out  of  which  either  body  is  made,  but  both 
refer  to  the  relation  to  its  animating  principle 
in  which  each  body  exists.)  The  "  natural" 
or,  as  Paul  actually  said,  the  "psychical"* 
body  is  the  body  whose  life-principle  is  in  the 
psyche,  the  '  living  soul  "  (verse  45),  which  is 
common  to  man  and  the  lower  animals — in  all 
essentially  a  similar  assemblage  of  sentient, 
appetitive,  and  intelligent  faculties.  On  the 
other  hand,  the  "  spiritual  "  body  is  the  body 
whose  life-principle  is  in  the  pnewma,  the 
"spirit"  which  is  peculiar  toman.  Instead, 
therefore,  of  referring  to  some  highly  sub- 
limated material,  which,  in  ignorance  of  its 
nature,  may  be  called  "  spirit"  the  epithet 
"  spiritual "  denotes  the  Kesurrection-body  not 
as  a  body  formed  out  of  spirit,  but  rather 
formed  for  the  spirit — perhaps  we  may  find 
cause  to  say,  formed  by  the  spirit,  the  plastic 

*  For  other  texts  where  this  word  occurs,  compare  1  Cor.  ii. 
14,  and  Jude  19,  in  the  latter  of  which  it  is  translated  "  sensual," 
See  also  Genesis  i.  24,  and  ii.  7,  where  "  living  creature  "  and 
"  living  soul  "  stand  for  the  same  original. 


56  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

organ  of  its  self-expression,  the  obedient 
instrument  of  its  will.     (See  Chapter  ix.) 

What  is  raised  then?  Can  we  any  longer 
use  with  propriety  the  venerable  phrase  of  the 
Apostle's  Creed,  "  I  believe  in  the  Resurrection 
of  the  body,"  if  the  buried  body  has  no  part  in 
the  Resurrection  ? 

We  may  on  one  condition  still  properly  use 
this  time-hallowed  phrase — remembering,  how- 
ever, that  it  comes  to  us  from  outside  of  the 
New  Testament,  which  speaks  of  "tJie  Resurrec- 
tion of  the  dead,"  not  of  the  dead  body.  We 
may  intelligently  class  it  with  those  numerous 
phrases  which  are  understood  to  speak  the 
language  of  appearance,  not  the  language  of 
reality. 

We  visit  the  grave  of  a  friend.  We  point  to 
the  mound,  and  say,  "  He  lies  there."  No,  lie 
does  not  ;  it  only  appears  as  though  he  did. 
The  body  in  which  he  always  appeared  to  us 
lies  below  the  ground,  and  a  sign  of  it  appears 
in  the  hillock  of  turf  above  it.  Common 
speech  is  full  of  this  language  of  appearance. 
We  sail  out  to  sea,  and  say,  "  The  land  sinks 
below  the  horizon."  That  is,  it  appears  to 
sink.  In  reality,  the  curvature  of  the  earth  in- 
tervenes, and  hides  the  land  from  our  view. 
So  we  say,  "  The  sun  rises."      He  appears  to 


III.]     EXEMPLIFIED    IN    THE    RISEN    CUEIST.       57 

rise,  but  really  the  earth  rolls  round  and  brings 
him  into  view.  The  same  law  of  language 
justifies  us  in  speaking  of  "  the  Eesurrection  of 
the  body,"  provided  we  use  it  intelligently  as 
the  language  of  appearance  only.  A  body  has 
disappeared  in  the  grave;  "  the  earthly  house 
of  our  tabernacle  is  dissolved."  Instead  of  it 
another  body  appears,  "  a  building  from  God" 
"  eternal,  in  the  heavens."  It  belongs  to  the 
same  person,  and  is  recognisable  as  his. 
Though  the  change  is  the  substitution  of  an 
entirely  different  body,  the  appearance  is  as  if 
the  body  that  was  put  into  the  grave  had  been 
raised  out  of  the  grave.  Yet  it  is  significant, 
that  the  Bible,  elsewhere  using  so  much  of  the 
language  of  appearance,  should  strictly  avoid  it 
here,  and  speak  only  of  "  the  Resurrection  of  the 
dead"  as  if  to  keep  us  out  of  the  Jewish  way 
of  thinking  about  the  Eesurrection  of  the  body. 
The  popular  belief  on  this  subject,  in 
Christ's  time,  was  such  as  to  provoke  the 
scepticism  of  the  Sadducees.  Even  bodily 
blemishes  and  defects  were  to  reappear  in 
the  Resurrection-body,  so  that  personal  iden- 
tity might  be  recognised.  The  same  way 
of  thinking  continues.  It  is  not  long  since 
some  improvement  in  the  city  of  Mar- 
seilles  made    it  desirable    to    remove  part  of 


58  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

the  Jews'  burying-ground.  The  authorities 
promised  the  greatest  care  in  the  removal 
of  the  bones  to  another  spot.  But  the  Jews 
still  feared  that  portions  of  different  bodies 
might  be  mixed  or  lost.  They  accordingly 
refused  consent  on  the  ground  that  it  would 
"  embarrass  the  Eesurrection  !  " 

The  notion  of  the  actual  Eesurrection  of  the 
buried  body,  or  any  particle  of  it,  is  indeed  so 
"  embarrassed  "  by  such  difficulties  in  the  way 
of  rational  and  Christian  thought,  that  it  is  no 
longer  supported  by  any  reason,  except  the 
very  vague  and  inappropriate  one,  that  God 
can  do  anything. 

"When  we  consider  the  fugitive  nature  of  the 
elements  which  compose  our  bodies,  it  seems 
unlikely  that  there  is  a  particle  of  dust  on  the 
planet  to  which  any  human  being  can  lay  an 
exclusive  claim.  Knowing  what  scientific  men 
now  tell  us,  that  the  particles  of  our  bodies  are 
entirely  dissipated  and  replaced  by  fresh  ones 
in  the  course  of  every  year  that  we  live,  how 
inconceivable  it  is  to  suppose  that  such  par- 
ticles as  happen  to  compose  our  bodies  at  the 
particular  moment  of  death  will,  somehow — at 
least,  some  of  them — be  fixed  and  secured  to 
the  individual  for  resumption  ages  hence  in  the 
Eesurrection  !     Granting  that  God  could,  what 


III.]     EXEMPLIFIED   IN   THE    RISEN   CHRIST.      59 

shadow  of  reason  for  supposing  that  God  will  ? 
If  my  body  to-day  is  an  entirely  different  body, 
so  far  as  every  component  particle  is  con- 
cerned, from  what  it  was  a  year  ago,  how 
much  more  may  I  expect  the  Resurrection-body 
to  be  entirely  different  from  that  which  is  sur- 
rendered to  the  grave  !  I  shall  be  raised.  My 
body  will  not  be  raised.  Yet  none  the  less 
shall  I  be  raised  in  a  body  ; — I  shall  rise  in  the 
"  spiritual  body." 

II.  A  solitary  but  glorious  illustration  of  the 
difference  between  the  "natural"  and  the 
"  spiritual  body  "  is  given  in  the  Resurrection 
of  Christ.  The  study  of  this  may  somewhat 
further  free  the  subject  from  misconception. 
The  Resurrection  of  Christ  is  presented  in  the 
New  Testament  as  both  the  pledge  and  the 
pattern  of  our  own.  "If  we  believe  that 
Jesus  died  and  rose  again,  even  so  them  also 
that  are  fallen  asleep,"  etc.  (1  Thess.  iv.  14.) 
!From  this  the  inference  has  been  drawn  that, 
as  Jesus  rose  in  the  same  body  that  was 
"  crucified,  dead,  and  buried,"  even  so  shall  our 
Resurrection  be,  as  the  creeds  say,  in  "  the  self- 
same bodies  and  no  other."  But  the  question 
interposes  :  Would  not  our  Resurrection  be 
essentially  like  that  of  Christ,  if  it  did  not  go 
to  the  length  of  material  identity  between  the 


GO  BEYOND  THE  SHADOW.      [CHAP 

body  buried  and  the  body  raised?  If  Christ 
rose  in  the  spiritual  body,  if  we  rise  in  the 
spiritual  [body,  the  parallel  is  complete.  The 
parallel  does  not  lie  in  the  stuff  of  which  the 
Resurrection-body  is  organised,  but  in  the 
power  that  organises  it,  and  the  relation  in 
which  that  body  exists  to  the  organising  power, 
the  spirit.  The  Apostle  says  "  that  our  Lord 
shall  fashion  anew  the  body  of  our  humiliation, 
that  it  may  be  conformed  to  the  body  of  His 
glory."  (Phil.  hi.  21.)  The  promise  is  fulfilled, 
and  the  parallel  sustained,  though  this  change 
involve  the  substitution  of  a  new  body,  having, 
in  itself,  nothing  in  common  with  the  body  of 
flesh  and  blood. 

Now,  as  to  Christ's  Resurrection,  He  had 
coupled  with  His  sublime  claim  to  be  the 
Divine  Saviour  of  the  world,  the  declaration 
that  He  would  rise  from  the  dead  on  the  third 
day.  There  was  a  moral  necessity  that  this 
should  be  so  fulfilled  that  no  unbeliever  could 
say  to  those  who  proclaimed  the  Resurrection 
of  the  crucified  One,  "  We  have  the  crucified 
body  in  our  hands  still,  and  you  have  been 
deceived  by  a  ghost."  This  would  have  been 
said,  if  it  could  have  been  said,  but  it  could 
never  be  said.  The  crucified  body  had  disap- 
peared from  the  tomb. 


III.]     EXEMPLIFIED   IN   THE    RISEN   CHRIST.      Gl 

But  the  facts  of  the  reappearance  of  the 
Lord  to  His  disciples  which  are  on  record,  show 
that  His  body  after  the  Eesurrection  manifested 
new  and  surprising  powers ;  it  was  able  to 
appear  and  vanish  in  closed  apartments  ;  it  was 
able  to  change  its  expression,  so  as  to  prevent 
recognition  by  acquaintances  :  it  was  able  to 
rise  into  the  clouds  of  heaven  till  it  disappeared. 
The  record  obliges  us  to  conclude  : — 

(1.)  It  could  not  have  been  no  body,  since  it 
was  handled,  and  ate  food,  to  demonstrate  that 
it  was  a  body. 

(2.)  It  was,  in  some  respects,  the  same  body 
that  had  been  crucified,  since  it  carried  the 
wounds  of  the  cross,  and  permitted  them  to  be 
examined  by  the  touch,while,  at  the  same  time, 
the  crucified  body  had  disappeared  from  its 
keepers. 

(3.)  It  was,  in  some  respects,  a  changed 
body,  for  it  manifested  powers  which  it  had 
never  before  manifested.  "It  is  palpable,  not 
only  as  a  whole,  but  also  in  its  different 
parts  : — raised  above  space,  so  that  it  can,  in  a 
much  shorter  time  than  we,  transport  itself 
from  one  locality  to  another;  gifted  with  the 
capability,  in  subjection  to  a  mightier  will,  of 
becoming  sometimes  visible,  sometimes  invis- 
ible.    It  bears  the  unmistakable  traces  of  its 


62  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

former  condition,  but  is,  at  the  same  time, 
raised  above  the  confining  limitations  of  this, 
It  is,  in  a  word,  a  spiritual  body,  no  longer 
subject  to  the  flesh,  but  filled,  guided,  borne  by 
the  spirit,  and  yet  none  the  less  a  body.  It 
can  eat,  but  it  no  longer  needs  to  eat ;  it  can 
reveal  itself  in  one  place,  but  is  not  bound  to 
this  one  place  ;  it  can  show  itself  within  the 
sphere  of  this  world,  but  is  not  limited  to  this 
sphere."  * 

Such  was  the  change  that  passed  upon  our 
Lord's  body  in  the  Kesurrection.  By  this  we 
are  to  measure  the  import  of  the  Apostolic 
doctrine  of  the  "spiritual"  body,  and  the 
import  of  the  teaching  that  His  Eesurrection  is 
representative  of  ours.  The  great  change  we 
anticipate  nowise  affects  our  mortal  body ;  that 
has  vanished  utterly  and  for  ever.  It  exhibits 
the  living  spirit  "  clothed  upon  "  with  another 
body,  a  body  that  is  subjected  to  the  power  of 
the  spirit,  as  the  body  of  flesh  and  blood  is 
not.  The  risen  Christ  undoubtedly  manifested 
Himself  in  a  body  that  was  raised  above  the 
limitations  of  flesh  and  blood,  raised  above 
subjection  to  the  physical  laws  that  assert 
supremacy  over  our  bodies;  a  "spiritual" 
body,    because   thoroughly   responsive   to    the 

*  Van  Oosterzee. 


III.]     EXEMPLIFIED   IN   THE   EISEN   CHRIST.      63 

will  of  the  spirit ;  a  "glorious  "  body,  because 
capable  of  emitting  the  glory  of  the  inhabiting 
spirit,  even  as  John  at  Patmos  saw  its  face 
"as  the  sun  shineth  in  his  strength."  (Rev.  i. 
.16.)  In  this,  we  are  to  see  illustrated  what  the 
Apostle  says  of  our  Resurrection  :  "It  is  raised 
a  spiritual  body"  capable,  through  its  relation 
to  the  organising  and  controlling  spirit,  of 
manifesting,  like  a  glass,  what  we  are,  in  the 
glory  or  the  vileness  of  character ;  capable  also 
of  doing — I  do  not  say  what  we  will,  but — 
what  we  are  able  to  will. 

The  view,  thus  succinctly  presented,  of  the 
Resurrection  of  Christ  in  the  spiritual  body, 
may  be  confirmed  by  some  closer  scrutiny  of 
the  details. 

From  the  record  in  Luke,  it  appears  that, 
previous  to  the  appearance  of  Jesus  in  the 
evening  meeting  of  the  disciples,  they  had 
accounts  of  His  appearances  to  the  women, 
to  Peter,  and  to  the  two  who  had  walked  to 
Emmaus.  They  were,  therefore,  apparently 
so  prepared  to  behold  Him  reappearing  in  the 
body,  that  they  should  not  have  been  disturbed 
thereby.  But,  nevertheless,  when  He  mani- 
fested His  presence  among  them,  they  were 
greatly  disturbed. 


64  BEYOND    THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

"  He  Himself  stood  in  the  midst  of  them, 
and  saith  unto  them,  Peace  be  unto  yon.  But 
they  ivere  terrified  and  affrighted,  and  sup- 
posed that  they  beheld  a  spirit.'"  (Luke  xxiv. 
36,  37.) 

This  effect  of  His  appearance  cannot  be  ex- 
plained, except  by  supposing  that  it  was  after 
a  manner  that  they  were  not  prepared  for. 
Their  supposing  that  they  had  seen  a  spirit  is 
inexplicable,  except  the  manner  of  His  appear- 
ance had  been  spirit-like,  unlike  that  of  one 
inhabiting  a  tangible  body.  Not  having  come 
into  the  room  in  any  visible  manner,  He  all  at 
once  became  visible  in  the  midst  of  them,  as 
though  the  air  itself  had  suddenly  taken  on  a 
bodily  form. 

But  what  body  was  it,  that  was  able  to  pass 
thus  suddenly  from  an  invisible  to  a  visible 
state  ?     The  record  is  very  explicit : — 

"  A?id  He  said  unto  them,  Why  are  ye 
troubled  ?  and  wherefore  do  reasonings  arise  in 
your  heart  ?  See  My  hands  and  My  feet,  that  it 
is  I  Myself :  handle  Me,  and  see;  for  a  spirit 
hath  not  flesh  and  bones,  as  ye  behold  Me 
-having."     (Luke  xxiv.  33,  39.) 

It  was,  then,  a  body  of  "flesh  and  bones," 
the  very  same  body  which  had  been  crucified, 
as   we    are  compelled    to   think,   which   now 


III.]     EXEMPLIFIED   IN   THE   EISEN   CHEIST.      65 

manifested  such  spirit-like  power  as  to  surprise 
the  disciples  into  terror,  prepared  as  they  had 
been  to  expect  its  appearance  after  another 
manner. 

This  history  brings  out  very  clearly  what 
we  are  to  understand,  essentially,  by  the 
"spiritual  body."  Not  a  body  made  of  a 
certain  substance,  but  a  body  filled  with  a 
certain  power.  The  crucifiedbody^,  in  its 
new  relation,  to  the  spiritual  power  that  filled 
it  at  the  Resurrection,  became  a  spiritual 
body. 

But  in  this  new  relation  the  crucified  body 
of  "flesh  and  bones"  is  not  to  continue  un- 
changed. From  "  corruptible  "it  is  to  become 
"incorruptible"  From  "  the  image  of  the 
earthy  "  it  is  to  pass,  such  is  the  power  that 
fills  it,  into  "  the  image  of  the  heavenly"  (1 
Cor.  xv.  49.) 

All  that  can  be  said  on  this  point  will  be 
found  stated,  or  suggested,  in  Note  A  following 

Here  we  must  pass  to  another  point  of  view. 
Some  hints  that  have  been  dropped  in  this 
chapter  will  be  taken  up  and  expanded  in 
another  connection. 


66  BEYOND   THE   SHADOW.  [CHAP. 


NOTE  A. 

THE     RESURRECTION    OF     CHRIST    NOT     COMPLETELY 
MANIFESTED    TILL    HIS    ASCENSION. 

When  she  had  tlms  said,  she  turned  herself  bach,  and 
beholdeth  Jesus  standing,  and  hnew  not  that  it  was 
Jesus.  Jesus  saith  unto  her,  Woman,  ivhy  tveepest  thou  ? 
whom  seelcest  thou  ?  She,  supposing  Him  to  be  the 
gardener,  saith  unto  Him,  Sir,  if  Thou  hast  borne  Him 
hence,  tell  me  where  Thou  hast  laid  Him,  and  I  will  take 
Him  away.  Jesus  saith  unto  her,  Mary.  She  turneth  her- 
self, and  saith  unto  Him  in  Hebrew,  Babboni  ;  which  is  to 
say,  Master.  Jesus  saith  to  her,  Touch  Me  not  ;  for  I 
am  not  yet  ascended  unto  the  Father :  but  go  uyito  My 
brethren,  and  say  to  them,  I  ascend  unto  My  Father  and 
your  Father,  and  My  God  and  your  God.  (John  xx. 
14—17.) 

"We  are  not  to  suppose,  from  verses  14  and  15,  that 
Jesus  had  so  changed  His  former  expression  that  Mary, 
familiar  as  she  was  with  His  personal  appearance,  sup- 
posed, on  a  direct  look,  that  He  was  the  gardener.  Her 
turning,  in  verse  14,  was  probably  a  partial  turning,  just 
enough  to  observe  the  presence,  not  the  appearance,  of 
the  person  behind  her.  Eyes  dimmed  with  tears,  and  a 
preoccupied  mind,  together  with  this  half  turning,  are 
quite  enough  to  account  for  her  impression  that  He  was 
"  the  gardener."  But  when  she  heard  her  name  uttered 
in  the  familiar  tone,  "  Mary,"  "  she  turned  herself" 
fully  round  to  see  the  speaker,  and  then  the  illusion 
vanished  in  an  immediate  recognition  :  "  Master  !  " 

But  Jesus  drew  back  from  the  touch  with  which  she 
seems  to  have  sought  to  verify  the  reality  of  which  her 
eyes  assured  her.  Here  we  come  to  the  main  point  of 
interest  in  this  passage.     Why  Jesus  should  have  refused 


III.]  EESUEEECTION   AND   ASCENSION.  G7 

to  her  the  touch  to  which  He  invited  others,  is  commonly 
explained  by  saying  that  touch  was  necessary  to  convince 
others  that  He  was  really  in  the  body,  but  not  necessary 
to  convince  her.  This  is  apparently  intimated  in  what 
Jesus  says,  but  more  than  this  is  intimated.  Jesus  mani- 
fests an  unwonted  reserve.  His  reserve  seems  to  inti- 
mate not  only  the  needlessness  of  the  verifying  touch  for 
her,  but  also  that  there  is  to  be  more  of  a  change  in  Him 
than  is  yet  apparent.  "Touch  Me  not"  He  says,  "for  I 
am  not  yet  ascended.  [The  perfect  tense  is  used  in  the 
original.  '  I  have  not  yet  ascended.']  I  am  still,  as  you 
believe,  in  the  familiar  body  of  'flesh  and  bones  '  (Luke 
xxiv.  39),  which  you  do  not  need  to  touch.  I  am  not  yet 
in  the  fully  glorified  Ascension-body,  which,  if  you  could, 
you  might  need  to  test  by  touch.  But  this  flesh  and  bone 
does  not  inherit  the  kingdom  of  God  (1  Cor.  xv.  50)  ;  it 
does  not  pass  into  the  heavens.  Go,  therefore,  unto  My 
brethren,  and  say  to  them,  '  I  ascend  [or,  "  I  am  ascend- 
ing "]  ;  I  change  ;  through  the  power  of  My  spirit  I  am 
passing  into  My  Ascension-state,  unto  My  Father  and 
your  Father,  and  My  God  and  your  God.''  " 

To  such  a  body  as  our  Lord  manifested  to  His  disciples 
on  His  Resurrection-day,  plastic  to  the  quickening  power 
of  His  Spirit,  a  change,  even  of  substance  and  of  organisa- 
tion, and  an  ascension  to  heaven,  seems  as  natural  as 
anything  could  be.  His  Eesurrection  and  His  Ascension 
are  rightly  viewed  as  the  beginning  and  the  end  of  one 
process  of  change,  and  this  process  we  call  His  glorifi- 
cation, as  the  Apostles  call  it.  (John  xii.  16.)  These 
two  were  separated  from  each  other  by  that  interval  of 
"  forty  days  "  for  His  disciples'  sake.  It  was  necessary 
for  them  to  meet  Him  at  intervals  to  perfect  their  convic- 
tion of  His  Resurrection,  and  to  receive  the  indispensable 
last  instructions  and  commands.  It  is  noticeable  that,  of 
the  ten  meetings   with  one   or    more    of  the  disciples, 


68  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

clay  ;  but  during  the  remaining  time  Jesus  seems  to 
have  remained  for  the  most  part  invisible.  The  change 
which  transfigured  the  body  that  had  been  lifted  up  upon 
the  cross  into  the  body  that  was  taken  up  behind  the  cloud 
began  no  later,  certainly,  than  the  Resurrection-day,  and 
was  not  completely  manifest  till  the  Ascension-day, 
Between  the  two  days  it  may  have  had,  as  Miiller  thinks, 
u  a  progressive  development,"  This  seems  to  be  sug- 
gested by  our  Lord's  mysterious  saying  to  Mary.  Never- 
theless, it  seems  impossible  to  doubt  that  He  has  given 
us,  in  the  interviews  granted  to  the  witnesses  of  His  Resur- 
rection, an  illustration  that  goes  as  far  as  we  are  yet 
capable  of  going  toward  the  glorious  truth  which  the 
Apostle  has  expressed  in  saying,  "  It  is  sown  a  natural 
body  ;  it  is  raised  a  spiritual  body." 

NOTE  B. 

ON   RESURRECTION   AS   DISTINCT   FROM   RE  ANIMATION. 

But  now  hath  Christ  been  raised  from  the  dead,  the 
first-fruits  of  them  that  are  asleej).     (1  Cor.  xv.  20.) 

Before  the  Resurrection  of  Christ  there  had  been  in- 
stances of  what  is  popularly  termed  "  Resurrection/'  as  in 
the  case  of  Lazarus  and  others  whom  Christ  raised  from 
he  dead.  In  the  Old  Testament  period,  also,  there  had 
been  similar  cases,  as  in  the  history  of  Elijah  and  Elisha. 
Had  the  Resurrection  of  Christ  been  like  these  earlier 
11  Resurrections,"  as  we  call  them,  simply  the  return  of 
the  spirit  to  the  waiting  body,  and  a  mere  reviving  and 
continuance  of  the  interrupted  life,  it  is  hard  to  see  truth 
in  the  terms  frequently  applied  to  Christ  as  "  the  first 
born  from  the  dead"  (Col.  i.  18),  "  the  first  born  of  the 
dead  "  (Rev.  i.  5),  "  the  first-fruits  "  (1  Cor.  xv.  20,  23). 
"We  recognise  the  appropriateness  of  such  terms  to  Christ, 
only  when  we  perceive  that  His  reappearance  within  the 


III.]     RESURRECTION  OF  THE  JEWISH  SAINTS.    69 

circle  of  the  friends  who  hail  buried  Hirn  was  not  on  a 
level  with  that  of  Lazarus,  but  in  a  higher  mode  of  life 
than  that  which  He  had  quitted.  In  Lazarus  we  behold 
simply  the  reanimation  of  the  natural  body,  and  the  re- 
sumption of  the  fleshly  life.  In  Christ  we  behold  Besur- 
rection  in  the  spiritual  body,  and  assumption  of  the  life 
of  the  world  to  come.  This  is  fully  demonstrated  by  the 
facts  given  in  the  Gospel  record,  and  this  is  required  by 
the  exceptional  pre-eminence  which  the  New  Testament 
accords  to  Christ's  rising  from  the  dead.  But  one  in- 
stance of  that  which  is  indeed  the  Bcsurrection  has  been 
vouchsafed  to  our  knowledge,  as  a  sure  pledge  of  that 
which  is  to  come.  This  is  manifest  in  the  risen  Christ, 
who  thereby  "  ivas  declared  to  be  the  Son  of  God  with 
power."  (Rom.  i.  4.)  All  the  partial  resemblances  to 
this  which  are  found  on  record  are  cases  of  mere  resusci- 
tation or  reanimation. 


NOTE  C. 

ON   THE   RESURRECTION    OF   THE   JEWISH   SAINTS 

And  behold,  the  veil  of  the  temple  was  rent  in  twain 
from  the  top  to  the  bottom  ;  and  the  earth  did  quake  ; 
and  the  rocks  were  rent  ;  and  the  tombs  10 ere  opened; 
and  many  bodies  of  the  saints  that  had  fallen  asleep 
ivere  raised ;  and  coming  forth  out  of  the  tombs  after 
His  resurrection  tliey  entered  into  the  holy  city  and 
appeared  unto  many. — (Matt,  xxvii.  51 — 53.) 

[As  to  the  question  about  the  genuineness  of  this 
passage  see  below.] 

I.  This  passage  states  a  notable  fact  in  the  following 
particulars,  namely : — 

(1.)  An  earthquake  at  the  crucifixion  rent  the  tombs 
«ut  in  the  rocky  hill -sides. 

(2.)  Many  bodies  of  holy  persons  who  had  died  arose. 


70  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

(3.)  This  was  evidenced  by  their  appearing  to  many 
after  they  had  gone  forth  from  their  tombs. 

(4.)  This  quitting  of  the  tombs  and  appearing  to  wit- 
nesses took  place  after  Christ  had  quitted  His  tomb. 

II.  Upon  this  we  have  to  observe  : — 

(1.)  The  language  is  evidently  that  of  a  narrator  who 
believes  in  the  Resurrection  of  the  dead  in  the  self-same 
body  that  died  and  was  buried.  This  was  the  uniform 
belief  of  all  Jews. 

(2.)  The  fact  conveyed  by  the  language  is  the  appear- 
ance of  the  departed  saints  in  the  spiritual  bod}7,  the  body 
of  the  Resurrection-state. 

(3.)  The  explanatory  parallel  to  this  fact  is  found  in 
the  appearance  of  Moses  and  Elijah  upon  the  Mount  of 
Transfiguration  in  the  spiritual  body.  The  two  events  are 
of  the  same  kind.  A  glorious  event  in  the  history  of  our 
Saviour  gave  occasion  for  each.  One  was  as  appropriate 
as  the  other  to  the  event  in  Christ's  history  with  which 
it  was  associated. 

For  the  question,  Whether  the  Resurrection  of  these 
Jewish  saints  (as  distinct  from  the  manifestation  of  it  to 
witnesses)  took  place  first  at  Christ's  Resurrection,  or 
before,  whenever  their  death  took  place,  refer  to  Chapter 
viii.,  near  the  close. 

Upon  the  necessity  of  discriminating,  in  this  and  many 
other  passages,  between  the  fact  testified  to  and  the 
narrator's  opinions  about  the  fact,  as  apparent  in  his 
language,  refer  to  Chapter  viii. 

The  foregoing  remarks  assume  the  genuineness  of  the 
statement  as  from  Matthew.  If  genuine,  it  must  be  so 
explained.  It  is  not  impossible,  however,  that  the  story 
may  have  been  interpolated  into  the  Gospel  from  the  so- 
called  "Acts  of  Pilate,"  a  document  existing  as  early  as 
a.d.  150,  and  professing  to  give  a  report  of  Jesus'  trial 
and  execution.  (See  Huidekoper's  "  Indirect  Testimony 
to  the  Gospels.") 


III.]  CHRIST  "  IN  PARADISE."  71 


NOTE  D. 

WHERE    WAS    CHRIST    BETWEEN   HIS    DEATH   AND 
RESURRECTION  ? 

And  He  [Jesus]  said  unto  him,  Verily  I  say  unto  thee, 
To-day  shalt  thou  be  ivith  Me  in  Paradise.  (Luke  xxiii. 
43.) 

The  Apostles'  Creed,  as  early  as  a.d.  390,  admitted 
the  clause  which  in  the  English  version  reads,  "  He 
descended  into  hell";  the  original  of  which,  Descendit 
in  Inferna,  signifies,  "  He  went  down  into  the  lower 
world,"  that  is,  the  world  of  the  dead  and  buried.  This 
seems  to  have  been  based  on  the  statement  in  1  Pet. 
hi.  18—20. 

Because  Christ  also  suffered  for  sins  once,  the  righteous 
for  the  unrighteous,  that  He  might  bring  us  to  God; 
being  put  to  death  in  the  flesh,  but  auickened  in  the 
spirit ;  in  ivhich  also  He  went  and  preached  unto  the 
spirits  in  prison,  ivhich  aforetime  were  disobedient,  when 
the  longsuffering  of  God  waited  in  the  days  of  Noah, 
while  the  arh  was  a  preparing,  wherein  few,  that  is, 
eight  souls,  were  saved  through  water. 

Many  orthodox  Protestants  have  denied  the  plain  and 
obvious  sense  of  these  words,  namely,  that  Christ 
preached  the  Gospel  to  the  sinners  who  perished  in  the 
flood,  contending  that  Peter  here  refers  to  the  preaching 
of  Noah  to  those  sinners,  before  the  flood,  through  the 
Spirit  of  Christ  which  was  in  him.  Such  an  interpreta- 
tion is  evidently  a  dogmatic  twist,  intending  to  rescue 
Peter's  statement  from  the  hands  of  any  who  might  be 
disxDosed  to  extract  from  it  a  hope  that  Gospel  offers  may 
be  made  beyond  the  grave. 

Some  ei  orthodox  "  theologians  have  taught  that  Christ 
after  His  death  went  to  hell  and  suffered  the  torments  of 
the    damned.      Others,    shrinking  from  so   revolting  a 


72  BEYOND  THE   SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

conception,  made  in  deference  to  the  supposed  exigencies  of 
a  special  theory  of  the  Atonement,  have  held  that  Christ 
went  from  the  Cross  back  to  the  heaven  from  which  He 
came,  and  there  remained  till  the  hour  of  His  Kesurrec- 
tion.  Our  Lord  Himself  speaks  of  Paradise  as  the  abode 
awaiting  Him  and  the  penitent  thief  together.  "  To-day 
thou  slialt  he  with  Me  in  Paradise"  Spoken,  as  this 
was,  to  a  man  possessed  of  only  the  most  rudimentary 
notions  of  the  future  state,  according  to  the  popular 
ideas  of  the  time,  and  spoken,  too,  for  the  practical  pur- 
pose of  consoling  him  in  the  agonies  of  the  Cross,  it  must 
be  construed  according  to  his  capacity  to  understand  it. 
Paradise,  as  the  Jews  conceived  it,  was  the  part  of  the 
underworld  appropriated  to  the  blessed,  as  Gehenna  was 
the  part  reserved  for  the  tormented.  From  the  Cross  to 
Paradise  was  a  transition  from  pain  to  peace  and  from 
distress  to  comfort.  Nothing  more  definite  than  this  is 
conveyed  by  our  Lord's  promise  to  His  fellow-sufferer. 
All  that  the  New  Testament  has  to  say  more  definitely  of 
Christ's  place  or  occupation  during  those  three  days  is 
said  in  the  passage  quoted  from  Peter. 

"  The  natural  unforced  interpretation  of  this  text,"  says 
the  late  Professor  Hadley,  of  Yale  College,  "is  this,  that 
Christ  preached,  that  is,  made  the  announcement  and 
offers  of  the  Gospel,  to  departed  spirits,  who  were  in  con- 
finement as  a  consequence  of  their  disbelief  and  abuse  of 
the  Divine  forbearance  during  the  days  of  Noah.  This 
meaning  I  should  not  dare  to  discard."*  That  this 
preaching  of  Christ  took  place  after  His  death,  is  the 
natural  implication,  but  not  the  express  assertion,  of 
Peter's  language.  However  many  and  important  ques- 
tions this  leaves  waiting  for  answer,  it  is  all  that  is  told 
us.  Anything  beyond  this  is  mere  inference  and  specu- 
lation. 

*  See  further  in  my  essay,  "Is  Eternal  Punishment  End- 
less?" pp.  8G-88. 


III.]  MORTAL   BODIES   QUICKENED.  73 

But  wherever  Christ  was,  and  whatever  Christ  did, 
during  that  mysterious  interval,  we  can  hardly  doubt  that, 
when  He  W(  nt  forth  from  the  crucified  body,  He  went 
into  no  disembodied  condition,  but  rather  into  a  spiritual 
body,  appropriate  to  the  world  into  which  "He  went  and 
preached  to  the  spirits  in  prison"  As  on  entering  our 
present  world  He  took  on  Him  our  "  natural  body,'" 
appropriate  to  this  world,  so  on  His  entering  the  world 
of  "  the  spirits  in  prison  "  we  must  think  of  Him  as 
taking  on  a  "  spiritual  body,"  appropriate  to  the  world 
of  spirits.  We  think  of  Him  as  passing  at  will  from  one 
"habitation"  or  "tabernacle"  to  another,  and  that  in 
each  direction.  This  entrance  into  the  spiritual  body 
of  the  invisible  world  was  actual  Kesurrection,  but  not 
manifested  Kesurrection.  His  Resurrection  was  not  to 
be  made  manifest  to  the  chosen  witnesses  till  "  His 
hour  "  had  come,  upon  the  Lord's  Day. 

NOTE    E. 

MORTAL   BODIES    QUICKENED. 

And  if  Christ  is  in  you,  the  body  is  dead  because  of 
sin  ;  but  the  spirit  is  life  because  of  righteousness.  But 
if  the  Spirit  of  Him  that  raised  up  Jesus  from  the  dead 
dwelleth  in  you,  He  that  raised  up  Christ  Jesus  from  the 
dead  shall  quicken  also  your  mortal  bodies  through  His 
Spirit  that  dwelleth  in  you. 

So  then,  brethren,  we  are  debtors,  not  to  the  flesh,  to 
live  after  the  flesh:  for  if  ye  live  after  the  flesh,  ye  must 
die ;  but  if  by  the  Spirit  ye  mortify  the  deeds  of  the 
body,  ye  shall  live.  For  as  many  as  are  led  by  the  Spirit 
of  God,  these  are  sons  of  God.     (Rom.  viii.  10 — 14.) 

The  analogy,  drawn  in  this  passage  from  the  Resurrec- 
tion of  Christ  to  the  quickening  of  our  mortal  bodies, 
is  thought  to  give  some  colour  to  the  notion  of  the  raising 
up  of  "  the  self- same  bodies  that  were  buried." 


74  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

Whether  this  "  physical  Eesurrection  "  was  in  Paul's 
thought,  we  must  determine  : — 

(1.)  From  the  limitations  which  other  sayings  of  tho 
Apostle  require  us  to  assign  to  his  meaning  here.  The 
whole  drift  of  his  argument  in  1  Cor.  xv.  is  to  the  other- 
ness of  the  future  body.  So,  in  2  Cor.  v.,  when  tho 
earthly  is  "dissolved"  we  straightway  "have"  tho 
heavenly. 

(2.)  From  the  point  of  his  conclusion,  verse  12.  "  So 
then,"  ye  are  now  obligated  to  a  spiritual  life.  Xomore 
is  to  be  demanded  in  the  premises  than  this  so  then  re- 
quires. We  are  not  to  travel  outside  of  the  range  of  the 
argument.  All  that  is  required  as  a  ground  on  which  to 
base  the  obligation  to  a  spiritual  life  now  is  the  ability  to 
lead  such  a  life,  and  this  flows  from  a  quickening  ^owcr 
residing  within  the  mortal  bod}*. 

(8.)  From  the  whole  drift  of  his  argument.  In  Chap.  vi. 
4 — 11,  the  Apostle  has  already  drawn  an  analog}*  between 
the  Resurrection-life  of  Christ  and  the  new  spiritual  life 
of  the  Christian  in  the  present  world.  Returning  to 
this  in  the  present  chapter,  he  shows  that  the  scat  of 
this  life  is  in  the  spirit,  not  the  body ;  the  source  of  it 
the  Divine  Spirit,  and  the  channel  through  which  the 
quickening  power  flows  from  God  to  man  is  the  way  of 
righteousness.    He  reasons  thus  : — 

-*  The  body  is  dead  because  of  sin."  Not  that  death,  as 
a  physical  experience,  has  been  inflicted  on  the  body  by 
sin  in  the  way  of  penalty.  Death,  in  Paul's  view,  is  a 
spiritual  effect,  due  to  sin  as  the  corresponding  spiritual 
cause.*  In  the  body,  apart  from  the  spirit,  is  merely 
animal  life,  not  spiritual.  As  devoid  of  spiritual  life,  tho 
body  is  dead,  and  remains  dead,  because  of  sin,  since  sin 
excludes  the  Spirit  of  righteousness,  the  quickening  power. 

*  The  decisive  but  not  the  only  text  for  this  view  is  Rom. 
vi.  23,  as  the  contrast  between  "death''  and  "eternal  life" 

requires. 


III.]         THE    REDEMPTION   OP   OTJR   BODY.  75 

"If  Christ  is  in  you,  the  body  is  (thus)  dead"  only  in  so 
far  as  sin,  the  excluder  of  spiritual  life,  is  tolerated.  Also, 
"  if  Christ  is  in  you,  the  spirit  is  life  because  of  right- 
eousness" so  far  as  you  are  intent  on  righteousness,  which 
allies  it  with  the  Supreme  Life-Giver,  and  keeps  an  open 
channel  between  the  Divine  Fountain  and  the  human 
vessel. 

"And  (not  'but,5  but  And  so)  if  the  Spirit  of  Him 
that  raised  up  the  human  Jesus  from  the  dead  dwell  in 
you,  He  that  raised  up  the  Divine  Christ*  from  the  dead 
shall  also  (or  even)  impart  the  life  of  the  spirit  to  your 
'mortal  bodies  by  His  Spirit  that  dwellcth  in  you.'"  And 
this,  now;  "so  that  %ue  are  debtors  not  to  the  flesh"  not 
constrained  by  our  existence  in  these  bodies  to  live  in  sin, 
"after  the  flesh,"  The  life  of  the  spirit  shall  so  control 
and  quicken  our  mortal  bodies  that  they  shall  not  be  a 
"deadweight  upon  our  spiritual  life,  but  "as  instru- 
ments of  righteousness"  (Chap.  vi.  13),  shall  subserve 
and  further  it. 

So  then  (so  runs  the  conclusion),  this  mortal  body  is 
no  excuse  (see,  especially,  Chap.vii.  23 — 25)  for  supineness 
as  regards  the  struggles  of  spiritual  life,  for  it  shall  be 
quickened  by  that  life,  so  far  as  we  yield  ourselves  in 
righteousness  to  the  life-giving  Spirit  of  God. 

NOTE  F. 

THE    REDEMPTION    OF    OUR   BODY. 

Waiting  for  our  adoption,  to  wit,  the  redemption  of  our 
body.     (Kom.  viii.  23.) 

Here,  as  in  the  passage  examined  in  Note  E,  the  question 
is  not  what  these  words  are  capable  of  meaning  as  ivords, 
but  what  they  must  mean  in  connection  with  the  circle  of 

*  Observe  the  significant  transition  from  the  term  "  Jesus," 
appropriate  to  the  physical  life,  to  the  term  "Christ,"  appro- 
priate to  the  spiritual. 


76  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

ideas  in  which  they  stand,  and  what  significance  is  cast 
upon  them  by  other  parts  of  the  Apostle's  teaching,  as 
1  Cor.  xv.,  and  2  Cor.  v. 

We  must  weigh  this  expression, "  the  redemption  of  our 
body,"  by  the  fact  that  the  Pauline  terms,  "  natural  body  " 
and  "  spiritual  body ,"  have  their  distinction,  not  in  the 
substance  out  of  which  each  body  is  organised,  but  in  the 
organising,  animating,  and  controlling  power  in  each.  This 
is  the  animal  soul  {psyche)  in  the  "natural"  (psychic) 
body  that  now  is,  but  the  spirit  (pneuma)  in  the  "spiritual" 
(pneumatic)  body  that  shall  be.  The  distinction  is  not 
material,  but  dynamical;  not  in  the  stuff,  but  in  the 
poiver. 

Conformably  to  this  distinction,  the  redemption  of  our 
body  is  not  the  transference  of  the  body  from  the  grave  to 
the  sky,  or  of  the  same  body  from  the  grosser  organisation 
of  flesh  and  blood  to  the  ethereal  organisation  oi"  spirit." 
The  Apostle  thinks  of  us  as  always  having  a  body,  of  the 
one  sort  or  the  other,  never  as"  unclothed  "  or  "naked" 
(2  Cor.  v.  3,  4),  but  always  able  to  say,  with  the  fullest  sense 
of  possession,  "  our  body."  He  accordingly  regards  its 
"  redemption  "  as  the  transfer  of  the  p>ower  which  animates 
and  controls  "  our  body  "  from  the  lower-life  principle  to 
the  higher,  from  the  psyche  ("soul")  to  the  pneuma 
("spirit  ").  This  is  as  far  as  can  be  from  implying  any 
"redemption"  of  the  buried  dust,  or  any  portion  of  it, 
from  the  realm  of  dead  matter. 

It  is  true,  indeed,  that  the  phraseology  is  precisely 
such  as  any  Jewish  Rabbi  of  that  time  might  have  used, 
with  his  notions  of  the  Resurrection  as  the  re- animation  of 
the  buried  body,  with  all  its  "  natural  "  parts,  passions, 
blemishes,  and  even  its  clothes.  But  those  notions  and 
Paul's  thoughts  are  diametrically  opposite.  All  Paul's 
reasoning  shows  that,  in  the  spiritual  life  of  his  thought, 
that  materialistic  phrase  itself  has  passed  through  a 
Resurrection  from  the  realm  of  flesh  to  that  of  spirit. 


III. J    THE  EEDEMPTTON  OF  OUE  BODY.     77 

"  The  adoption  "  we  wait  for,  as  "  the  sons  of  God,  led 
by  the  Spirit  of  God"  (verse  14),  will  be  consummated, 
when  "  our  body  "  is  manifested,  in  "  the  Resurrection  of 
life"  as  no  more  the  "  natural  body,"  in  the  power  of  the 
animal  life,  or  "  soul,"  but  as  the  "  spiritual  body,"  in  the 
full  power  of  the  spirit,  which  builds  it,  controls  it,  glori- 
fies it.  This  Resurrection  is  as  if  the  "  natural  body  " 
had  been  raised  and  redeemed,  but  not  because  of  any 
such  thing.  "  The  earthly  is  dissolved ;  we  have  the 
heavenly,"  as  exemplified  in  the  Kisen  Christ. 


CHAPTEK  IV. 

THE  RESURRECTION  AN  OBJECT  OF 
CHRISTIAN  ENDEA  VOUB,  ATTAINED 
AT  DEATH. 


CHAJPTEK  IV. 

THE    RESURRECTION   AN    OBJECT    OF    CHRISTIAN 
ENDEAVOUR,  ATTAINED  AT  DEATH. 

"  They  that  are  accounted  worthy  to  attain  to  that  world  and 
the  resurrection  from  the  dead." — Luke  xx.  35. 

What  clear  idea  do  the  majority  of  Bible 
readers  get  from  these  words  of  our  Lord?  Do 
they  not  deserve  an  effort  to  understand  them 
better? 

The  Kesurrection,  we  have  been  taught  to 
believe,  is  an  event,  and  an  event  which,  like 
the  sunrise,  the  regular  course  of  events  will 
bring  at  once  to  all.  It  is  regarded  as  the 
awakening  of  all  together  to  judgment 
together;  the  simultaneous  morning  call  of 
the  Great  and  Last  Day.  Thus  almost  all 
Christians  hold  the  traditional  belief.  But 
here  our  Lord  speaks  of  some  men,  not  all 
men,  as  "accounted  worthy  to  attain  to  the 
Besurrection."  The  Kesurrection,  then,  is  a 
thing  which   depends  on  worthiness.     Those 

6 


82  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

who  are  not  "  accounted  worthy  to  attain  to" 
it  do  not  attain  it.  No  other  inference  can 
possibly  be  drawn  from  these  words. 

And  yet  our  Lord  has  taught,  with  no  less 
explicitness,  that  "  all  that  are  in  the  tombs 
shall  hear  His  voice  and  shall  come  forth;  they 
that  have  done  good  unto  the  resurrection  of 
life,  and  they  that  have  done  ill  unto  the  resur- 
rection of  judgment.     (John  v.  29.) 

Comparing  these  passages,  it  would  seem 
that  the  Eesurrection  to  be  obtained  by  worthi- 
ness is  "  the  resurrection  of  life ." 

The  same  thought  is  obtained  by  comparing 
two  utterances  of  the  Apostle  Paul.  Writing 
to  the  Philippians  (iii.  11),  he  speaks  of  his 
endeavour  to  be  accounted  worthy  of  the 
Eesurrection  :  "if  by  any  means  I  may  attain 
unto  the  resurrection  from  the  dead."  Now, 
unless  striving  and  not  striving  are  the  same 
thing,  the  results  of  striving  and  not  striving 
cannot  be  the  same  thing.  The  Eesurrection 
that  Paul  strives  for  cannot  be  attained  by  all 
together  with  Paul,  because  there  are  many 
who  do  not  strive  with  Paul. 

And  yet  Paul  declares,  with  equal  explicit- 
ness, that  all  shall  rise  from  the  dead.  He 
speaks  of  himself  to  Felix,  as  "having  hope 
toward  God     .     .     .     .     that  there  shall  be 


IV.]    AN   OBJECT   OF   CHRISTIAN  ENDEAVOUR.   83 

resurrection  both  of  the  just  and  unjust."  (Acts 
xxiv.  15.) 

I.  The  only  conclusion  from  these  identical 
teachings  of  the  Master  and  His  disciple  is 
this  :  All  rise  ;  not  all  alike.  The  Kesurrection, 
in  the  full  and  ideal  sense,  "  the  resurrection  of 
life"  is  attained  by  Christian  endeavour  only. 
A  Eesnrrection,  unlike,  inferior,  "  of  judgment  " 
awaits  "  the  unjust,"  and  all  who  do  not  put 
forth  Christian  endeavour.  It  is  the  poor  and 
barren  result  which  mere  neglected  nature 
brings  to  pass,  without  endeavour. 

(1.)  Observe  that  this  conclusion  throws 
clearer  light  upon  our  Lord's  great  saying  :  "  I 
am  the  Besurrection  and  the  Life"  He  by 
whose  Spirit  the  endeavour  is  inspired  and 
guided,  and  the  result  attained,  may  fitly 
claim  to  be  the  personal  manifestation  of  the 
Kesurrection-power. 

(2.)  Observe,  also,  that  this  shows  the  same 
distinction  in  the  New  Testament  use  of  the 
word  "Resurrection,"  that  we  make  in  our 
common  use  of  the  word  "Life."  We  know 
and  say  that  there  is  life,  which  is  not  life. 
We  simply  carry  into  the  future  our  common 
distinction  between  life  in  the  bare  sense  and 
life  in  the  full  sense,  between  being  and  well- 
being,  when  we  think  of  the  rising  of  Paul  as 


3£  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

the  Eesurrection,  that  of  Judas  as  simply  Eesur- 
rection. We  speak  out  of  an  intelligence  both 
profound  and  clear,  when  we  say  of  multitudes 
in  this  world,  "not  all  who  live  live."  What 
is  the  life  of  "  a  tramp  "?  He  is  alive,  but 
does  not  his  existence  seem  to  us  more  like 
death  and  hell  than  life  ?  Thus  our  common 
speech  recognises,  in  many  words,  a  physical 
or  natural  meaning  and  a  spiritual  one,  a 
skeleton-like  meaning,  hare  as  fleshless  bones 
of  all  that  constitutes  ideal  life,  and  a  vitalised 
meaning,  complete  as  a  perfect  body  in  all  the 
attributes  that  can  pertain  to  perfection  of  life. 
Eesurrection  is  one  of  these  words  of  double 
meaning.  It  may  denote  a  life-condition  of 
fulness  and  power,  or  a  life-condition  of  defect 
and  weakness.  Thus  only  can  we  consistently 
interpret  the  teachings  both  of  Christ  and  of 
Paul. 

(3.)  But  in  what  direction  do  these  teach- 
ings plainly  lead?  Do  they  not  plainly  con- 
template the  Eesurrection  not  as  an  external 
event,  but  as  a  spiritual  development,  resulting 
from  spiritual  processes  ? 

Another  thing  is  also  plainly  recognised. 
After  speaking  of  his  endeavour  to  "  attain  unto 
the  resurrection  of  the  dead,"  Paul  goes  right 
on  to  say,  "Not  that  I  have  already  obtained,  or 


IV.]    AN    OBJECT    OF   CHEISTIAN   ENDEAVOUR,    85 

am  already  made  perfect :  but  I  press  on,  if  so 
be  that  I  may  apprehend  that  for  which  also  I 
was  apprehended  by  Christ  Jesus."  That  is,  in 
Paul's  view,  the  attainment  of  the  Kesurrection 
is  a  present  concern.  It  must  be  worked  out 
here.  It  cannot  be  laid  over  till  the  future 
state  begins.  The  result  which  Paul  deems  it 
necessary  to  attain  before  he  dies  is  a  certain 
spiritual  condition.  This,  potentially ,  is  the 
Resurrection.  It  involves  it  as  the  bud  involves 
the  flower. 

Certainly,  this  way  of  thinking  is  not  in  the 
line  of  the  traditional  expectation  of  a  world- 
wide external  event,  to  burst  upon  all  mankind 
simultaneously,  ages  hence. 

II.  We  are  now  introduced  to  the  question  : 
When  did  Paul  expect  the  bud  to  unfold,  and 
the  flower  to  appear  ?  When  did  he  expect  to 
realise  that  he  had  attained  the  Resurrection 
fully  ? 

The  conclusion  has  been  already  drawn 
(Chapter  ii.)  from  our  Lord's  great  saying  :  "  I 
am  the  Resurrection  and  the  Life"  and  corrobo- 
rated by  other  sayings  of  His  (Notes  A  and  B, 
Chapter  ii.),  that  His  Eesurrection-power,  like 
every  other  power  which  He  claims  in  that 
frequent  assertion,  "  I  am,"  is  a  power  in  pre- 
sent and  perpetual  exercise  ;  that  through  this 


86  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [cnAP. 

power  the  unseen  world  beholds  "the  spirits  of 
just  men  made  perfect "  perpetually  rising  from 
the  dead  in  the  spiritual  body,  in  the  complete- 
ness of  "  the  resurrection  of  life." 

Further  evidence  for  this  is  now  to  come 
before  us  from  the  Scriptures. 

(1.)  That  this,  at  least,  in  some,  or  many, 
cases,  is  not  to  be  delayed  till  that  universal 
and  simultaneous  awakening  which  the  popular 
tradition  anticipates,  appears  from  what  John 
tells  us  of  what  he  calls  "  the  First  'Resurrec- 
tion" (Rev.  xx.  5,  6),  in  which  "blessed  and 
holy  "  spirits  participate,  and  enjoy  a  period  of 
glory  for  "  a  thousand  years,"  during  which, 
he  says,  "  the  rest  of  the  dead  lived  not."  How- 
ever we  explain  the  particulars  of  this  pro- 
phecy, of  which  due  account  will  be  subse- 
quently made,*  the  general  fact  on  the  face  of 
it  is,  that  some  of  the  dead  will  have  their 
Resurrection  before  others.  But  let  the  fact 
here  be  noted,  to  be  thought  on,  that  except 
among  a  limited  number  of  Christians,  who 
hold  what  are  called  u  peculiar  views,"  the 
doctrine  of  the  First  Resurrection  has  been 
dropped  out  of  mind  as  an  insoluble  enigma. 
It  need  not,  it  ought  not,  to  be  dropped.  We 
can  find  its  place  in  finding  a  more  rational 

*  See  Chapter  ix.  and  Note  B. 


IV.]    AN   OBJECT   OF   CHKISTIAN  ENDEAVOUK.   87 

and  Scriptural  view  of  the  whole  subject  to 
which  it  belongs. 

(2.)  Further  testimony  comes  from  Paul. 
He  tells  the  Corinthians  (1,  xv.  22),  that  as 
death  comes  to  all  from  Adam,  so  Eesurrection 
comes  to  all  from  Christ  :  "  For  as  in  Adam 
all  die,  so  also  in  Christ  shall  all  be  made  alive. 
But"  he  immediately  adds,  "  each  in  his 
own  order "  (rdyfia,  a  division,  like  that  of  an 
army).  What  clearer  way  of  saying,  "  not  all 
at  once  "  ?  This  is  the  natural  sense  given  by 
the  connection  of  ideas  in  the  parallel  between 
Adam  and  Christ.  All  are  not  born  of  Adam 
at  once,  nor  do  all  born  of  Adam  die  at  once. 
They  are  born  and  die  in  their  generations, 
each  in  his  own  "  order."  So  of  that  birth 
into  the  future  body  which  we  name  the 
Eesurrection,  what  more  congruous  with  the 
Apostle's  way  of  speaking  than  that  it  is  in 
the  successive  generations,  "  each  in  his 
own  "  ?  * 

(3.)  Perhaps  plainer  still  is  what  Paul  says 
in  his  second  letter  to  the  Corinthians  (v.  1) : 
"  We  know  that,  if  the  earthly  house  of  our 
tabernacle  be  dissolved,  we  have  a  building  from 
God,  a  house  not  made  ivith  hands,  eternal,  in 

*  See,  further,  upon  this  passage.  Note  D,  appended  to  the 
next  chapter. 


88  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

the  heavens."  Paul  is  here  speaking,  not 
merely  of  the  present  and  the  future  state,  but 
of  the  present  and  the  future  body — of  being 
"unclothed"  of  the  one  and  " clothed  upon" 
with  the  other.  If,  however,  the  traditional 
notions  of  the  subject  are  true,  Paul  does  not 
now  have  this  anticipated  "  house  "  or  body, 
but  only  a  prospect  of  having  it  by-and-by. 
But  he  does  not  say  we  shall  have  it,  but  we 
have  it.  He  plainly  thinks,  that  we  have  it 
when  we  cease  to  have  the  earthly  body.  He 
expects  to  move  directly  from  the  one  "  house" 
into  the  other.  "  If  the  earthly  be  dissolved, 
we  have*  the  heavenly."  Then  he  goes  on  to 
develop  his  thought.  He  regards  death  as  not 
merely  an  unclothing,  a  disembodiment  of  the 
spirit,  but  a  clothing  upon,  a  re-embodiment, 
an  accession  of  life  more  abundant.  "  For  we 
that  are  in  this  tabernacle  do  groan,  being  bur- 
dened, not  for  that  ive  would  be  unclothed,  but 
that  we  would  be  clothed  upon,  that  what  is 
mortal  may  be  swallowed  up  of  life."  But 
how  could  mortality  be  thus  "  swallowed  up  " 
— every  trace  of  it  obliterated — if  such  a  trace 
of  it  remained  as  a  naked,  disembodied  spirit 

*  Compare  with  this  the  similar  emphatic  assertion  which 
Paul  makes  that  the  spiritual  body  of  the  Eesurrection  is  a 
present  reality,  "There  is  a  spiritual  body."    (1  Cor.  xv.  44.) 


IV.]    AN    OBJECT   OF   CHEISTIAN   ENDEAVOUE.   89 

in  waiting  for  a  new  body,  still  carrying  un- 
satisfied the  longings  of  mortality  which  Paul 
expressed  in  his  "  longing  to  be  clothed  upon 
with  our  habitation  which  is  from  heaven"*? 
Paul  expressly  intimates  his  hope  of  the  con- 
trary, though  not  so  clearly  in  the  English 
version  as  in  the  original.  He  uses  a  phrase 
by  which  the  Greek  denotes  a  supposition  as 
taken  for  granted,  and  says:  "since*  (E.  V., 
if  so  be  that)  being  clothed  [as  I  anticipate]  we 
shall  not  be  found  naked"  or  without  a  body. 

(4.)  In  close  connection  with  what  Paul  says 
of  the  earthly  and  the  heavenly  house,  or  body, 
may  be  put  what  Christ  said  to  the  covetous 
(Luke  xvi.  9),  urging  them  to  beneficence, 
"  that  when  it  [riches]  shall  fail  [at  death] 
they  [your  beneficiaries]  may  receive  you  into 
the  eternal  tabernacles."  The  word  for  "  taber- 
nacle "  is  identical  in  meaning,  and  nearly  so 
in  form,  with  the  word  by  which  Paul  denotes 
the  earthly  body  (aicnvr),  g-ktjvo^,  tabernacle  or 
tent).  And  the  welcoming  into  the  heavenly 
"  tents  "  Christ  puts  at  the  time  when  the 
earthly  ones  cease  to  be. 

All  these  testimonies  of  Holy  Scripture,  with 

*  Eobinson's  Lex.,  p.  139,  translates  elf  76  koL,  etc.,"  if  indeed 
also  [as  we  may  take  for  granted,  that  is,  since]  being  clothed  we 
shall  not  be  found  naTied." 


90  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

others  that  might  be  put  beside  them,  did  not 
these  seem  abundantly  adequate,  converge 
upon  the  point  of  truth  which  our  Lord's  great 
saying  illuminates.  We  cannot  reasonably 
doubt  that  His  Resurrection-power,  like  all  His 
other  powers,  is  claimed  as  a  present  activity, 
though  behind  the  veil,  by  His  word,  "  I  am." 
It  operates,  like  all  His  other  powers,  to-day 
and  perpetually,  though  beyond  our  sight. 
To  as  many  as  have  by  Christian  endeavour 
prepared  the  Christly  conditions  of  being 
"  accounted  worthy  to  attain  to  the  Resur- 
rection" He  is  to-day  the  Author  of  "  the 
resurrection  of  Life  "  in  the  spiritual  body, 
as  really  as  He  is  to-day  the  Author  of 
the  preparatory  work  of  Divine  grace  within 
our  souls. 

III.  This  conclusive  testimony  of  Holy 
Scripture  to  the  present  and  continuous  ac- 
complishment of  the  Resurrection,  "  each  in  his 
own  order  "  is  re-enforced  by  other  considera- 
tions. 

(1.)  Reflecting  minds  must  draw  an  infer- 
ence upon  this  subject  from  what  they  see  of 
the  principle  of  continuity  that  is  apparent  in 
all  the  works  of  God.  We  see  no  general 
arrest  of  progress  anywhere.  The  testimony 
of  the  past  ages  is  uniform.     The  earth,  life, 


IV.]    AN    OBJECT   OF   CHEISTIAN   ENDEAVOUE.    91 

man,  civilisation,  religion,  everything  in  which 
physical,  social,  spiritual  forces  work,  exhibit 
continuous  movement  forward,  without  arrest 
or  halt.  God  is  perpetually  active  in  all  His 
works  (John  v.  17),  pouring  into  them  life 
ever  more  abundantly.  Directly  opposed,  in 
principle,  to  all  this,  as  well  as  wholly  unsup- 
ported by  the  teaching  of  our  Lord,  is  the  old 
notion  that  has  come  down  from  the  Jews  into 
our  modern  churches,  of  an  "  intermediate," 
and  privative,  state  of  existence,  in  which  the 
souls  of  the  dead  halt  and  wait,  in  a  long  inter- 
ruption of  embodied  conditions,  until  a  day 
arrives  that  clothes  them  again  with  the  bodies 
they  have  waited  for,  and  finally  sets  them 
forward  completely  equipped  for  the  heavenly 
existence. 

(2.)  Since  we  must  regard  the  prin- 
ciple of  continuity,  elsewhere  observable, 
as  operative  likewise  in  the  invisible  world,  we 
cannot  accept  the  notion  that  death  introduces 
in  any  respect  a  subsidence  into  lower,  or 
negative,  privative  or  less  perfect  conditions, 
like  Paul  terms  "  nakedness  "  or  disembodi- 
ment.*    Here  we  must  cut  wholly  loose  from 

*  The  "  Larger  Catechism ''  of  the  Presbyterian  Church  (U.S.) 
strives  hard  to  look  in  the  other  direction.  It  affirms  that  the 
souls  of  the  righteous,  "immediately  after  death,"  "are  made 
perfect  in  holiness,  and  received  into  the  highest  heavens,  where 


92  BEYOND    THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

Old  Testament  doctrine,  and  turn  our  backs  on 
all  those  quotations  from  the  ancient  Hebrew 
writers,  which  may  be  adduced  to  sustain  the 
notion  we  must  discard.  "  The  dead  praise 
not  the  Lord,  neither  any  that  go  down  into 
silence"  (Psalm  cxv.  17.)  We  must  meet  all 
such  statements  with  the  fact  that  "  life  and 
incorruption  have  been  brought  to  light  by  the 
Gospel  "—by  the  Gospel  of  the  Resurrection.* 
Death   cannot    be    a    descent    into    a    less 

they  behold  the  face  of  God  in  light  and  glory,  waiting  for  the 
full  redemption  of  their  bodies,  which  even  in  death  continue 
united  to  Christ,  and  rest  in  their  graves  as  in  their  beds,  till  at 
the  last  day  they  be  again  united  to  their  souls."     (§  86.) 

Nevertheless,  these  souls  are  conceived  of  as  disembodied,  or 
in  Paul's  phrase  "  naked."  And  how  can  this  be  anything  but 
a  privative  condition,  destitute  of  the  necessary  organ  for  the 
manifestation  of  life  in  its  normal  completeness,  in  the  union  of 
body  and  spirit  ?  Such  an  intermediate  life  is,  so  far,  a  muti- 
lated one,  in  which  death  is  not  "swallowed  up"  but  rather 
maintains  a  perpetual  trophy  of  victory, in  the  "naked  "  state 
of  the  spirit. 

But  who  can  comprehend  this  bit  of  transcendentalism,  which 
contemplates  the  dissolved  body  as  still  "  united  to  Christ  "  ? 

*  To  construct  a  correct  doctrine  of  the  future  state  by  any  use 
of  such  statements  as  the  one  above  quoted  from  the  Psalms  is 
like  attempting  to  derive  accurate  information  of  the  interior  of 
the  United  States  as  it  is  to-day  from  a  map  fifty  years  old.  To 
say  this  is  by  no  means  to  discredit  the  inspiration  of  the  Old 
Testament  (that  is,  in  any  right  and  clear  thinking  on  that 
subject),  but  simply  to  do  justice  to  the  patent  fact  which 
Bible  study  evinces,  that  the  Holy  Scriptures  are  character- 
ised by  a  progress  of  doctrine  from  first  to  last.  Inspiration  is 
one  thing,  infallibility  another;  but  the  two  are  generally  con- 
founded in  Christian  thought.     (See  Chapter  x.,  II.) 


IV.]    AN   OBJECT   OF   CHRISTIAN   ENDEAVOUR.    93 

complete,  less  highly  developed,  state  of  being 
than  the  present.  It  must  be  ascent,  rather 7 
into  a  state  of  greater  completeness,  higher 
development,  capacitated  for  more  exalted 
joys,  capable,  therefore,  of  keener  pains  also; 
or  God's  principle  of  continuous  advance  is 
contradicted. 

Death  merely  disconnects  the  spirit  from  a 
perishable  body,  which  is  dropped  and  left 
behind  for  ever.  For  the  decay  and  reconstitu- 
tion  of  that  body  there  is  no  such  waiting  as 
the  creeds  fancy,  nor  for  a  far  remote  and 
miraculous  assumption  of  a  body  in  the  sup- 
posed simultaneous  and  general  re-embodiment 
of  all  that  are  in  the  graves.  The  perishable 
body  no  sooner  drops  away,  than  the  spirit  is 
clothed  upon — perhaps  in  Chapter  ix.  we  may 
see  reason  to  think,  clothes  itself,  through  the 
operation  of  fixed  and  uniform  law — with  a 
body  suited  to  an  advanced  stage  of  being.  It 
rises  into  such  a  condition  of  existence  as  it  is 
fitted  to  rise  into.  So  it  was  said  of  Judas, 
that  he  went  "to  his  own  place."  But  whether 
it  be  "  unto  life"  or  "  unto  judgment"  there  is 
no  break,  no  halt,  but  onward  movement  ever. 
So  said  the  poet, — 

"  Eternal  process  moving  on, 
From  state  to  state  the  spirit  walks." 


94  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

This  is  the  Anastasis*  which  is  revealed  in 
the  New  Testament,  the  rising-up,  the  Resur- 
rection. 

IV.  But  unless  we  can  see  clearly  how  a  mis- 
take has  originated,  we  cannot  always  admit  that 
the  mistake  exists.  The  bar  to  a  true  and  Scrip- 
tural doctrine  of  the  Kesurrection,  as  exhibited 
in  the  foregoing  pages,  is  formed  principally  by 
mistaken  notions  respecting  the  coming  of 
Christ  and  the  judgment  day.  The  New 
Testament  constantly  associates  these  three 
ideas  : — The  coming  of  the  Lord,  the  rising  of 
the  dead,  the  judgment  of  the  world. 

(1.)  If  the  coming  of  the  Lord  is  still  distant, 
then,  as  most  Christians  reason,theKesurrection- 
day  and  the  judgment-day  are  likewise  distant. 
So  far  or  so  near  as  the  coming  is  placed,  so 
far  or  so  near  everything  associated  with  it  in 
the  Scripture  prophecies  is  deemed  to  be.  "With 
the  exception  of  a  comparatively  small  number 
of  Christians,  who  deem  the  coming  of  the 
Lord  to  be  now  impending,  the  general  view 
relegates  it  to  an  indefinite  future,  and  with  it 
the  Resurrection  and  the  Judgment  also. 

(2.)  Again,  if  the  Judgment  to  come  is  con- 
ceived— as  I  think  is  commonly  the  case — after 
the  manner  of  an  earthly  tribunal,  which  at  an 

*  See  Note  at  the  end  of  this  chapter. 


IV.]    AN   OBJECT   OF   CHKISTIAN   ENDEAVOUR.    95 

appointed  day  opens,  goes  through  its  docket, 
and  then  adjourns ;  if  our  thought  sets  the 
opening  of  some  great  and  general  court  of  God 
at  a  far-off  point  or  end  of  time,  till  which  the 
due  sentencing  of  all  the  deeds  and  misdeeds  of 
the  human  race  is  to  be  waited  for,  then  we 
shall  tend  to  think  of  the  "  resurrection  of 
judgment"  as  deferred  till  that  court  is  ready 
to  open,  together  with  "  the  resurrection  of  life." 
It  will  seem  to  us  the  general  and  simultaneous 
opening  of  the  court  doors  to  the  waiting 
multitudes. 

To  suggest  that  these  ideas  may  be  replaced 
by  others  more  reasonable,  and  by  ,way  of 
introducing  the  subjects  of  the  three  following 
chapters,  let  us  glance  here  at  John's  vision  of 
Resurrection  and  Judgment.  (Rev.  xx.  12,  13.) 
This  vision  was  the  last  which  John  had  in  the 
series  which  he  saw  concerning  the  progress 
of  the  kingdom  of  Christ  through  conflict  up  to 
final  triumph.  But  from'this  finality  in  narrative 
is  it  right  to  infer  finality  in  fact  ? — that  no  such 
processes  are  now  going  on  in  the  unseen  ? — 
that  they  will  not  begin  until  the  present 
struggles  of  the  advancing  kingdom  have  reached 
their  consummation  in  glory?  This  is  the 
inference  usually  drawn.  But  let  us  test  it  by 
an  illustration. 


96  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

Suppose  that  we  visit  a  factory,  in  which 
many  processes  are  simultaneously  going  on. 
In  the  basement  we  see  the  raw  material 
sorted  and  cut  up.  In  the  next  story  we  see 
some  of  the  coarser  processes.  Up  and  up 
we  go,  finer  and  finer  the  processes  we  see, 
and  at  last  in  the  upper  story  we  find 
finishing,  inspecting,  sorting  and  boxing. 
Now,  if  we  should  tell  a  child  what  wre  had 
seen  in  that  factory,  in  the  order  in  which  we 
had  seen  it,  he  might  imagine  that  the  work  ot 
those  upper  rooms  was  not  touched  till  all  the 
lower  work-rooms  had  stopped  work,  and  every 
wheel  in  the  preparatory  processes  was  still. 
Yet  that  childish  inference,  as  to  the  time  when 
Eesurrection  and  Judgment  begin,  is  actually 
drawn  from  John's  vision  of  them,  simply  be- 
cause he  narrates  it  last  in  the  order  of  things 
which  he  saw.  Is  it  not  far  more  reasonable  to 
regard  it  as  a  single  glimpse  of  things  which 
are  perpetually  going  on  in  the  unseen  world  ? 
While  this  world's  events  are  taking  place,  the 
unseen  world  {"Hades")  beholds  the  grave, 
the  sea,  perpetually  giving  up  their  dead,  and 
judgment  is  perpetually  passing  on  the  spirits 
new-born  into  the  future  state,  as  their  actual 
character  is  revealed  to  them  in  conscience,  as 
in  the   sight  of  God,  and  as  they  enter  into 


IV.]    AN   OBJECT   OF   CHRISTIAN    ENDEAVOUR.    97 

the  appropriate  consequences    of    being   what 
their   course    here    has    made   them   to   be  - 
worthy  or   unworthy  of  the  "  Besurrection  of 
life." 

The  sum  of  our  conclusions  thus  far  is  this  : 
The  Besurrection  is  ever  going  on  in  the  invisi- 
ble world.  The  continuity  of  embodied  condi- 
tions suffers  no  interruption.  All  rise  at  death 
into  a  higher  stage  of  being,  with  higher 
capacities  for  every  kind  of  spiritual  experi- 
ence, whether  joyful  or  painful.  "  The  un- 
just" as  well  as  "  the  just"  are  destined  to 
resurrection.  And  yet  it  cannot  be  the  same 
for  both.  If  Paul  has  to  labour  "  to  attain 
unto  the  Resurrection  ,"  it  is  clear  that  those  who 
do  not  labour  do  not  attain.  Their  resurrec- 
tion is  simply  destitute  of  whatever  they  have 
not  laboured  for.  They  rise  from  the  dead  into 
being,  but  not  well-heing — into  a  life  that  is 
not  life  in  fulness  of  power  and  of  joy.  Their 
Besurrection-life  cannot  be  well-heing,  for  all 
well-being  comes  through  struggle,  and  they 
have  not  struggled  for  spiritual  well-being. 
They  have  sowed  no  seed  of  Christly  en- 
deavour ;  but  "  whatsoever  a  man  soioeth  that 
[only]  shall  he  also  reap."  (Gal.  vi.  7.)  Their 
future  life  cannot  possibly  be  better  than  a 
state  of  privation,  corresponding  to  whatever 

7 


98  BEYOND  THE   SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

neglect  produced  the  privation.  If  this  is  all 
we  can  be  sure  of,  this  is  enough  for  any 
thoughtful  mind.  Gross  exaggerations  and  wild 
fancies  have  invested  the  mysterious  future 
with  many  imaginations,  both  bright  and  dark, 
that  thinking  men  may  leave  to  the  poets,  and 
the  painters,  and  to  the  ranters  also.  But  we 
may  be  absolutely  certain  of  so  much  as  this. 
"Where  no  moral  and  spiritual  effort  has  been 
invested  in  the  future,  whether  that  future  be 
in  this  life  or  in  any  other,  there  can  be  no 
gain,  no  future  income  of  moral  and  spiritual 
power  and  joy  and  peace  in  perfectness  of 
life. 

How  then,  0  Paul,  shall  we  strive  with  you, 
that  we  may  attain  with  you  unto  the  Eesur- 
rection  of  the  dead? 

Listen  to  his  answer  : — "  What  things  were 
gain  to  me,  these  have  I  counted  loss  for  Christ. 
Yea  verily,  and  I  count  all  things  to  he  loss  for 
the  excellency  of  the  knowledge  of  Christ  Jesus 
my  Lord :  for  whom  I  suffered  the  loss  of  all 
things,  and  do  count  them  but  dung,  that  I  may 
gain  Christ" 

Is  there  any  other  way  in  which  we  may 
obtain  a  place  among  those  whom  Christ  calls 
" worthy  to  attain  to  that  world  and  the  Besurrec- 
tion  from  the  dead"  except  the  Christly  life  of 


IV.]  ANASTASIS  AND  EXANASTASIS.  99 

humble  endeavour  after  holiness  in  fellowship 
with  the  Father  revealed  through  Christ  ?  This 
only  brings  the  spirit  to  the  ripeness  of  its  bud 
here.  This  only  will  unfold  out  of  that  bud  the 
flower  of  the  Christian  Kesurrection. 
If  we  see  the  way,  let  us  walk  therein. 


NOTE   A. 

ANASTASIS   AND   EXANASTASIS. 


The  word  which  Paul  uses  in  avowing  his  effort  to 
"  attain  unto  the  Resurrection  "  is  a  noteworthy  word,  ex- 
anastasis,  the  solitary  instance  in  which  this  word  ap- 
pears in  the  New  Testament  for  the  usual  word,  anas- 
tasis.  It  is  a  pregnant  word.  It  signifies  not  merely 
resurrection,  but  resurrection  from  or  out  of,  implying 
an  emergence  from  a  condition  in  which  others  may  re- 
main. It  thus  sets  forth  in  a  single  emphatic  term  the 
idea  which,  to  intensify  the  whole  expression,  is  conveyed 
also  by  the  added  words,  "from  the  dead." 

The  New  Testament  regularly  uses  the  phrase  "  resur- 
rection of  the  dead  "  as  a  general  expression  of  the  fact 
that  the  dead  rise.  But  it  is  noteworthy  that  Christ,  in 
speaking  of  those  i(who  shall  be  accounted  ivorthy  to 
attain  to  the  Resurrection"  phrases  it  as  "  Resurrection 
(anastasis)  from  the  dead,"  thus  expressing  the  same 
idea  which  Paul  sets  forth  in  his  more  intense  "  exanas- 
tasis  from  the  dead,"  the  same  idea  which  is  involved 
in  the  word  "  worthy"— &  precedence  of  some  over 
others.  How  this  use  of  words  agrees  with  the  idea  of 
the  Kesurrection  as  the  prize  of  Christian  endeavour,  is 
readily  seen. 


747373 


ic 


100  BEYOND  THE   SHADOW.        [CHAP.  IV. 

NOTE  B. 

AUGUSTINE'S    VIEWS    OF    FUTURE    PUNISHMENT. 

It  is  worth  while  to  compare  with  the  ideas  of  future 
punishment  which  have  prevailed  alike  among  Koman 
Catholics  and  Protestants,  the  views  entertained  on  that 
subject  by  the  Church  teacher  of  the  primitive  period, 
whom  both  Catholics  and  Protestants  agree  in  honour- 
ing, and  whom  Protestants  hold  in  special  regard  as  the 
spiritual  ancestor  of  the  Eeformers. 

In  Augustine's  view  "  eternal  death  is  a  subsidence 
into  a  lower  form  of  life,  a  lapse  into  an  inferior  mode  of 
existence,  a  privation  of  the  highest  vital  influx  from  God 
in  order  to  everlasting  life,  or  supreme  beatitude,  but  not 
of  all  vital  influx,  in  order  to  an  endless  existence,  which 

is  a  partial  and  incomplete  participation  in  good 

There  is  no  trace  [in  A.'s  writings]  of  the  idea  that  God 
hates  a  portion  of  His  creatures  with  an  absolute,  infinite, 
and  eternal  hatred,  and  is  hated  with  a  perfect  and 
eternally   enduring   hatred  by   them  in  return,   to   the 

utmost  extent  of  their  capacity There  is  no  trace 

of  the  idea  that  God  has  withdrawn  Himself  from  a  por- 
tion of  His  creatures,  except  so  far  as  to  retain  them  in 
existence,  ....  that  those  who  die  in  sin  lose  all  that  is 
good  in  their  nature  and  all  good  of  existence  become 
completely  evil,  and  continue  to  grow  everlastingly  in  the 
direction  of  an  infinite  wickedness,  which  merits  a  corre- 
sponding degree  of  pain.  On  the  contrary,  St.  Augustine 
teaches  that  God  preserves  in  endless  existence  those 
creatures  who  have  forfeited  their  capacity  of  attaining  to 
the  supreme  good,  because  of  the  good  of  which  they  are 

still  capable However  great  then*  suffering  from 

the  pain  of  loss  or  the  pain  of  sense  may  be,  according  to 
the  doctrine  of  St.  Augustine  it  cannot  be  such  throughout 
eternity  as  to  destroy  the  good  of  existence,  and  make  it 
a  pure,  unmitigated,  penal  evil  to  live  for  ever."     (From 

rownson's  Quarterly  Iievieiv,  July,  1863.) 


CHAPTEK  V. 

THE  COMING  OF  CHBIST  IN  HIS 
KINGDOM  A  BEALITY  OF  THE 
PAST,  THE  PEE  SENT,  AND  THE 
FUTURE. 


\ 


CHAPTEB  V. 

THE  COMING  OF  CHRIST  IN  HIS  KINGDOM  A 
REALITY  OF  THE  PAST,  THE  PRESENT, 
AND   THE    FUTURE. 

"  Verily  I  say  unto  you,  There  be  some  of  them  that  stand  here, 
which  shall  in  no  wise  taste  of  death,  till  they  see  the  Son  of  man 
coming  in  His  kingdom." — Matt.  xvi.  28. 

I.  Eighteen  hundred  years  have  passed 
since  the  last  of  a  long  series  of  herald  voices 
died  upon  the  air,  and  transferred  its  burden 
to  the  written  page.  For  a  thousand  years  a 
succession  of  such  heralds  had  announced  the 
coming  of  a  kingdom  of  righteousness  and  a 
King  of  glory.  For  a  thousand  years  previous, 
and  still  further  back,  further  than  we  can 
exactly  date,  a  succession  of  other  heralds, 
only  with  vision  less  clear,  and  voices  less 
distinct,  had  been  heard  bidding  men  look  for 
blessing  to  One  who  was  to  come  in  a  chosen 
family  line.  Such  is  the  strain  of  hope  which 
fills  the  Bible  from  beginning  to  end  with  an 
expectation  growing  more  intense  as  the  ages 


104  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP, 

roll  by,  till,  in  the  closing  portions  of  the  New 
Testament,  men's  eyes  seem  straining  to  catch 
the  first  ray  of  a  rising  sun,  and  the  last 
sentence  of  the  sacred  volume  seems  to  con- 
centrate in  one  breath  the  hope  of  all  the  gene- 
rations : — "Amen:  come,  Lord  Jesus." 

That  last  cry  of  the  heralds  was  uttered 
eighteen  hundred  years  ago.  Then  the  era  of 
prophecy  closed  its  record  of  thousands  of 
years.  Why  ?  Was  it  not  because  the  era  of 
its  fulfilment  had  begun?  The  sudden  dis- 
appearance of  this  long  stream  of  prophecy 
was  either  because  the  river  had  found  the  sea 
toward  which  it  had  bent  its  way,  or  else, 
because,  deprived  of  an  outlet  by  impenetrable 
barriers,  it  had  stagnated  in  some  Sahara 
waste,  to  disappear  amid  the  sand. 

"When,  however,  we  say  that  the  era  of  fulfil- 
ment began  when  the  era  of  prophecy  ended, 
we  must  be  content  to  assign  no  larger  a 
meaning  to  that  word  began  than  history  shall 
justify.  The  Kingdom  is  represented  by  the 
parable  of  the  growing  seed,  in  which  there  is 
a  flourishing  reality  before  there  is  ripeness. 
(Mark  iv.  26—29.) 

II.  Beside  that  long-gone  ending  of  the  flow 
of  prophecy  that  we  have  noticed,  we  must 
now  put  one  other  significant    fact,  namely  : 


V.]  THE   COMING   OF   THE   KING.  105 

just  before  the  stream  disappeared,  the  herald 
voices  were  most  clear  and  frequent  in  declar- 
ing the  fulfilment  to  be  close  at  hand. 

Christ,  who  certainly  did  not  in  any  way 
manifest  Himself  as  a  king  before  His  death  (if 
we  except  the  procession  on  Palm  Sunday, 
and  His  conversation  with  Pilate),  uttered  this 
unmistakable  prophecy  of  the  nearness  of  a 
decisive  manifestation  : — "  Verily,  I  say  unto 
you,  There  be  some  of  them  that  stand  here, 
which  shall  in  no  wise  taste  of  death,  till  they 
see  the  Son  of  man  coming  in  His  kingdom." 
(Matt.  xvi.  28.) 

With  equal  explicitness  and  still  greater 
particularity  of  detail,  He  reiterates  it  in  His 
elaborate  prophecy  of  the  impending  distresses 
of  Judea  and  the  fall  of  Jerusalem.  After 
dwelling  upon  the  miseries  of  that  period  He 
goes  right  on  to  say  : — "  But  immediately,  after 
the  tribulation  of  those  days,  the  sun  shall  be 
darkened,  and  the  moon  shall  not  give  her  light,  ■ 
and  the  stars  shall  fall  from  heaven,  and  the 
powers  of  the  heavens  shall  be  shaken  :  and 
then  shall  appear  the  sign  of  the  Son  of  man 
in  heaven  :  and  then  shall  all  the  tribes  of  the 
earth  mourn,  and  they  shall  see  the  Son  of 
man  coming  on  the  clouds  of  heaven  with  power 
and  great  glory.     And  He  shall  send  forth  His 


10G  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

angels  ivith  a  great  sound  of  a  trumpet,  and 
they  shall  gather  together  His  elect  from  the 
four  toinds,  from  one  end  of  heaven  to  the 
other."     (Matt.  xxiv.  29—31.) 

Observe  here  the  decisive  word,  "  imme- 
diately after  the  tribulation  of  these  days.'" 
This  "  immediately  "  has  been  strangely 
ignored,  and  merely  for  the  reason  that  the 
wonders  in  sun,  moon,  and  stars,  clouds  of 
glory,  and  hosts  of  trumpeting  angels,  have  not 
yet  been  seen  in  the  sky.  But  what  if  the  sky 
be  not  the  place  to  look  for  the  signs  which 
the  Lord  gave  ?  What  if  His  words  were  not 
intended  to  direct  us  to  search  the  heavens  of 
astronomy  and  meteorology  for  the  signs  of  a 
spiritual  epoch  ?  May  it  not  be  wiser  to  think 
thus,  than  to  ignore  such  a  word  as  this  "  im- 
mediately "  ?  Especially  when  our  Lord  goes 
right  on  to  add  this  other  note  of  the  nearness 
of  the  time: — "  Verily,  I  say  unto  you,  This 
generation  shall  not  pass  atvay,  till  all  these 
things  be  accomplished." 

What  Christ  meant  by  this  high-wrought 
description  of  the  signs  of  His  coming,  we 
shall  see  by-and-by.  For  the  present,  let  us 
notice  that  He  coupled  with  what  He  said  of 
His  coming  such  terms  as  "  immediately  "  and 
"this  generation." 


V.]  THE    COMING   OF   THE   KING.  107 

With  such  words  as  these  to  kindle  their  ex- 
pectations, the  Apostles  and  the  whole  Church 
of  the  first  generation  lived  in  a  constant  ex- 
pectation of  the  speedy  coming  of  their  Lord 
in  His  kingdom  and  glory.  No  one  has 
failed  to  note  the  fact  that,  in  the  Apostolic 
Epistles,  the  Day  of  Christy  the  Day  of  the 
Lord's  Appearing,  seems  very  near.  The 
great  hope  of  the  first  disciples  was,  that 
they  might  live  to  see  the  day  and  share  its 
glory. 

But  the  herald  Apostles,  though,  like  Moses, 
they  saw  the  land  of  promise  from  afar,  and 
described  its  glory,  like  Moses  were  not  suf- 
fered to  pass  over  across  the  dividing  stream. 
One  by  one  they  perished  under  the  stroke  of 
martyrdom — all  save  that  one  who  lived  far 
into  the  succeeding  period  in  fulfilment  of  the 
word,  "  If  I  will  that  he  tarry  till  I  come.'''' 
They  died,  and  left  no  successors  to  their  hope 
of  the  Lord's  immediate  coming.  The  Church 
of  the  next  generation,  with  a  lower  spiritual 
temperature,  both  misconceiving  the  nature  of 
the  Lord's  kingdom,  and  misinterpreting  the 
Lord's  signs  of  His  coming,  with  the  spiritual 
eye  shut  to  much  that  it  might  have  seen,  and 
the  sensuous  eye  tired  of  gazing  into  a  vacant 
sky,  gradually  remitted  this  glorious  Apostolic 


108  BEYOND    TIIE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

hope  to  the  limbo  of  uncertain  expectations. 
And  these  things  followed  : — 

(1.)  The  Church  began  to  look  away  to  the 
indefinite  future,  and  to  expect  now  one  and 
now  another  catastrophe  as  the  day  of  the 
Lord's  appearing  to  make  an  "  end  of  all 
things,'"  as,  for  instance,  at  the  fall  of  the 
Konian  Empire,  or  at  the  completion  of  a 
thousand  years  of  the  Christian  era. 

(2.)  Many  pious  and  learned  men  have  held 
that  the  Apostles  were  mistaken.  Many 
sceptics  have  held  that  Jesus  was  mistaken. 
It  would  seem  almost  certain  that  there  was  a 
mistake  somewhere.  We  may  find  reason  to 
judge  that  the  Apostles  were  right  in  their 
hope  of  the  Lord's  coming,  as  a  near  fact,  but 
wrong  in  their  opinion  of  the  manner  in  which 
the  fact  was  to  be  accomplished.  We  may 
find  reason  to  think  that  the  Church  has  been 
mistaken  in  thinking  of  the  Lord's  coming 
after  the  sensuous  manner  of  the  Jews,  rather 
than  after  the  spiritual  manner  of  the  kingdom 
of  God. 

(3.)  Ignorant  and  unspiritual  people  have 
taken  to  predicting  a  time  when  the  Lord  shall 
come  with  outward  show,  until  that  most 
glorious    hope   of    the    New    Testament,    the 


V.]  THE    COMING   OF   THE   KING.  109 

Kingly  Advent  of  our  Lord,  has  furnished,  in 
the  name  of  "  Adventist,"  a  term  which  to 
most  persons  suggests  a  somewhat  visionary 
way  of  thinking.* 

III.  To  the  facts  already  stated,  the  long 
flow  of  prophecy,  the  sudden  cessation  of  its 
stream,  the  declarations  of  our  Lord  that  His 
coming  and  His  kingdom  were  at  hand,  let  us 
add  now  this  other  fact,  namely  : — 

The  chief  power  in  the  living  world  to-day 
is  visibly  exercised  by  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ, 
visibly,  that  is,  if  not  to  our  senses,  at  least  to 
an  open-eyed  intelligence.  Not  without  con- 
tradiction and  antagonism,  indeed,  but  yet 
gradually  overruling  contradiction  and  an- 
tagonism. What  is  called  Fenianism  in  Ireland 
is  subject  to  the  throne  it  hates.  Despite  of 
barbarism  in  Mississippi  and  in  Africa, 
Mormonism  in  Utah,  and  Islamism  in  the 
Orient,  Nihilism  in  Kussia,  and  various  forms 
of  Atheism  elsewhere,  the  actual  supremacy  of 
the  Lord  Jesus  Christ  in  this  present  world  is 

#  The  Adventist  delusion  will  live,  as  error  always  lives,  on 
the  half-truth  that  is  mixed  with  it,  until  the  truth  which  gives 
currency  and  vitality  to  the  error  has  full  justice  done  to  it  by 
more  discerning  minds.  It  is  the  mangling  which  some  truths 
have  received  inside  the  pale  of  orthodoxy,  to  which  is  due  the 
sincere,  however  misguided  and  one-sided,  protest  of  many  a 
creed  which  is  called  heresy  and  delusion. 


110  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

attested  to  one  who  reflects  on  the  following 
facts,  namely :  — 

(1.)  Though  the  nominally  Christian  part  of 
the  world's  population  is  far  the  smallest  part, 
yet  the  ruling  powers  of  the  world  are  the 
nominally  Christian  nations.  Thus  a  handful 
of  Englishmen  rule  Hindostan. 

(2.)  Though  the  really  Christian  part  of 
Christendom  is  far  the  smaller  part  of  nominal 
Christendom,  yet  the  moral  supremacy  of 
Chistendom  is  in  really  Christian  hands.  By 
this  is  meant,  not  that  most  of  the  acknow- 
ledged rulers  of  Christendom  are  real  Christians, 
but  this,  rather  :  That  no  law  or  institution  is 
either  unchallenged  or  permanently  tolerated 
in  Christendom,  after  those  among  whom  it 
exists  perceive  it  to  be  in  conflict  with  the 
commandments  of  Christ.  Whenever  such  a 
conflict  is  perceived,  directly  the  moral  senti- 
ment of  Christianity  begins  to  train  against 
the  evil  an  artillery  which  at  length  levels  it 
to  the  ground.  The  attack  may  be,  and  often 
is,  begun  by  a  solitary  Eeformer,  but  his 
derided  solo  grows  to  a  resistless  chorus-cry, 
amid  which  the  citadel  of  the  evil  falls.  And 
so  Christ  has  long  been  giving  law  to  the 
nations,  as  the  Hebrew  prophets  foretold. 
(Isa.  ii.  2,  3  ;  Mic  iv.  1,  2.) 


V.]  THE    COMING   OF   THE    KING.  Ill 

(3.)  Whatever  abuses  remain,  whatever  de- 
fects appear,  the  obvious  tendency,  among  the 
ruling  nations  of  the  world,  is  to  realise  with 
increasing  completeness  the  supremacy  of  the 
Christian  ideas,  as  expressed  in  the  precepts 
and  example  of  Christ.  How  evidently,  for  in- 
stance, the  conviction  is  gaining  ground  that 
the  supreme  moral  force  is  not  fear  but  love ! 
And  thus  the  world  is  by  degrees  being  made 
new.* 

(4.)  Among  the  inferior  nations,  which, 
though  not  Christian,  are  subordinated  to  the 
Christian  powers,  there  is  a  constant  diffusion 
of  Christian  ideas.  Whatever  missionaries 
have  not  yet  accomplished,  they  have  certainly 

*  It  used  to  be  supposed  that  when  the  world  was  first  made, 
it  was  all  made  at  once  to  assume  its  present  form ;  that  the 
living  world  came  into  existence  as  it  now  appears,  with  an  in- 
stantaneous completeness,  as  though  the  plants  and  animals,  in 
their  several  "days,"  had  been  struck  out  each  with  a  die.  Now 
we  know  that  the  world  and  everything  in  it  came  into  its 
present  appearance  by  a  very  gradual  process  of  formation  and 
change.  It  has  also  been  supposed  that  the  world  would  be 
made  new  all  at  once.  But  the  new  making,  "  the  regeneration" 
(Matt.  xix.  28, — see  Note  A,  at  the  end  of  this  chapter),  is,  like 
the  first  making,  a  very  gradual  process  of  change  under  the 
persistent  action  of  the  forces  of  spiritual  development.  When 
we  read,  "  The  Son  of  man  shall  send  forth  His  angels,  and  they 
shall  gather  out  of  His  kingdom  all  things  that  cause  stumbling" 
(Matt.  xiii.  41),  we  must  reckon  among  these  "angels"  all 
powers  and  influences  that  work  for  His  kingdom  in  the  sup- 
pression of  anti-Christian  principles  and  practices.  And  history 
shows  that  these  are  going  down  and  out,  surely  j  but  how 
slowly,  our  impatience  often  testifies. 


112  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

planted  Christian  schools  and  colleges  in  great 
numbers  through  the  non-Christian  world. 
What  future  ascendency  of  Christian  influence 
in  that  portion  of  the  world  this  points  to,  one 
may  easily  conjecture. 

This  is  no  rose-coloured  view.  The  unsub- 
dued evils  press  heavily  on  our  hearts.  Many 
"  tilings  that  cause  stumbling  "  remain  to  be 
cast  out.  But  facts  that  cannot  be  questioned 
declare  Christ  to  be  note  King  in  the  existing 
world.  The  most  potent  personal  name  to- 
day is  His  name.  The  ascendant  influence  to- 
day is  His  influence.  No  law  or  institution  is 
unchallenged  that  is  deemed  inconsistent  with 
His  law.  A  process  of  judgment  and  overthrow 
is  seen  working  in  His  interest  around  the  world 
for  the  suppression  of  evils.  The  whole  move- 
ment of  the  world  tends  toward  a  better  subjec- 
tion to  the  moral  supremacy  of  Christ.  There 
is  no  more  reason  for  doubting  that  Christ  has 
already  begun  to  reign  in  His  kingdom,  because 
some  things  remain  to  be  cast  out,  and  other 
things  to  be  set  in  order,  than  there  is  for 
doubting  that  God  is  the  Maker  and  Sovereign 
of  the  world,  because  of  the  abundant  evil  that 
still  appears  in  it. 

It  would  seem,  therefore,  that  a  fair  survey  of 
facts  must  recognise  as   now  in  progress  the 


V.]  THE   COMING  OF  THE   KINO.  113 

expansion  of  that  kingdom  which  our  Lord, 
in  beginning  His  earthly  ministry,  announced 
as  near.  (Matt.  iv.  17.)  The  picture  is  before 
our  eyes.  The  outlines  are  not  yet  all  filled 
up.  There  are  gaps  in  the  foreground,  and 
gaps  in  the  background,  which  the  pencil  of 
history  has  yet  to  fill.  But  the  outlines,  at 
least,  are  there,  corresponding  to  the  shadow 
which  prophecy  cast  upon  the  blank  canvas 
more  than  two  thousand  years  ago.  Thus 
wrote  Isaiah  (xlii.  1 — 4)  : — "  Behold  My  ser~ 
va?it,  whom,  I  uphold  ;  Mine  elect,  in  whom 
My  soul  delighteth ;  I  have  put  My  Spirit 
upon  Him :  He  shall  bring  forth  judgment  to 
the  Gentiles.  He  shall  not  cry,  nor  lift  up, 
nor  cause  His  voice  to  be  heard  in  the  street. 
A  bruised  reed  shall  He  not  break,  and  the 
smoking  flax  shall  He  not  quench:  He  shall 
bring  forth  judgment  unto  truth.  He  shall 
not  fail  nor  be  discouraged,  till  He  have  set 
judgment  in  the  earth  :  and  the  isles  shall 
wait  for  His  law." 

Thus  the  facts  of  the  present  moral  dominion 
of  Christ  correspond  to  the  prophecies  of  Isaiah 
and  Micah,  that  to  the  nations  "  the  law  shall 
go  forth  from  Zion,  and  the  word  of  the  Lord 
from  Jerusalem  ";  for  manifestly  that  was  the 
point  whence  "  the  royal  law  "  of  Christ  issued 

8 


114  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

forth  upon  its  great  career.    (Isa.  ii.  2  ;   Mic. 
iv.  1,  2.) 

Evidently,  the  world  reveals  to  our  intelli- 
gence, as  a  now  existing  fact,  a  spiritual  king- 
dom and  Christ  its  King.  This  has  had  a  pro- 
gressive growth,  according  to  that  Divine  law 
of  development,  "from  the  least  to  the  greatest," 
which  everywhere  operates.  It  has  also,  of 
course,  had  its  beginning.  In  this  beginning 
we  cannot  expect  that  it  will  be  as  plainly  re- 
cognisable as  in  its  more  advanced  stages.  We 
must  not  be  disappointed,  if  we  do  not  find  it 
beginning  in  full  strength  and  completeness. 
But  when,  nevertheless,  did  it  begin  ?  This  is 
not  in  itself  a  very  important  question.  It  is 
made  important  only  by  the  fact  that  the  begin- 
ning is  denied.  Many  shut  their  eyes  to  the 
fact  that  the  kingdom  is  nowhere,  because  they 
find  no  record  of  any  such  beginning  as  they 
conceive  there  should  have  been,  when  the  Son 
of  man  came  in  His  kingdom  to  "  sit  on  the 
throne  of  His  glory.'''  (Matt.  xxv.  31.)  Having 
searched  the  past  in  vain  for  falling  stars, 
darkened  sun  and  moon,  and  angelic  hosts, 
they  say,  the  Son  of  man  has  not  come,  the 
Apostles  were  mistaken,  and  even  Jesus  was 
in  error. 


V.]  THE    COMING   OF   THE    KING.  115 

IV.  We  are  therefore  compelled  to  inquire 
about  the  beginning  of  the  Kingdom. 

Specially,  we  must  ask  what  our  Lord  meant 
by  the  signs  of  His  coming,  as  described  in 
Matt.  xxiv.  29 — 31.  Here  we  must  rigidly 
apply  the  principle,  that  the  signs  must  be  of 
the  same  nature  as  the  Kingdom.  If  the  King- 
dom belongs  to  the  sphere  of  the  senses,  the 
signs  will  ;  otherwise  not.  If  the  Kingdom 
is  spiritual,  the  signs  will  be  such  as  appeal 
to  intelligence  rather  than  to  sense.  It  is  not 
reasonable  to  look  for  disturbances  in  the  solar 
system  and  the  starry  universe  to  attest  the 
inauguration  of  a  new  spiritual  epoch.  It  is 
not  reasonable  to  think  that  Christ  meant 
that  eclipses  and  clouds  of  vapour  and  visible 
angels,  blowing  audible  trumpets,  were  to  be 
signs  of  His  assuming  a  spiritual  throne. 

(1.)  Why,  then,  did  He  speak  in  such 
terms  ? 

To  answer,  we  must  remember  that  the  one 
book  of  the  Jewish  people  was  the  Old  Testa- 
ment. The  disciples  knew  that  book  well. 
Our  Lord  borrows  His  vivid  language  about 
the  signs  of  His  coming  from  the  familiar 
imagery  of  the  ancient  prophets.  In  these,  the 
extinction  of  the  civil  and  religious  luminaries 


116  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

of  society,  in  the  destruction  of  institutions 
and  the  overthrow  of  priests  and  kings, 
is  pictured  as  the  darkening  or  extinction  of 
sun,  moon,  and  stars.  Witness  a  specimen  of 
such  language  in  Isaiah's  prophecy  of  the  fall 
of  Babylon : — "  Behold,  the  day  of  the  Lord 
cometh,  to  lay  the  land  desolate.  .  .  .  For 
the  stars  of  heaven  and  the  constellations 
thereof  shall  not  give  their  light  :  the  sun 
shall  be  darkened  in  his  going  forth,  and  the 
moon  shall  not  cause  her  light  to  shine.'* 
(xiii.  9,  10.) 

Now  it  was  perfectly  appropriate  thus  to 
speak,  as  our  Lord  spoke,  to  hearers  whose 
sacred  Scriptures  had  used  such  a  mode  of 
speaking  about  any  great  change  in  the  social 
or  religious  order.*  For  an  event  was  at  hand, 
to  which  such  a  mode  of  speaking  was  even 
more  appropriate  than  to  the  quenching  of  the 
luminaries  of  old  Babylon  and  Egypt.  Before 
the  "generation"  passed  away  which  heard 
our  Lord  speak,  that  event  took  place,  as  He 
had  explicitly  foretold  (Matt.  xxiv.  34),  which 

*  Whether  our  Lord's  hearers  understood  His  references  to 
signs  in  the  heavens  literally  (as  I  think  pro  cable),  or  not,  tho 
fact  remains,  that  their  Holy  Scriptures  were  in  their  hands, 
with  those  records  of  fulfilled  prophecy  that  had  been  uttered  in 
the  same  terms,  and];therefore  ought  noc  to  have  been  taken 
literally  by  the  intelligent  hearer  or  reader. 


V.]  THE   COMING   OF   THE   KING.  117 

was  necessary  to  the  establishment  of  His 
Kingdom,  and  to  the  manifestation  of  Himself 
as  the  moral  King  of  men. 

(2.)  What,  now,  was  that  event  ? 

To  answer,  we  must  remember  that  Chris- 
tianity first  appeared  to  the  world  as  a  new 
variety  of  Judaism,  a  Jewish  sect.  Jesus 
was  a  Jew.  His  Apostles  were  Jews.  Their 
first  converts  were  Jews,  who  continued  to 
adhere  to  the  laws  of  Moses,  and  endea- 
voured to  make  all  converts  from  other 
nations  conform,  and  expected  that  the  whole 
religious  world  would  continue  to  look  to  Jeru- 
salem and  the  Temple  as  its  centre.  The 
Epistles  of  Paul  resound  with  the  conflict 
between  the  conservative  party,  who  strove  to 
put  the  "  new  wine "  of  Christianity  into  the 
"old  bottles  "  of  Judaism,  and  the  radical  party, 
headed  by  Paul,  who  insisted  on  "  new  bottles," 
and  went  so  far  as  to  abolish  the  Mosaic  sab- 
bath, and  the  Abrahamic  sacrament  of  circum- 
cision. But  so  long  as  the  Levitical  priesthood 
offered  sacrifice  on  the  spot  consecrated  for  a 
thousand  years  by  the  ritual  of  Moses,  so  long 
was  the  claim  of  Paul  to  be  subject  only  to  the 
law  of  Christ,  disputed  by  an  appeal  to  the 
Divine  authority  of  the  institutions  which  held 
their  vantage-ground  on  the  Temple  mountain. 


118  BEYOND    THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

From  that  vantage-ground  they  must  be  dis- 
lodged. The  logic  of  some  such  event  as  the 
demolition  of  the  visible  centre  and  symbol  of 
the  outworn  dispensation  was  needed  to  re- 
inforce the  arguments  of  Paul,  that  circum- 
cision was  "  nothing"  and  the  seventh  day 
sabbath  but  "  a  shadow  of  the  things  to  come." 
Only  when  that  ancient  altar  was  overthrown, 
and  "Moses'  seat"  displaced,  could  Christianity 
be  fully  extricated  from  the  Jewish  matrix  in 
which  it  had  been  formed,  and  manifest  itself 
to  the  world  unencumbered  with  obsolete 
claims,  and  owning  only  Christ  as  supreme. 
Thus  essential  to  establish  the  sole  spiritual 
supremacy  of  Christ  was  the  great  event,  in 
which  our  Lord  foretold  that  His  kingly  coining 
should  be  made  manifest  within  the  lifetime  of 
some  of  His  hearers.  It  took  place  in  the  destruc- 
tion of  Jerusalem  (a.d.  70),  the  demolition  of  the 
Temple,  the  extinction  of  the  luminaries — sun, 
moon,  and  stars — of  the  Jewish  firmament,  the 
sweeping  away  of  the  nation.  Then,  as  foretold, 
appeared  "  the  sign  of  the  Son  of  man  in  heaven" 
for  the  Cross  rose  as  the  Temple  fell.  Then 
began  "  all  the  tribes  of  the  earth  "  to  "mourn" 
for  then  began  to  be  manifested  the  Lord's 
judgment  work,  that  goes  on  still  in  the  sweeping 
away  of  obstructions  to  the   progress   of  His 


V.]  THE   COMING  OF   THE   KING.  119 

Kingdom,  with  all  who  cling  to  them  and  insist 
on  maintaining  them.  Then  men  might  have 
seen — whether  or  no  they  understood  what  they 
saw — "  the  Son  of  man  coming  on  the  clouds  of 
heaven  with  power  and  great  glory  ,"  over- 
shadowingly,  irresistibly,  triumphantly  coming 
amid  the  cloudy  troubles  of  that  stormy  and 
tempestuous  time.  Then  began  the  "angels" 
of  the  Son  of  man,  "  with  a  great  sound  of  a 
trumpet,'"  to  gather  "His  elect  from  the  four 
winds  of  heaven  "ion  the  heralds  of  "  the  Gospel 
of  the  Kingdom  "  were  heard,  trumpet-tongued, 
with  augmenting  power,  in  all  quarters  of  the 
world.  Then  began  His  saying  to  be  fulfilled  : 
"  Then  if  any  man  shall  say  unto  you,  ho,  here 
is  the  Christ,  or,  Here  ;  believe  it  not  For  as 
the  lightning  cometh  forth  from  the  east,  and 
is  seen  even  unto  the  west;  so  shall  be  the 
coining  of  the  Son  of  man."  No  local,  but  a 
world-wide  coming  was  His  to  be,  as  the 
whole  hemisphere  is  illuminated  by  the  elec- 
tric flash. 

The  principle  on  which  we  must  hold  this  to 
be  the  only  reasonable  explanation  of  the  terms 
in  which  our  Lord  gave  the  signs  of  His  coming 
in  His  kingdom  is  this  :  That  when  an  event  is 
taking  place  in  the  spiritual  realm  of  ideas,  the 
indications  and  signs  must  be  such  as  appeal 


120  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CIIAI?- 

to  the  perception  of  thought,  rather  than  to  the 
perception  of  sense. 

One  may  say,  indeed  :  Was  not  the  fall  of  the 
Jewish  temple  an  event  in  the  physical  world, 
just  as  much  as  the  fall  of  stars  ?  Yes ;  and 
so  also  was  the  appearance  of  the  Man  Christ 
Jesus  among  men  an  event  in  the  physical 
world.  But  such  events,  though  they  must  be 
in  the  physical  world  in  order  to  be  recognised 
at  all,  belong  rather  to  the  ideal  world.  Their 
value  and  significance  lie  not  so  much  in  the 
things  which  eyes  can  see,  as  in  the  things 
vhich  eyes  cannot  see.  Their  appeal  is  more 
to  our  intellectual  and  moral  intelligence  than 
to  our  senses.  The  Jewish  institutions  repre- 
sented certain  religious  ideas.  Their  fall  was 
the  fall  of  those  ideas,  betokening  a  change  and 
an  era  in  the  spiritual  realm  of  thought  and 
feeling,  of  which  the  fall  of  stars  could  have 
betokened  nothing.  All  of  Christ's  teaching 
went  in  this  direction, — to  turn  men's  minds 
from  the  outward  to  the  inward  view  of  things, 
from  the  "flesh"  to  the  "  spirit"  "  It  is  the 
spirit  that  quickeneth  ;  the  flesh  proflteth 
nothing ;  the  words  that  I  have  spoken  unto  you 
are  spirit,  and  are  life."     (John  vi.  63.) 

Unless  we  think  it  fit  to  estimate  events  by 
their  outward  show  and  noise  more   than  by 


V.]  THE   COMING   OF  THE   KING.  121 

their  weight  as   causes  in  the  ideal  world  of 
thought  and  spirit,  we  cannot  fai]  to  recognise 
the  overthrow  of  that  city  and  temple,  which 
stood  as  the  centre  and  the  symbol  of  an  obso- 
lete order  of  things  opposing  the  establishment 
of  Christ's  supremacy,  as  the  date,  so  far  as  ice 
need  a  date,  of  the  manifestation  of  Christ's 
enthronement    as   the  spiritual   King   of    the 
living  world.     Thus,  we  reckon  the  years  of 
the  American  Union  from  the  Declaration  of 
Independence,  although  that  Declaration  had 
to  be  made  good   by  years  of  war,  and    the 
national  life  had  to  linger  on  through  years  of 
suspense  till  the  subsequent  formation  of  the 
Constitution   of  the   "more    perfect    Union." 
Thus  the  newly-inaugurated  Kingdom  had  its 
era  of  struggle  through   persecution,    and  its 
period  of  suspense,  when  it  seemed  a  question 
whether  it  might  not  come  to  nought.     So  the 
morning  sun  often    mounts    through  battling 
clouds  which  are  not  burnt   away  till   noon. 
But   we    consider   that    the    day   begins   with 
sunrise. 

Our  Lord  then,  as  I  consider,  has  come,  be- 
cause He  is  here.  Not  here  in  a  spiritual  pre- 
sence of  which  there  is  no  sign,  but  here  in  a 
plainly  recognisable  presence,  His  name  the 
reigning  name,   His  influence  the    ascendant 


122  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

influence  His  thought  the  dominant  thought  in 
the  world  we  live  in.  The  word  our  Lord  applies 
to  His  coming — Paeousia — (irapovcrLa)  signifies, 
in  strictness,  Peesence.  His  coming  was  a 
coming  in  order  to  be  present,  a  coming  to 
stay.  The  Christian  period,  now  nearly  1,900 
years  in  progress,  is  the  period  of  our  Lord's 
recognised  presence  in  the  world,  with  increas- 
ing manifestation  of  His  spiritual  power  as 
King  and  Judge  of  men. 

Christ's  presence-period  in  this  world  is 
parallel  (as  will  be  explained  in  Chapter  viii.) 
with  the  Resurrection-period  in  the  next  world. 
Conformably  to  this  view,  we  find  the  New 
Testament  constantly  associating  the  two  ideas 
of  the  coming  of  the  Lord  and  the  Resurrection. 
The  idea  of  Judgment  is  also  linked  closely  with 
these  two.  So  far  or  so  near  as  is  the  Judg- 
ment, so  far  or  so  near  is  also  the  Resurrection. 
Here,  then,  we  must  inquire  next  into  this  also, 
whether  the  Judgment,  which  the  popular  mind 
relegates  to  the  end  of  time,  and  with  it  the 
Resurrection,  is  not  rather  a  thing  of  the  pre- 
sent, like  the  coming  and  presence  of  the  Lord 
as  our  King. 

V.  Before  entering,  however,  on  this  next 
chapter  of  our  inquiry,  one  may  ask  at  this 
point :  Must  we,  then,  give  up  the  traditional 


V.J  THE    COMING   OF   THE    KING.  123 

idea  of  a  Christ  to  come  with  clouds,  in 
dazzling  light,  begirt  with  hosts  of  angels, 
amid  the  attendant  terrors  of  earth's  final 
catastrophe?  It  seems  to  me  that  we  must. 
The  sayings  of  our  Lord,  which  have  been 
thought  to  foretell  such  an  event,  being  found 
to  carry  quite  another  meaning,  there  is  no 
further  ground  on  which  to  hold  to  the  tradi- 
tional notion  of  the  second  advent.*  That 
notion  is  a  thoroughly  Jewish  one,  and  has  no 
place  in  a  thoroughly  Christian  way  of  thinking 
upon  the  Kingdom  of  heaven.  More,  however, 
will  require  to  be  said  of  this  subsequently,  as 
other  passages  of  the  New  Testament  shall 
come  up  for  examination.  For  the  present, 
what  has  now  been  said  clears  the  doctrine  of 
the  Resurrection  from  any  supposed  necessity 
of  delay,  in  order  to  take  place  at  the  coming 
of  the  Lord,  as  at  an  hour  that  is  not  yet 
struck.  For  the  future,  we  may  rely  only  on 
the  progressive  character  of  the  Kingdom  of 
our  Lord. 

To  think  of  Christ  as  coming  by-and-by  in 
outward  displays  to  the  senses  to  set  up  His 
Kingdom  upon  earth,  is  not  intelligent,  because 
it  ignores  the  testimony  of  intelligent  observa- 
tion in  the  present  and  the  past,  which  affirms 

*  See  Note  C,  at  the  end  of  this  chapter. 


124  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

that  Kingdom  to  be  a  now  existing  fact,  and 
a  now  expanding  power.  To  expect  that 
Christ  will  by-and-by  manifest  Himself  as 
King  in  this  world,  in  a  bodily  form,  and  in 
&  special  locality  as  the  centre  of  His  Kingdom, 
is  not  intelligent,  because  it  ignores  the  spiri- 
tual method  of  His  rule,  and  expects  the  move- 
ment of  His  Kingdom  to  change  from  that  of 
an  inwardly  developing  life  to  that  of  an  out- 
ward mechanism.  Quite  otherwise  we  learn 
from  the  parable  of  the  leaven,  illustrating  the 
continuity  with  which  the  renovating  power 
works  within  the  world,  "  till  the  tohole  is 
leavened."  As  Paul  wrote  to  the  Galatians 
(iii.  3),  "  having  begun  in  the  spirit  "  it  is 
foolish  to  expect  to  be  "perfected  in  the  flesh." 
The  manner  of  our  Lord's  Kingdom  hitherto 
will  doubtless  be  its  manner  henceforward.  I 
say,  its  manner,  not  its  measure.  Its  measure 
is  no  less  than  the  unknown  possibilities  of  an 
unbounded  progress. 

Believing  this,  while  believing  with  the 
fullest  confidence  that  the  Son  of  man  has 
come  in  His  kingly  glory,  and  longing  for 
larger  disclosures  of  His  glory  as  "  Lord  of 
all"  we  still  join  in  the  prayer  of  the  first 
disciples:  "  Thy  kingdom  come." 


V.]  "  THE  EEGENEKATION."  12'; 


NOTE  A. 

ON    "THE    REGENERATION.  * 

And  Jesus  said  unto  them,  Verily  I  say  unto  yow, 
That  yeivhich  have  followed  Me, in  the  regeneration  ivhen- 
the  Son  of  man  shall  sit  on  the  throne  of  His  glory,  ye  also 
shall  sit  upon  twelve  thrones,  judging  the  twelve  tribes, 
of  Israel.     (Matt.  xix.  28.) 

This  puzzling  passage  becomes  full  of  light  when  set  in 
the  view  now  taken,  namely,  that  the  Son  of  man  has 
come  in  His  kingdom,  and  is  ruling  the  world  as  King 
with  a  constantly  extending  sway,  and  is  making  the  world 
new  (that  is,  renovating  or  "  regenerating  "  it),  not  all  at 
once,  but  by  a  continuously  advancing  process  of  change 
for  the  better. 

Premising  here,  simply,  that  the  word  which  our  version 
renders  "regeneration"  {palingenesia)  is  generally  ac- 
cepted as  denoting  a  restored  and  renovated  condition  of 
the  world,  in  a  moral  point  of  view,  attention  needs  to  be 
called  here  mainly  to  this  point,  namely,  that,  according 
to  our  Lord's  prophecy,  this  renovation,  or  regeneration, 
whenever  it  is  displayed  to  view,  will  be  signalised  by 
a  certain  enthronement  of  the  disciples  and  their 
Master. 

If  now  we  should  find  the  disciples  already  enthroned 
in  any  such  way  as  to  exhibit  to  us  an  adequate  fulfilment 
of  the  portion  of  this  prophecy  which  relates  to  them,  such 
a  fact  would  go  to  demonstrate  that  the  enthronement  of 
their  Master  had  also  taken  place.  For  the  two  are  declared 
to  be  coincident.  "When  the  Son  of  man  shall  sit  on  the 
throne  of  His  glory,  ye  also  shall  sit  upon  twelve  thrones'* 
etc.  Now  such  an  enthronement  of  the  disciples  has,  be- 
yond a  doubt,  actually  come  to  pass,  as  we  shall  see.  Sj 
far  as  we  recognise  this,  we  must  recognise,  as  a  fact 


12G  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

inseparable  from  it,  that  the  Son  of  man  also  now  "sits 
en  the  throne  of  His  glory." 

How  the  disciples  understood  the  prophecy  is  not  of 
much  consequence.  In  all  probability  they  at  first  mis- 
understood it.  They  grasped  it  mechanically,  no  doubt, 
anticipating  that  they  were  to  occupy  visible  judgment - 
seats,  as  being,  so  to  speak,  associate  justices  with  their 
Master  in  a  grand  court  presided  over  by  Him  in  bodily 
presence,  as  Judge-in-chief.  The  same  misunderstanding 
probably  dominates  the  minds  of  most  who  read  this 
passage  to-day. 

And  yet  our  Lord's  words  have  received  a  spiritual  fulfil- 
ment far  surpassing  in  its  grandeur  all  such  mechanical 
anticipations. 

The  twelve  tribes  of  the  Christian  Israel,  the  whole 
Church,  all  its  schisms  notwithstanding,has  for  ages  looked 
up  to  the  Apostles  as  occupants  of  such  judgment-thrones 
as  our  Lord's  promise  assigned  them.  The  Apostles  have 
been,  through  their  writings,  the  judges  of  the  Christian 
world,  the  expounders  of  Christ's  law.  Every  heresy  has 
been  cited  before  them  for  trial.  Every  controversy  re- 
specting Church  order  or  Christian  doctrine  has  been 
carried  up  to  them  for  decision.  The  sentences  which 
they  have  been  regarded  as  pronouncing  have  been  reve- 
rently claimed  to  be  decisive,  and  have  been  accepted 
as  the  judgment  of  the  Lord  Himself,  delivered  through 
them. 

"What  accomplishment  of  that  prophecy  could  be  grander 
than  an  historical  fact  like  this — the  spectacle  of  those 
Apostles,  despised  and  rejected  by  the  world  in  their  day, 
but  for  ages  enjoying  this  spiritual  enthronement  with 
their  Lord,  century  after  century  regulating  Christian  life, 
reforming  Christian  thought,  directing  spiritual  progress 
as  the  immortal  arbiters  of  truth  ? 

If  our  Lord  did  not  mean  just  this,  one  thing  is  certain. 
We  cannot  conceive  a  grander  fulfilment  of  His  words. 


V.]  "  THE   EEGENEEATION."  127 

We  can  think  of  one  with  more  show  and  noise,  but  not 
of  one  possessing  essentially  greater  majesty. 

But  whatever  fulfilment  we  recognise  here  in  the  case 
of  the  Apostles  we  have  to  recognise  also  in  the  case  of 
Christ.  The  same  glance  by  which  we  recognise  their 
present  undoubted  spiritual  enthronement  includes  also, 
above  them,  the  throne  of  the  glory  of  the  Son  of  man,  in 
this  "  regeneration  "  or  renovated  world.  If  it  cannot  be 
denied  that  the  Apostles  now  sit  on  these  spiritual  thrones 
of  judgment,  no  more  can  it  be  doubted  that  He  also  now 
sits  with  them  and  above  them;  that  His  voice  is  heard 
giving  judgment,  as  well  as  theirs.  The  fulfilment  of  this 
prophecy  has  therefore  taken  place;  that  is,  it  has  begun 
its  fulfilment.  The  event — "  wlien  the  Son  of  man  shall 
sit  on  the  throne  of  His  glory  " — spoken  of,  let  it  be  ob- 
served, in  the  same  words,  both  in  this  text  and  in  that 
other  text  which  is  commonly  understood  to  refer  to  a 
Judgment  at  the  end  of  time  (Matt.  xxv.  31),  has  come  to 
pass.     For  this  last,  see  Chapter  vii. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  the  correctness  of  this  view  of  the 
enthronement  of  the  Apostles  as  already  fulfilled,  that 
the  "  thrones  "  of  Philip,  Andrew,  Thomas,  and  all  of 
"  the  tivelve,"  should  be  as  recognisably  filled  as  those  of 
Peter,  John,  and  other  Apostles  whose  presence  is  still 
before  the  world.  A  similar  case  of  a  numerical  discrep- 
ancy between  the  terms  of  a  prophecy  and  its  fulfilment 
appears  in  Christ's  saying  that  the  Son  of  man  should  be 
"  three  days  and  three  nights  in  the  heart  of  the  earth  " 
(Matt.  xii.  40),  whereas  the  body  of  Jesus  lay  in  the 
grave  but  two  nights  and  one  day.  The  Scriptures  refer 
to  the  apostolic  body  by  numerical  terms  that  are  used 
without  exactness;  e.g.,  "the  eleven"  (Luke  xxiv.  33), 
when  only  ten  were  present ;  "  the  tivelve  "  (1  Cor.  xv.  5), 
when  there  were  but  eleven  in  all.  So  also  Paul  speaks 
(Acts  xxvi.  7)  of  "  our  twelve  tribes  "  in  a  sense  which 
could  be  true  only  of  a  spiritual  quorum-.    Such  a  quorum 


128  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

of  the  twelve  is  all  that  is  necessary  to  see  enthroned,  in 
order  to  recognise  the  substantial  fulfilment  of  that  pro- 
phecy concerning  them. 

More  will  be  said  on  this  subject  of  Judgment  in  the  next 
chapter.  Only  let  it  here  be  noticed,  that  when  we  speak 
of  this  prophecy  as  fulfilled,  we  mean  that  it  has  hegun  to 
be  fulfilled.  More  strictly,  it  is  fulfilling.  "  The  regene- 
ration," with  its  parallel  processes  of  judgment,  is  now 
going  on,  not  yet  complete.  Doubtless,  there  is  far  more 
to  come.  But  it  is  to  come  after  the  same  manner.  It  is 
not  intelligent  to  expect  that  the  manner  will  change 
from  that  of  spiritual  poiver  to  that  of  outward  form. 


NOTE  B. 

ON  THE   JUDGMENT   OF   THE   WORLD   BY  THE   SAINTS. 

Know  ye  not  that  the  saints  shall  judge  the  ivorld  ? 

(1  Cor.  vi.  2.) 

The  principle  of  interpretation  developed  in  the  fore- 
going Note  elucidates  this  somewhat  enigmatical  saying 
of  Paul,  as  well  as  that  which  follows  it  about  the  judg- 
ment of  [ungodly]  angels.  The  saints  have  thus  far 
judged  the  world.  The  historical  spread  and  present 
prevalence  of  Christianity  declare,  with  a  steadily  grow- 
ing consensus,  the  verdict  of  time  upon  the  age-long  trial 
ofthe  spirit  of  the  world  by  the  spirit  of  Christ  as  mani- 
fested in  His  true  saints. 

We  see  this  judgment  of  the  world  still  going  on.  On 
missionary  ground,  Christianity  and  Mohammedanism, 
Christianity  and  Heathenism  are  still  engaged  in  this  trial 
by  comparison  of  the  spirit  and  the  life  characteristic  of 
each.  It  is  by  the  spirit  and  life  of  its  confessors,  more 
than  by  the  eloquence  or  logic  of  its  preachers,  whether 
in  the  first  century  or  the  nineteenth,  whether  in  nominal 
Christendom  or  in  actual  Heathendom,  that  Christianity 


V.]  JUDGMENT  BY  THE    SAINTS.  129 

gradually  gains  the  verdict,  and  pronounces  condemna- 
tion on  its  rivals  and  opposers.  Only  the  saints  can  judge 
the  world. 

It  is  of  small  consequence  to  debate  what  idea  Paul 
may  have  attached  to  the  words  in  which  he  states  the 
fact.  It  is  of  great  consequence  to  contemplate  the  fact 
as  one  of  the  eternal  and  necessary  verities.  As  real  and 
significant  as  any  judgment  to  come  is  the  present  judg- 
ment that  we  are  all  either  exercising  or  suffering, 
according  to  the  spirit  we  are  of.  One  of  the  constant 
and  inevitable  realities  of  life  is  this  judgment  of  the 
world  by  the  saints. 

It  is  judgment  in  the  spirit  and  by  the  spirit,  not  in 
external  show  and  form,  however  its  consequences  may 
appear  externally.  It  is  the  age-long  fulfilment  of  our 
Lord's  saying,  that  the  Holy  Spirit,  when  come,  "  will 
convict  the  ivorld"  (John  xvi.  8.)  The  holy  and  loving 
spirit  of  Christ,  as  manifested  in  holy  and  loving  lives,  is 
ever  silently  but  convincingly  judging  the  impure  and 
selfish  spirit  of  Anti-Christ,  as  manifested  in  unclean  and 
covetous  lives.  The  results  of  this  Judgment  are  manifest 
in  the  passing  of  one  evil  after  another  under  the  ban  of 
the  society  which  is  progressively  leavened  by  the  Chris- 
tian spirit. 

The  saints  not  only  do,  but  must  judge  the  world. 
The  life  ruled  by  the  Holy  Spirit  inevitably  at  length 
carries  with  it  the  conscience  of  mankind,  and,  in  the 
court  of  conscience,  condemns  by  sharp  though  silent 
contrast  the  life  ruled  by  the  worldly  spirit.  The  damning 
contrast  into  which  the  fraud,  and  greed,  and  lust  of  the 
world  are  necessarily  thrown  by  the  truth,  and  charity, 
and  purity  of  the  saintly  life  is  thus  ever  illustrating  the 
present  fulfilment  of  the  word  of  our  Lord :  "Now  is  the 
judgment  of  this  world;  noiu  shall  the  prince  of  this 
ivorld  be  cast  out."     (John  xii.  31.) 

Thus  all  unsought,  and  often  unconsciously  exercised 

9 


130  BEYOND  THE   SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

but  ever  glorious  is  the  prerogative  of  the  saintly  life  over 
all  lower  lives  in  the  judgment  of  the  spirit, 

•'For  such  is  the  mysterious  might 

God  grants  the  upright  soul, 
A  deed,  a  word,  our  careless  rest, 

A  simple  thought,  a  common  feeling, 
If  He  he  present  in  the  breast, 

Has  from  Him  powers  of  healing." 

In  contrast  with  this  view  of  the  subject,  see  in 
Note  B,  appended  to  Chapter  vi.,  the  traditional  Juda- 
istic  view,  as  presented  in  the  Presbyterian  Catechism, 
Q.  and  A.  90. 


NOTE  C. 

ON  THE  ANGELS'   PROPHECY   OF   CHRIST'S   COMING. 

And  while  they  were  looking  steadfastly  into  heaven 
as  He  went,  behold,  two  men  stood  by  them  in  white 
apparel ;  which  also  said,  Ye  men  of  Galilee,  why  stand 
ye  looking  into  heaven  ?  this  Jesus,  which  was  received 
up  from  you  into  heaven,  shall  so  come  in  like  manner 
as  ye  beheld  Him  going  into  heaven.     (Acts  i.  10,  11.) 

The  augels'  saying  has  been  generally  regarded  as  a 
plain  prophecy  of  a  coming  within  the  sphere  of  the 
senses.  It  would  very  naturally  be  so  miderstood  by 
those  who  heard  the  angels  speak.  Especially  would 
it  be  so  understood  by  minds  imbued,  as  the  minds  of 
the  Apostles  were,  with  the  ideas,  current  among  their 
countrymen,  of  a  coming  of  the  Messiah  in  gloiy  out- 
wardly displayed.  And  as  their  eyes  had  seen  Him  go, 
naturally  they  would  think  their  eyes  should  see  Him 
come.  And  yet,  mark,  it  is  not  said,  "  Ye  shall  sec  Him 
come  ''  ;  only,  "  He  shall  (or  will)  come.'"  The  seeing, 
or  the  recognisableness,  of  His  coming,  is  at  most  only 


V.]        THE  ANGELS'  PROPHECY.        131 

an  inference  from  what  the  angels  said,  however  clear 
and  legitimate  the  inference  be. 

It  is  written,  however,  "  Shall  so  come  in  like 
manner."  There  are  several  other  passages  in  which 
the  words  (by  rp6irov — lion  trojpom)  nere  translated  "in 
like  manner  as "  occur,  but  only  here  are  they  so 
rendered.  In  Matt,  xxiii.  37,  Luke  xiii.  34,  they  are 
rendered  "  even  as."  In  Acts  vii.  28,  they  are  rendered 
"  as."  In  2  Tim.  hi.  8,  "  like  as."  In  all  these  passages 
every  one  will  see  that  the  idea  presented  is  that  of  a  real 
resemblance,  but  not  a  formal  resemblance.  Jannes 
and  Jambres  opposing  Moses  with  magical  enchantments, 
and  heretical  teachers  opposing  the  Apostles  with  false 
doctrines,  present  a  real  resemblance  under  very  dis- 
similar forms ;  but  the  real  likeness  of  the  two  cases  is 
expressed  in  the  original  by  the  words  which  compare 
Christ's  coming  to  His  going,  here  redundantly  translated, 
11  in  like  manner  as."  This  idea  of  a  real  resemblance 
is  intensified,  in  the  angels'*  prophecy,  by  one  added  word, 
"so" — "shall  so  come,"  etc.  This  word,  however,  does 
not  change  the  idea,  does  not  import  that  the  resemblance 
is  formal  as  well  as  real ;  it  only  emphasises  the  fact  that 
it  is  real. 

Thus,  indeed,  it  has  been  generally  understood.  What- 
ever conceptions  of  the  second  advent  have  been  held, 
nothing  is  plainer  than  the  fact,  that  the  words  "so,  in 
like  manner"  have  been  generally  construed  freely,  not 
strictly,  to  signify  a  like  reality,  not  a  like  manner.  The 
going  was  secluded,  private,  noiseless,  without  outward 
sign  of  change,  save  in  the  ascending  motion,  the  mere 
rising  and  vanishing  of  a  familiar  human  form  in  the  air. 
Nothing  could  be  more  unlike  this  going,  in  manner,  than 
such  a  coming  as  is  pictured  :'n  the  traditional  expecta- 
tions of  the  second  advent,  with  clouds,  angels,  fire,  judg- 
ment terrors,  and  Divine  glories. 

Evidently  the   Church   has  consistently  regarded  the 


132  BEYOND    THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

prophetic  "so  in  like  manner"  as  a  declaration,  not  of 
the  strict  manner  of  the  coming,  but  of  its  reality,  and  its 
recognisableness. 

The  Lord  had  really  gone.  He  would  so  come  (as 
really)  as  they  had  seen  Him  go.  Thus  the  angels  pro- 
phesied, and  thus  the  Church  has  understood,  besides 
finding  here  an  implication,  additionally,  that  this  real 
coming  would  also  be  a  recognisable  coming. 

The  mistake  has  been  in  thinking  and  affirming  that 
the  recognisableness  of  the  coming  would  be  within  the 
sphere  of  the  senses.  In  this  expectation  the  Church,  as 
a  whole,  still  cleaves  to  the  old  Jewish  notion  of  a 
Messianic  display  of  glory  and  power  in  the  visible  sky 
and  in  the  world  of  external  forms.  Christians  still 
deserve  the  angels'  expostulation,  "  Why  stand  ye  looking 
into  heaven  ?  "  Look  upon  the  world  with  a  more 
thoughtful  insight  into  spiritual  facts,  and  see  that  the 
Lord  has  come. 

Here  the  reader  must  be  content  with  a  simple  refer- 
ence to  fuller  discussions  than  present  limits  permit,  such 
as  "  The  Parousia,"  by  Dr.  Warren,  or  my  short  "  Essay 
upon  the  Gospel  of  Matthew.'* 

The  reality  of  our  Lord's  coming  is  recognisable  by  a 
clear-eyed  spiritual  intelligence,  intent  upon  the  facts  and 
methods  of  His  growing  kingdom  of  the  Spirit  in  the 
world.  A  Christian,  as  distinct  from  a  Jewish,  method  of 
interpreting  prophecy,  discerns  that  He  has  come,  that 
He  is  coming  still,  in  clearer,  stronger,  grander  manifesta- 
tions of  His  spiritual  sovereignty  over  men ;  and  that 
He  is  still  to  come, — not  by  catastrophe  but  by  develop- 
ment,— in  His  consummate  and  universally  recognised 
glory  as  the  Spiritual  Head  of  our  race.  Thus  His 
presence  (parousia)  in  a  growing  influence  is  a  perpetual 
fact  through  all  the  Christian  centuries,  an  age-long  reign 
in  a  continually  ascending  supremacy,  "  till  He  hath  put 
all  His  enemies  under  His  feet." 


v.]  "at  "  Christ's  coming.  133 

NOTE  D. 

ON   THE   RESURRECTION   AT   CHRIST'S   COMING. 

For  as  in  Adam  all  die,  so  also  in  Christ  shall  all  be 
made  alive.  But  each  in  his  own  order :  Christ  the 
first-fruits ;  then  they  that  are  Christ's,  at  His  coming. 
(1  Cor.  xv.  22,  23.) 

This  is  a  specimen  passage  of  a  number  in  which  the 
Resurrection  is  closely  associated  with  the  coming  of  Christ. 
One  word  in  it,  however,  demands  special  attention  before 
its  full  scope  is  examined. 

The  word  here  translated  "at"  (eV)  means  either  at  or 
in.  It  depends  wholly  on  the  translator's  notion  of  the 
word  it  stands  with,  whether  to  say  at  or  in.  If  the 
coming  of  Christ  is  a  single  event,  like  sunrise,  we  may 
say  "  at  His  coming.'''  But  if  it  be  a  coming  that  ad- 
vances and  matures  through  a  period  until  a  consumma- 
tion, we  may  say  in,  or  during,  His  coming.  In  the  same 
way,  as  will  be  shown  subsequently  (Chapter  viii.),  where 
our  translators  (as  in  John  vi.  40)  say  "at  the  last  day," 
because  of  their  notion  of  that  "  day  "  as  a  day  in  the  same 
sense  that  Easter  day  is  a  day,  we,  thinking  of  that  day 
as  a  period,  like  the  days  of  creation,  say  "  in  the  last 
day." 

It  has  been  shown  in  the  foregoing  chapter  that  Christ's 
coming  is  more  than  a  simple  and  instantaneous  advent ; 
it  is  a  progressively  manifested  coming  to  be  continually 
present  in  the  world  as  its  spiritual  King,  a  coming  and 
presence,  &s  the  original  word  " parousia"  means.  We 
regard  it,  therefore,  not  as  a  simple  event,  at  which 
another  event  may  occur,  but  as  the  period  of  an  age-long 
development  of  the  growing  power  and  glory  of  Him  who 
has  come  to  be  "  with  us  alway,  even  unto  the  end  " 
(Matt,  xxviii.  20),  the  period  in  which  His  Resurrection- 
power  is  made  manifest.     Instead,  therefore,  of  thinking 


134  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

of  those  who  are  Christ's  being  raised  to  life  at  a  time 
■when  an  instantaneous  advent  gives  the  signal,  we  are  to 
think  of  them  as  rising  into  life  in  and  throughout  the 
ivhole  period,  during  which  the  Gospel-power  makes  His 
presence  known.  More  of  this  is  said  in  Chapters  viii. 
and  ix. 

The  question  has  been  raised,  whether  this  prophecy  of 
the  Eesurrection  of  Life  is  limited  or  unlimited — whether 
all  who  "  die  in  Adam  "  are  to  be  "  made  alive  in  Christ" 
The  language  of  verse  22  is  absolutely  unlimited  in  terms, 
— "in  Adam  all,  in  Christ  all"  The  whole  argument,  it 
is  true,  runs  from  verse  12  onward,  wholly  in  the  line  of 
the  Christian  hope,  which  had  been  shaken  by  denials  of 
the  Eesurrection.  This  is  held  to  limit  the  "  all."  But 
the  Christian  hope  is  not  a  selfish  one;  "not  for  us 
only,  but  for  the  whole  world"  says  John  (1,  ii.  2). 
"  God,"  says  Paul,  "  is  the  Saviour  of  all  men,  specially 
of  them  that  believe  "  (1  Tim.  iv.  10),  and  "  willeth  that 
all  men  should  be  saved"  (1  Tim.  ii.  4).  In  this  "all" 
therefore,  the  Christian  hope,  toward  which  the  whole 
argument  runs,  must  include  the  greatest  number  pos- 
sible. It  may  be  said,  however,  that  the  Apostle's  subse- 
quent expression,  "  they  that  are  Christ's,  at  His  coming," 
shows  that  he  was  thinking  only  of  Christians  when  he 
said,  just  before,  that  "  in  Christ  shall  all  be  made  alive." 
This  is  not  to  the  point.  For,  of  course,  in  his  view  no 
one  could  be  made  alive  in  Christ  without  becoming  a 
Christian. 

But,  limiting  the  "  all"  as  the  scope  of  the  argument 
for  the  Christian  hope  requires,  and  granting  that  verse 
22  means  that  "as  in  Adam  all  who  are  Adamic  die,  so 
in  Christ  shall  all  who  are  Christ's  be  made  alive  ;"  the 
very  nature  of  the  Christian  hope,  as  a  hope  for  mankind, 
raises  this  question  :  "Whether  the  Christians  made  alive 
in  Christ  are  only  the  Christians  of  this  ivorld, — how 
many  of  the  vast  multitude  who  go  into  the  future  world 


V.]  "  AT  "  CHRIST'S    COMING.  135 

utterly  ignorant  of  Christ  and  of  His  Gospel  may  bo  em- 
braced in  this  ultimate  hope  of  life  in  Christ. 

"  The  assumption  that  the  doom  of  each  and  all,  in  the 
moment  of  physical  death,  is  irrevocably  fixed,  is  the 
assumption  of  the  extremest  fatalism.  From  the  finite 
conceptions  of  men  it  derives  its  moulds  and  measures 
for  the  Divine  love,  and  in  the  courses  of  human  thought 
it  is  formed  on  pessimism  in  alliance  with  dualism/' — 
Mulford:  ''The  Eepublic  of  God." 

It  would  be  hard  to  say  what  was  in  Paul's  mind  upon 
this  subject,  were  this  the  only  passage  in  which  he  has 
come  near  this  deeply  interesting  question.  There  are, 
however,  three  other  passages,  in  which  he  speaks  more 
positively,  namely  : — 

(1.)  "  That  in  the  name  of  Jesus  every  Tcnee  should  bow, 
of  things  in  heaven,  and  things  in  earth,  and  tilings  under 
the  earth  [that  is,  in  the  regions  of  the  dead] ,  and  that 
every  tongue  should  confess  that  Jesus  Christ  is  Lord,  tc 
the  glory  of  God  the  Father."  (Phil.  ii.  10,  11.) 

(2.)  "  For  it  was  the  good  pleasure  of  the  Father  that  in 
Him  should  all  the  fulness  dwell ;  and  through  Him  to 
reconcile  all  things  unto  Himself,  having  made  peace 
through  the  blood  of  His  cross;  through  Him,  I  say, 
whether  things  upon  the  earth,  or  things  in  the  heavens.'* 
(Col.  i.  19,  20.) 

(3.)  "  Unto  a  dispensation  of  the  fulness  of  the  times, 
to  sum  up  all  things  in  Christ,  the  things  in  the  heavens, 
and  the  things  upon  the  earth."     (Eph.  i.  10.) 

These  three  great  prophecies  speak  unqualifiedly  of  an 
ultimate  reconciliation  to  God  of  whatever  shall  ulti- 
mately exist.  "  All  existences  "  is  the  close  equivalent  of 
the  term  "  all  things"  for  which  the  Greek  employs  no 
substantive,  as  "  things,"  but  uses  only  a  plural  adjective, 
signifying  being  in  general.  "Whatever  additional  light  the 
passage  before  us  in  1  Cor.  can  receive,  must  be  sought 
from  these  three. 


136  BEYOND   THE   SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

To  estimate  fairly  the  force  of  these  four  separate 
prophecies,  all  unqualified  as  the  Apostle  utters  thern,  I 
ask :  Would  many  an  orthodox  preacher,  discoursing  now 
upon  the  ultimate  extent  of  Christ's  salvation,  think  he 
had  sufficiently  guarded  the  doctrine,  if  he  should  simply 
paraphrase  Paul's  words  in  these  four  texts, — if  he  should 
abstain  from  adding  at  least  a  cautionary  word  or  two  to 
intimate  to  his  hearers  that  the  redemption  would  never- 
theless not  ultimately  include  all  then  in  existence, — if 
he  should  fail,  at  least,  to  hint  that  even  then  the  dark 
prison-house  of  endless  despair  would  include  vast  multi- 
tudes of  impenitent  souls  ?  Judged  by  certain  standards 
of  the  modern,  if  not  of  the  Biblical,  sort,  Paul's  omission 
to  "  cover  "  that  point  is  remarkable.  And  it  is  also  re- 
markable that  nowhere  else,  in  all  that  he  has  written, 
does  he  cover  it.  Was  it  then,  in  his  view,  a  real  point 
to  cover  ? 

The  impression  which  the  three  texts  last  quoted 
naturally  make  upon  the  ordinary  reader  is  fairly  reflected 
in  the  remarks  made  upon  the  second  of  the  three  by  two 
commentators  of  orthodox  sentiments  and  of  the  highest 
learning. 

Dr.  H.  A.  W.  Meyer:  "The  only  right  sense  is,  thus, 
that  through  Christ  the  whole  universe  shall  be  reconciled 
with  God." 

Bishop  Ellicott  :  "  It  does  say  that  the  eternal  and 
incarnate  Son  is  the  causa  medians  by  which  the 
absolute  totality  of  created  things  shall  be  restored  into 
its  primal  harmony  with  its  Creator — more  than  this  it 
does  not  say,  and  where  God  is  silent  it  is  not  for  man 
to  speak." 

Nevertheless,  the  most  universal  terms,  the  most 
sweeping  statements,  are  always  tacitly  understood  to 
be  subject  to  such  necessary  limitations  as  the  nature  of 
the  case  imposes.  Thus,  in  saying  that  God  can  do  any- 
thing, we  do  not  mean  to  say  that  He  can  do  what  is 


v.]  "at"  cheist's  COMING.  137 

wrong  or  inconsistent.  So  in  the  present  instance,  the 
comprehensive  "  all"  must  be  taken  to  mean  all  who  are 
capable,  through  their  free  choice,  of  life  through  Christ. 
Such,  and  only  such,  will  come  into  the  number  of  "  those 
who  are  Christ's "  in  the  period  of  His  coming  and 
presence. 

Such  a  limitation  in  the  nature  of  things  Christ  seems 
to  hint  of  in  the  sin  which  is  forgiven  "  neither  in  this 
world  nor  in  that  which  is  to  come."  (Matt.  xii.  32.)  In- 
timations of  impossibilities  arising  from  the  condition  of 
the  spirit  itself  are  found  in  Christ's  strong  expressions, 
Ye  serpents,  ye  offspring  of  vipers,  etc.  (Matt,  xxiii.  33.) 
Free  will  has  play  hereafter,  but  the  laws  of  habit  and 
character  have  force  also.  "  All  shall  be  made  alive  " 
who  can  be,  is  the  utmost  that  can  be  concluded.  That 
all  can  be  is  the  hope  held  by  many,  but  a  hope  without 
any  positive  guarantee. 

Yet  the  Apostle  Paul  has  left  on  record  those  plain  pro- 
phecies that  there  shall  be  an  ultimate  and  final  recon- 
ciliation to  God  of  all  who  ultimately  exist.  This,  then, 
in  connection  with  the  statement  to  the  Corinthians* 
leads  to  the  inference  that  all  who  are  incapable  of  being 
"  made  alive  in  Christ"  will  have  ceased  to  exist  before 
the  end. 

Here  we  have  touched,  but  cannot  pursue,  the  sub- 
ject of  "  conditional  immortality  ,"  a  doctrine  at  present 
strongly  supported,  and  a  relief,  as  many  deem  it,  from 
the  contradiction  which  the  notion  of  an  endless  misery 
presents,  in  many  minds,  to  the  Christian  conception  of 
God. 


CIIAPTEK    VI. 

JUDGMENT    A     PBESENT    AND    FEB- 

PETUAL    BEALITY  IN  BOTH 

WOBLDS. 


CHAPTEE  VI. 

JUDGEMENT  A  PRESENT  AND  PERPETUAL  REALITY 
IN   BOTH  WORLDS. 

"  TJiis  is  He  which  is  ordained  of  God  to  be  the  Judge  of  quick 
and  dead." — Acts  x.  42. 

The  connection  in  which  the  ideas  of  Besur- 
rection  and  Judgment  stand  in  the  New 
Testament  requires  us  to  study  the  general 
subject  of  the  Divine  Judgment  for  the  sake  of 
relieving  the  subject  of  the  Kesurrection  of 
some  misconceptions  attached  to  it  by  miscon- 
ceptions on  the  subject  of  Judgment.  It  is 
popularly  supposed  that  there  must  be  a  delay 
of  Kesurrection  until  the  time  has  arrived  for 
the  yet  distant  Judgment  to  take  place.  But 
what  if  the  Judgment  is  not  distant  ?  What  if 
it  is  now  going  on  ?  What  if  it  is  to  go  on 
only  as  it  now  goes  ? 

The  thoughtful  reader  of  the  Bible  cannot 
fail  to  be  impressed  by  the  frequent  recurrence 
of  that  solemn  word  of  righteousness — Judg- 
ment.    The  New  Testament  unfolds  a  view  of 


142  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

future  Judgment  which  is  not  apparent  in  the 
Old.  But  that  revelation  of  the  present  Judg- 
ment which  is  so  prominent  in  the  Old  is 
obscured  in  the  New  through  a  traditional  mis- 
understanding, which  has  settled  on  many 
passages,  instances  of  which  were  exhibited  in 
Notes  A  and  B,  at  the  end  of  the  preceding 
chapter. 

The  certainty  of  Judgment  beyond  the  grave 
is  testified  by  reiterated  declarations  of  Christ 
and  His  Apostles.  What  the  Master  said  of 
the  "  Resurrection  of  Judgment"  the  disciples 
repeat  in  saying,  "  after  death,  Judgment" 
"  The  dead,  the  great  and  the  small,"  are  seen 
in  vision  standing  before  the  Judgment  throne. 
There  "we  must  all  be  made  manifest  before 
the  judgment-seat  of  Christ;  that  each  one  may 
receive  the  things  done  in  the  body,  according  to 
what  he  hath  done,  whether  it  be  good  or  bad." 
(2  Cor.  v.  10.) 

Such  testimonies,  distorted  by  misunder- 
standings which  we  are  soon  to  notice,  have 
created  a  way  of  thinking  on  this  subject, 
which  relegates  Judgment  to  the  other  side  of 
the  grave,  and  fails  to  recognise  it  duly  as  it  is 
proceeding  here,  according  to  our  Lord's  em- 
phatic declaration,  "  now  is  the  Judgment  of 
this   world"  (John  xii.   31.)     Judgment  goes 


VI.]         JUDGMENT  A  PRESENT  EEALITY.  143 

before  death  as  well  as  after.  "  After  death, 
Judgment.'"  (Heb.  ix.  27.)  No  man  by  dying 
gets  away  from  Judgment.  Nor  does  any  man 
have  to  wait  for  it  till  after  death. 

I.  But  w hat  is  Judgment  ?     It  is  : — 

(1.)  Experience  of  the  good  or  evil  results  ot 
the  course  we  take,  in  obeying  or  disobeying 
the  Divine  law. 

It  is  also  : — 

(2.)  A  revelation  in  each  man's  conscious- 
ness of  those  results  as  the  fruit  of  his  obedience 
or  disobedience  to  the  Divine  law. 

It  is  plain  that  the  first  of  these  may  exist 
without  the  second.  The  results  of  action 
cannot  fail  to  follow,  or  begin  to  follow,  im- 
mediately after  action.  The  man  who  per- 
petrates a  crime,  however  successfully,  suffers 
an  immediate  result  in  the  hardening  and  de- 
praving of  his  moral  nature,  and  this  result 
is,  essentially,  his  Judgment,  whether  it  be 
immediately  revealed  to  him  as  such,  or  not. 

It  is  also  plain  that  the  second  element  in 
Judgment  may  be  delayed  till  long  after  the 
first  has  begun.  The  transgressor  may  suc- 
cessfully blind  himself  to  his  condition,  as 
hardened,  depraved,  and  worsening.  In  other 
words,  he  is  simply  unconscious  of  the  work  of 
Judgment  that  is  actually  going  on  within  him, 


144  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

in  the  degradation  and  growing  ruin  of  his 
nature.  When  the  time  comes  for  this  to  flash 
upon  him,  and  consume  him  with  shame  and 
agony,  the  Judgment  of  which  he  then  becomes 
conscious  is  simply  a  revelation,*  or  discovery, 
of  the  Judgment  that  has  been  working  in  him 
since  his  evil  course  began.  The  time  of  that 
discovery  is  what  Paul  speaks  of  as  "  the  day 
of  wrath  and  revelation  of  the  righteous  judg- 
ment of  God."  (Kom.  ii.  5.)  The  discovery 
did  not  make  the  Judgment.  It  only  brought 
it  to  light  in  the  man's  consciousness. 

II.  But  where  is  Judgment  ?  Wherever  law 
is,  there  is  Judgment.  Judgment,  as  distinct 
from  the  consciousness  of  judgment,  is  simply 
the  experience  of  the  consequences  of  acting 
according  to  or  against  the  Divine  law.  As 
soon  as  a  transgressor  begins  to  break  the  thorn 
hedge  with  which  the  law  has  marked  and 
secured  the  right  way,  so  soon  the  retributive 
thorns  begin  to  tear.  The  great  catastrophe 
which  shakes  a  continent  when  human  slavery 
comes  to  a  bloody  end,  is  only  the  conspicuous 
climax  of  a  long  series  of  Judgment-evils, 
which  had  been  slowly  blighting  a  land  and 
barbarising  a  people.  The  unconsciousness  of 
those  who  were    hugging   the   curse  to  their 

*  See  Chapter  ix.  toward  the  close. 


VI.]         JUDGMENT  A  PRESENT  REALITY.  145 

bosoms,  and  blindly  glorying  in  its  stupefying 
illusions,  was  deemed  by  those  who  watched 
the  growth  of  the  cancer  as  one  of  the  very 
grimmest  in  all  the  train  of  Judgment-con- 
sequences. 

Judgment,  then,  is  as  eternal  and  as  con- 
stantly operative  as  is  law.  It  is,  in  fact,  the 
operation  of  law,  in  blessing  the  obedient,  and 
bringing  wrath  upon  the  disobedient.  From 
the  beginning  to  the  end  of  action  under  law, 
Judgment  follows  every  being  through  the 
universe  of  God,  wherever  law  extends. 

Thinking  in  this  way  upon  the  subject  of 
Judgment,  we  shall  avoid  the  mistakes  that 
ensue  upon  our  likening  the  Divine  Judgment  to 
a  human  court,  which  opens  at  a  certain  place 
and  time,  hears,  tries,  sentences,  and,  having 
gone  through  the  docket,  adjourns.  The  Divine 
judgment  never  waits  to  open  and  never  stands 
adjourned,  or,  asa"  last  judgment,"  comes  to 
an  end,  so  long  as  there  lives  a  created  being 
in  obedience  or  in  disobedience  to  the  law  of 
God.  Its  efficiency  is  as  conspicuous  in  the 
blessing  of  the  righteous  as  in  the  curse  of  the 
wicked ;  though  this  last  is  chiefly  thought  of 
among  sinners.  We  are  to  think  of  it  not  as 
an  event,  limited  to  a  specific  "  day,''  but  as  a 
process,  which  runs  its  course  throughout  the* 

10 


146  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

whole  existence  of  the  responsible  subjects  of 
law. 

.  What,  then,  must  we  understand  in  Paul's 
saying,  that  God  "  hath  appointed  a  day  in 
the  which  He  will  judge  the  world  in  right- 
eousness" ?  (Acts  xvii.  31.)  What  must  we 
understand  in  John's  saying,  that  he  saw 
"  the  dead,  the  great  and  the  small,  standing 
before  the  throne  "  t  (Rev.  xx.  12.)  We  must 
understand  that  "day  "  to  be  a  period  not  the 
same  as  that  from  sunrise  to  sunset.  We  must 
understand  that  "standing  before  the  throne"  to 
be  something  different  from  what  could  bo 
formally  delineated  in  a  picture.  John's  vision 
was  not  representative,  but  suggestive,  not  a 
mechanical  copy,  but  a  shadow  of  a  spiritual 
reality.  There  is  no  such  throne,  but  there  is 
a  real  Judgment,  of  which  the  throne  and  the 
standing  before  it  are  purely  imaginative  sym- 
bols and  shadows.  And  John's  vision  was 
simply  his  momentary  glimpse  of  an  eternal 
process.  He  had  it  at  the  end  of  a  series  of 
visions  relating  to  the  course  of  earthly  history. 
He  came  to  it  as  a  visitor  comes  to  the  last 
room  in  a  picture  gallery.  He  narrates  it  last 
in  the  order  of  the  things  he  saw.  But  the 
room  is  there  with  its  pictures  before  the 
visitor  comes,   and  after  he  goes.      And  thus 


VI.]         JUDGMENT  A  PEE  SENT   REALITY.  147 

the  Divine  Judgment  is  eternally  going  on,  as 
unintermitted  as  is  the  operation  of  the  law, 
that  "whatsoever  a  man  soiveth  that  shall  hc 
also  reap."  It  is,  in  fact,  nothing  but  the 
operation  of  that  law  in  bringing  consequences 
to  pass. 

Unless  we  bring  this  mode  of  thinking  to 
the  interpretation  of  the  Scripture  doctrine 
of  Judgment,  we  shall  reduce  the  spiritual  and 
eternal  processes  of  the  moral  universe  to  the 
mechanical  forms  of  such  a  Judgment  as  has 
been  painted  by  Michael  Angelo. 

III.  To  what  has  now  been  said  as  to  the 
true  mode  of  thinking  on  this  subject,  we 
must  add  careful  notice  of  some  special  points, 
namely : — 

(1.)  The  Scriptures  have  absolutely  nothing 
to  say  of  any  general  Judgment  of  mankind, 
collectively  to  occur  after  the  earthly  course  of 
things  is  run.  If  this  seems  to  any  reader  a 
startling  assertion,  he  will  do  well  to  look 
carefully  at  the  evidence,  for  it  is  unquestion- 
ably true. 

The  idea  of  a  Divine  Judgment  to  be  deferred 
to  "  the  end  of  the  world"  in  the  modern 
sense  of  that  phrase,  is  in  King  James's  ver- 
sion of  such  texts  as  Matt.  xiii.  40 — 42,  49,  50. 
But    the    marginal   reading    in   the    Kevised 


148  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

Version  puts  a  new  meaning  on  this  phraser 
especially  when  we  turn  to  the  text  and  margin 
at  Heb.  ix.  26,  and  find  it  used  to  denote 
the  time  of  a  past  event,  like  the  death  of 
Christ.  As  to  the  death  of  Christ,  we  can 
only  understand  "  the  end  of  the  ages,"  in 
which  it  took  place,  to  be  the  final  period  of 
Divine  Revelation,  regarded  as  the  end,  or  con- 
summation, of  the  preparatory  ages.  Unless 
some  sufficient  reason  can  be  found  for  assign- 
ing to  the  phrase  in  Matthew  an  entirely  dif- 
ferent sense  from  the  same  phrase  in  Hebrews, 
that  Judgment  "  at  the  end  of  the  world " 
turns  out  to  be  Judgment  in  a  period  of 
earthly  history  that  is  still  in  progress* 

The  passage  in  Matt.  xxv.  31 — 46,  supposed 
to  describe  "the  last  Judgment,"  requires  more 
extended  discussion,  which  will  occupy  the 
next  chapter. 

(2.)  The  Scriptures  represent  the  Kingdom  of 
Christ  as  a  period  of  Judgment. 

The  ancient  idea  of  sovereignty  combined  in 
one  person  those  functions  of  governing  and  of 
judging  which  modern  ideas  have  separated. 
The  ancient  kings  sat  on  judgment  seats  to  ad- 
minster  justice.  The  Old  Testament  prophecies 

*  See  my   "  Essay  on   the  Gospel  according  to  Matthew.'* 
W.  A.  Wilde  and  Co.,  Boston. 


VI.]          JUDGMENT   A   PEE  SENT   EEALITY.  149 

of  the  Kingdom  of  Christ  describe  Him  as 
coming  to  "judge  the  nations"  (Isa.  ii.  4),  and 
to  "  set  judgment  in  the  earth."  (Isa.  xlii.  4.) 
As  shown  in  the  preceding  chapter,  a  spiritual 
kingdom,  with  Christ  as  its  King,  is  an  existing 
fact  in  the  present  world.  So  far  as  He  is 
King,  He  is  also  Judge  of  men,  in  the  Biblical 
conception,  not  waiting  the  coming  of  the  end 
of  time  to  ascend  a  throne  of  Judgment,  but 
now  occupying  that  throne,  and  administering 
throughout  the  centuries  a  work  of  judgment. 
(See  Note  A,  at  the  end  of  the  preceding 
chapter.) 

The  New  Testament  exhibits  this  fact  in 
great  prominence.  While  it  extends  Christ's 
Judgment  work  beyond  the  grave,  in  telling  us 
that  we  must  be  made  manifest  before  Him 
to  receive  the  things  done  in  the  body,  it 
extends  this  Judgment  work  over  the  present 
also,  over  the  "  quick/'  or  living,  as  well  as  the 
dead.  (Acts  x.  42.)  This  is  Christ's  own  testi- 
mony to  Himself: — "For  neither  doth  the  Father 
judge  any  man,  but  He  hath  given  all  judgment 
unto  the  Son;*  that  all  may  honour  the  Son, 

*  A  very  profound  truth  is  here  touched  by  the  Evangelist, 
namely,  that,  in  the  nature  of  things,  if  we  are  to  feel  ourselves 
judged  by  God  at  all,  it  cannot  be  by  an  unknown  God,  but  only 
by  God  as  revealed;  that  is,  of  course,  by  God  as  revealed  in 
His  Son  Jesus  Christ. 


150  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

even  as  they  honour  the  Father."  (John  v.  22,  23.) 
The  reference  of  this  Judgment  to  present 
time  is  unquestionable,  since  it  is  a  present 
honour  that  all  are  to  yield,  as  to  a  present 
Judge.  This  judgeship  of  Christ  is  closely 
connected  with  His  coming  in  His  Kingdom. 
"  For  the  Son  of  Man  shall  come  in  the  glory  of 
His  Father  with  His  angels  ;  and  then  shall 
He  render  unto  every  man  according  to  his 
deeds.  Verily  I  say  unto  you,  There  be  some  of 
them  that  stand  here,  ivhich  shall  in  no  wise 
taste  of  death,  till  they  see  the  Son  of  man 
coming  in  His  kingdom"  (Matt.  xvi.  27,  28.) 

Whatever  cause  we  have  thus  far  found  to 
think  that  the  Son  of  Man  has  come  in  His 
Kingdom,will  incline  us  to  think  that  His  Judg- 
ment-seat has  already  been  erected  in  the  world. 

(3.)  A  survey  of  the  period  of  Christianity, 
thus  far,  reveals  a  work  of  Judgment  as 
running  on  in  growing  power  through  the 
centuries.  There  was  Judgment  in  constant 
execution  before  Christ,  in  the  retributive 
operation  of  the  Divine  law,  both  with  blessing 
and  in  wrath.  Of  this  the  Old  Testament  is 
full.  Judgment  by  no  means  began  when  the 
Son  of  Man  came  in  His  Kingdom,  but  the 
agency  of  Christ  in  Judgment  began  to  be  mani- 
fested in  the  casting  out  of  evil,  in  the  purging 


VI.]  JUDGMENT   A   PEESENT   EEALITY.  151 

of  the  Church  and  the  world  from  the  obstruc- 
tions to  the  progress  of  His  Kingdom.  So  fat 
as  the  agency  of  Christ  is  a  more  perfect 
agency  for  the  work  of  revealing  and  con- 
demning and  casting  out  all  obstacles  to  His 
reigning  over  men  in  truth  and  righteousness 
and  love,  so  far  the  work  of  Judgment  must 
proceed,  during  the  Christian  period,  more 
thoroughly,  manifestly,  effectively,  than  ever 
before.  Now  just  this,  which  we  must  admit 
to  be  true,  characterises  the  period  of  Christ's 
presence  in  His  Kingdom,  as,  in  a  special 
sense,  a  period  of  Judgment — a  Judgment 
''  day,"  we  may  term  it,  a  day  of  ages,  like  the 
days  of  creation. 

Comparing  the  Christian  period,  thus  far 
with  a  period  of  equal  duration  before  Christ, 
we  notice  a  marvellous  difference  in  moral 
progress.  Inveterate  evils,  that  had  held  their 
ground  from  the  time  of  primeval  man,  have 
been  gradually  disappearing  under  the  ban  of 
Christ,  condemned  and  cast  out  by  that  "  spirit 
of  power  and  love  and  discipline "  which  is 
slowly,  but  steadily,  diffusing  itself  through 
the  world  from  Christ.  Infanticide,  slavery, 
cruelty  to  criminals,  neglect  of  the  helpless, 
wars  of  conquest,  religious  persecution,  tyran- 
nical   government,  barbarous    laws,    have    all 


152  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

shrunk  under  the  ban  of  that  spirit  of  moral 
purity  and  intelligence  which  Christ  communi- 
cates to  man.  The  Son  of  Man  has  evidently 
been  sending  forth  His  "  angels"  the  varied 
powers,  personal  and  impersonal,  that  follow 
in  His  train — the  influences  not  only  of  reli- 
gion, but  of  commerce,  learning,  art,  etc.,  and 
they  have  been  gathering  out  of  His  kingdom 
"  the  things  that  cause  stumbling."  (Matt, 
xiii.  41.)  Incomplete  as  the  work  may  be,  no 
one  can  doubt  that  it  is  going  on.  Christ's 
own  words  describe  it  as  a  present  fact  tending 
toward  a  future  consummation.  "  Now  is  the 
judgment  of  this  world,  now  shall  the  prince  of 
this  world  be  cast  out"  It  is  precisely  such  a 
work  that  fitly  characterises  the  Christian 
period  as  a  period  of  Judgment  on  all  that 
opposes  the  sway  of  Christ  as  King.  It  is  the 
relation  of  Christ  to  such  a  work,  as  the  centre 
and  soul  of  the  agencies  that  are  effectively 
discovering  and  banning  and  purging  away  the 
•evils  of  the  world,  which  justifies  us  in  re- 
garding Him  as  to-day  the  occupant  of  His 
Judgment  throne  in  a  growing  sovereignty  of 
moral  glory  and  power. 

(4.)  Christ's  Judgment  extends  into  the 
future.  The  sentences  of  righteousness  which 
He  has  pronounced  in  His  G  ospel  will  be  fully 


VI.]  JUDGMENT  A  PRESENT  REALITY.  153 

written  out,  not  only  in  the  experience  of  the 
world,  but  in  the  experiences  of  individual 
men,  "  that  each  one  may  receive  the  things  done 
in  the  body."  Every  conscience  will,  sooner  or 
later,  experience  this  revelation,  or  discovery, 
of  the]  Divine  Judgment  as  accomplished  in 
itself ;  will  recognise  in  its  personal  experience 
the  fulfilment  of  the  righteous  sentence  which 
Christ,  as  both  King  and  Judge,  has  uttered  in 
His  Gospel .  "  Th  is  revela  Hon  of  judgment ' '  will 
be,  in  the  strictest  sense,  before  Christ,  not  in 
external  form,  but  in  inward  consciousness, 
contemplating,  on  one  hand,  the  law  of  Christ, 
and,  on  the  other,  one's  own  personal  character, 
and  the  consequences  of  having  that  character 
as  the  net  result  of  the  deeds  done  in  the  body. 

Such  a  day  of  Judgment  awaits  every  man  in 
that  solemn  chamber  of  conscience,  in  which 
the  spirit,  facing  the  realities  of  its  present 
condition  as  the  result  of  its  past  action,  pro- 
nounces on  itself,  with  joy  or  grief,  the  sentence 
of  the  Divine  law,  as  in  the  presence  of  its 
Judge  and  of  its  future.  For  such  a  Judgment 
no  public  theatre,  no  universal  concourse,  is 
requisite,    and    none    has    been    announced.* 

*  We  freely  admit  that  a  spectacular  element  in  Judgment  is 
sometimes  clearly  recognisable.  It  is  the  exaggeration  of  it 
which  appears  in  the  traditional  notions  of  "  the  great  assize." 
As  in  the    destruction   of    Jerusalem,  or   in  the   downfall  of 


154  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

Unless  we  expect  God  to  introduce  a  radical 
change  in  His  methods  of  executing  and  re- 
vealing His  Judgments, it  is  utterly  unreasonable 
to  expect  that  He  will  undertake  any  grand 
scenic  representation,  and  gather  together  all 
men  and  angels,  in  order  to  reveal  to  eyes,  or 
proclaim  to  ears,  what  has  been  sufficiently 
demonstrated  to  consciences. 

(5.)  It  may  be  granted  to  any  one  who  urges 
it,  that  the  Scriptures  undoubtedly  convey  the 
impression  that  there  is  to  be  a  grand  and 
general  clearing  up  of  the  ways  of  God  by 
something  that  may  be  called  a  "  revelation  of 
Judgment."  We  must  beware,  however,  of  re- 
ducing such  a  fact  to  the  mechanical  proportions 
of  a  fresco  painting.  Such  a  result  might  issue 
as  certainly  and  as  clearly  from  a  process,  re- 
quiring ages  for  its  accomplishment  in  the 
gradual  operation  of  law,  as  from  a  catastrophe f 
taking  place   in   an   hour.      And    observation 

American  slavery,  as  well  as  in  the  exodus  of  the  emancipated 
Hebrews  from  Egypt,  something-  that  may  he  called  spectacular 
will  very  naturally  he  connected  with  Judgment  revealed,  as 
distinguished  from  Judgment  experienced.  But  this  legitimate 
recognition  of  the  spectacular  element  in  Judgment  falls  far 
short  of  that  exaggerated  Jewish  representation,  which  depicts 
the  Son  of  Man  as  coming  to  pull  down  the  pillars  of  heaven 
and  earth,  like  a  Divine  Samson,  and  to  work  the  last  and 
greatest  of  physical  miracles  in  the  simultaneous  re-embodi- 
ment of  all  the  dead,  to  be  gathered  in  concourse  about  a 
great  white  Judgment-throne. 


VI.]          JUDGMENT   A   PEESENT   REALITY.  155 

assures  us  that  God's  revelations  follow  the 
method  of  development  rather  than  that  of  catas- 
trophe. Abraham's  assurance,  that  "  the  Judge 
of  all  the  earth  shall  do  right  "  (Gen.  xviii.  25), 
will  be  sufficiently  vindicated  to  all  by  the 
grand  result  to  which  the  long  Judgment  process 
comes,  when  "  all  things  that  cause  stumbling  " 
shall  have  sunk  under  condemnation,  and  "  the 
new  heavens  and  the  new  earth  wherein  dwelleth 
righteousness  "  shall  be  revealed  in  their  final 
"  beauty  of  holiness"  * 

As  to  the  unbroken  continuity  of  Judgment, 
it  was  long  ago  affirmed  in  the  philosophic 
maxim,  nihil  per  saltum.  We  must,  however, 
conceive  of  Judgment  as  having  its  appropriate 
development  from  a  beginning  to  a  consum- 
mation, just  as  we  conceive  of  that  moral 
education  which  God  is  continuously  carrying 
forward  as  having  its  development.  The  two, 
in  fact,  are  parallel,  and  the  one  cannot 
advance  without  the  other.  The  mistake  has 
been  in  thinking  of  the  Judgment-fire  as  only 
in  the  one  burning  point,  where  all  the  lines 
of  consequence  converge  in  their  focus.  But 
it  is  in  the  focus  only  because  it  is  in  every 
line  that  runs  thereto. 

Unless   there   is   Judgment   in   the  present, 

#  See  Note  A,  appended  to  this  chapter. 


156  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

there  can  be  none  in  the  future.  If,  then, 
the  living  present  derives  awe  from  the  con- 
templation of  a  Divine  Judgment  process  con- 
tinuously unfolding  from  century  to  century, 
the  momentousness  of  the  future  is  increased 
as  much  as  the  significance  of  the  present  is 
enhanced. 

From  the  slight  but  perceptible  curvature  of 
the  small  arc  of  the  circle  within  our  sight,  we 
imagine  the  sweep  of  the  vast  circumference. 
Though  our  study  should  dispel  the  notion 
that  the  Divine  award  to  the  deeds  done  in 
the  body  is  to  be  waited  for,  till  the  arrival 
of  a  catastrophe  that  wrecks  the  globe  shall 
summon  the  entire  race  of  man  to  a  Judgment- 
concourse  before  God's  throne,  none  the  less 
certain  must  we  be  of  "  Judgment  to  come" 
In  fact,  Judgment  is  alioays  coming,  always 
growing,  always  unfolding  its  revelations  of 
consequences. 

By  discovering  the  continuity  of  Judgment, 
we  reach  the  clearest  evidence  of  its  movement 
on  towards  perfectness.  Seeing  that  a  Judg- 
ment-process is  now  going  on  with  a  growing 
throughness  under  the  spiritual  kingship  of 
Christ,  we  conclude  that  it  must  go  on  to  a 
consummate  efficiency  in  the  spiritual  life  of 
the  future.     Brighter  and  brighter  will  grow 


VI.]    JUDGMENT  A  PEE  SENT  EEALITY.    157 

the  trying  light,  finer  and  finer  the  meshes 
that  sift  good  from  evil.  Ultimately  no  evil, 
however  trivial  in  semblance,  shall  escape. 
And  here  it  is  that  reason  finds  the  full 
verification  of  the  warning  word  of  Christ  : 
"J  say  unto  you,  That  every  idle  word  that 
men  shall  speak,  they  shall  give  account  thereof 
in  the  day  of  Judgment"    (Matt.  xii.  36.) 

So  far  as  the  present  chapter  has  given 
reason  to  think  that  there  is  no  grand  and 
general  and  catastrophic  Judgment-day  to  be 
waited  for,  the  associated  idea  that  there  must 
be  a  waiting  for  a  grand  and  general  Kesurrec- 
tion-day,  in  order  to  such  a  Judgment,  has 
failed  to  find  ground  for  its  support. 

The  traditional  conceptions  of  this  subject 
are,  however,  closely  bound  up  with  a  tra- 
ditional misunderstanding  of  a  section  of  the 
Gospel  according  to  Matthew,  in,  or  rather 
into,  which  there  has  been  read  the  doctrine 
of  a  final  Judgment-day,  universal,  scenic,  and 
catastrophic,  according  to  the  famous  picture 
of  Michael  Angelo.  This  requires  study 
and  restatement,  and  must  next  be  taken  in 
hand. 


BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 


NOTE  A. 

ON     PHYSICAL    CATASTROPHES    AND     WONDERS     CONSIDERED 
AS    "JUDGMENTS." 

The  exposition  given  in  the  foregoing  chapter  to  the 
fact  of  Judgment  as  a  present  and  perpetual  reality  is 
thoroughly  consistent  with  the  recognition  to  be  given 
to  the  effective  agency  which  physical  catastrophes  and 
wonders  undoubtedly  have  in  carrying  on  God's  continu- 
ous work  of  Judgment.  Testimony  both  cogent  and 
abundant  is  borne  both  by  the  Scriptures  and  by  ex- 
perience to  the  significance  of  natural  phenomena  in  con- 
nection with  epochs  in  the  unfolding  of  the  spiritual  de- 
velopment, as,  for  example,  the  Flood.  Our  belief  in  One 
who  is  both  Creator  and  Moral  Euler  postulates  a  co-ordi 
nation  of  His  physical  and  moral  methods.  The  wheels 
of  the  physical  and  moral  worlds  are  thus,  so  to  speak, 
geared  together,  so  that  natural  catastrophes  are  some- 
times seen  in  conjunction  with  crises  in  the  spiritual 
movement.  Yet,  similar  catastrophes  are  seen  all  the 
wThile  occurring,  and  at  insignificant  as  well  as  significant 
moments.  Their  value  as  punctuation  marks,  to  point 
off  spiritual  periods,  is  derived  from  a  subjective  rather 
than  an  objective  source.  An  analogy  is  found  in  the 
common  view  of  what  are  called  "  special  providences," 
which  rather  are  specially  noticed  providences,  since  all 
providence  is  special,  and  could  not  otherwise  be  general. 
To  the  sinner  there  is  an  aspect  of  vengeance  in  physical 
catastrophes,  because  he  is  a  sinner,  not  because  they  are 
violent  and  destructive.  The  Flood,  therefore,  is  called 
"  a  judgment,"  not  because  it  was  actually  caused  by 
man's  wickedness,  but  because,  men  being  sinners,  the 
peculiar  moral  impressions  of  it  were  caused  by  their 
wickedness,  and  were,  by  God's  design,  the  same  as  Hit 
had  been  so  caused. 


VI.]      JUDGMENT  IN  THE  CREEDS.      159 

We  must  accordingly  think  of  natural  catastrophes  or 
wonders,  such  as  the  darkened  sun  and  the  quaking 
earth  at  the  time  of  the  Crucifixion,  as  brought  about  by 
natural  causes,  independently  of  any  moral  cause  in  the 
action  of  men.  The  Flood  in  Noah's  time,  the  earth- 
quake at  the  death  of  Jesus,  would  have  occurred,  though 
men  had  not  sinned  as  they  did.  Human  action  has  no 
causal  relation  whatever  to  such  phenomena.  But  that 
co-ordination  of  physical  and  moral  events,  whereby  such 
phenomena  have  been  so  timed  as  to  occur  at  such  crises, 
producing  influential  moral  impressions,  is  a  revelation  of 
the  Supreme  Intelligence  who  makes  all  things  work 
together  for  righteousness. 


NOTE  B. 

ON     JUDGMENT   AS   REPRESENTED    IN     THE   CREEDS    IN 
CONNECTION  WITH    THE    RESURRECTION. 

The  following  extract  from  "  The  Larger  Catechism  "  of 
the  Presbyterian  Church,  as  adopted  and  ratified  by  the 
Synod  of  New  York  and  Philadelphia  in  1788,  may  stand 
here  as  a  fair  expression  of  the  prevailing  mode  of  Chris- 
tian thought. 

Q.  87.  What  are  we  to  believe  concerning  the  Resur- 
rection ? 

A.  We  are  to  believe  that  at  the  last  day  there  shall  be 
a  general  Eesurrection  of  the  dead,  both  of  the  just  and 
unjust.  When  they  that  are  then  found  alive  shall  in  a 
moment  be  changed,  and  the  self-same  bodies  of  the  dead 
which  were  laid  in  the  grave,  being  then  again  united  to 
their  souls  for  ever,  shall  be  raised  up  by  the  power  of 
Christ.  The  bodies  of  the  just,  by  the  Spirit  of  Christ, 
and  by  virtue  of  His  Eesurrection  as  their  Head,  shall 
be  raised  in  power,  spiritual  and  incorruptible,  and  made 
like  to  His  glorious  body ;  and  the  bodies  of  the  wicked 


160  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

shall  be  raised  up  in  dishonour  by  Him  as  an  offended 
Judge. 

Q.  88.  What  shall  immediately  folloiv  after  the  Bcsur- 
rection  ? 

A.  Immediately  after  the  Resurrection  shall  follow 
the  general  and  final  Judgment  of  angels  and  men,  the 
day  and  hour  whereof  no  man  knoweth,  that  all  may 
watch  and  pray,  and  be  ever  ready  for  the  coming  of  the 
Lord. 

Q.  89.  What  shall  be  done  to  the  wicked  at  the  day  of 
Judgment  ? 

A.  At  the  day  of  Judgment,  the  wicked  shall  be  set  on 
Christ's  left  hand,  and,  upon  clear  evidence  and  full  con- 
viction of  their  own  consciences,  shall  have  the  fearful  but 
just  sentence  of  condemnation  pronounced  against  them  ; 
and  thereupon  shall  be  cast  out  from  the  favourable  pre- 
sence of  God  and  the  glorious  fellowship  with  Christ,  His 
saints,  and  all  His  holy  angels,  into  hell,  to  be  punished 
with  unspeakable  torments  both  of  body  and  soul,  with 
the  devil  and  all  his  angels  forever. 

Q.  90.  What  shall  be  done  to  the  righteous  at  the  day  of 
Judgment  ? 

A.  At  the  day  of  Judgment,  the  righteous,  being  caught 
up  to  Christ  in  the  clouds,  shall  be  set  on  His  right  hand, 
and  there,  openly  acknowledged  and  acquitted,  shall  join 
with  Him  in  the  judging  of  reprobate  angels  and  men,  and 
shall  be  received  into  heaven,  where  they  shall  be  fully 
and  for  ever  freed  from  all  sin  and  misery,  filled  with  in- 
conceivable joys,  made  perfectly  holy  and  happy  both  in 
body  and  soul  in  the  company  of  innumerable  saints  and 
angels,  but  especially  in  the  immediate  vision  and  fruition 
of  God  the  Father,  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  and  of  the 
Holy  Spirit,  to  all  eternity.  And  this  is  the  perfect  and 
lull  communion  which  the  members  of  the  invisible  Church 
shall  enjoy  with  Christ  in  glory,  at  the  Resurrection  and 
day  of  Judgment. 


VI.]       JUDGMENT  IN  THE  CREEDS.      1G1 

[As  to  the  teaching,  in  the  last  paragraph,  that  the 
righteous  shall  join  in  the  judgment  of  the  reprobate,  see 
the  view  presented  in  Note  B,  Chapter  v.] 


Remark. — The  fallacy  of  imagining  that  the  phrase 
*i  the  day  of  judgment"  wherever  met  in  the  Scriptures, 
carries  the  sense  attached  to  it  in  the  creeds,  appears  from 
the  following  passage  in  the  first  epistle  of  John  (iv.  17) : 
"Herein  is  love  made  perfect  with  us,  that  we  may  have 
boldness  in  the  day  of  judgment."  This  means  simply 
that  day  of  Judgment  which  persecution  was  beginning  to 
bring  upon  the  Church  (compare  1  Pet.  iv.  17),  attesting 
the  genuine  faith  of  the  steadfast,  and  exposing  the  empti- 
ness of  the  apostate.  This  explanation  is  required  by  the 
remainder  of  the  sentence — "  because  as  He  is,  so  are  we 
in  this  world."  That  is :  As  our  Master  is,  denied,  op- 
posed, abused,  so  are  we.  (John  xv.  20.)  And  in  order 
that  we  may  follow  in  His  way  of  suffering  with  a  faithful 
boldness  in  our  day  of  Judgment,  love  is  made  perfect 
■E-ith  us  by  the  abiding  of  God  in  us.     (See  verse  16.) 


11 


CHAPTEE  VII. 

THE  LAST  JUDGMENT"  NOT 
DELAYED  TILL  THE  BESUBBECTION. 


CHAPTEK  VII. 

"THE    LAST    JUDGMENT"   NOT    DELAYED    TILL, 
THE   BESUKKECTION. 

"Noio  is  the  judgment  of  this  world."— John  xii.  31. 

But  when  the  Son  of  Man  shall  come  in  His 
glory,  and  all  the  angels  with  Him,  then  shall 
He  sit  on  the  throne  of  His  glory  :  and  before 
Him  shall  be  gathered  all  the  nations  :  and  He 
shall  separate  them  one  from  another,  as  the 
shepherd  separateth  the  sheep  from  the  goats  : 
and  He  shall  set  the  sheep  on  His  right  handr 
but  the  goats  on  the  left.  Then  shall  the  King 
say  unto  them  on  His  right  hand,  Come,  ye 
blessed  of  My  Father,  inherit  the  King dom  pre- 
pared for  you  from  the  foundation  of  the  tvorld  : 
for  I  was  an  hungred,  and  ye  gave  Me  meat :  I 
teas  thirsty,  and  ye  gave  Me  drink :  I  was  a 
stranger,  and  ye  took  Me  in;  naked,  and  ye 
clothed  Me  :  I  ivas  sick,  and  ye  visited  Me  :  I 
was  in  prison,  and  ye  came  unto  Me.  Then, 
shall  the  righteous  answer  Him,  saying,  Lord,, 


1GG  BEYOND  THE   SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

when  saw  ive  Thee  an  hungred,  and  fed  Thee  ? 
or  athirst,  and  gave  Thee  drink  ?  And  ichen 
saw  we  Thee  a  stranger,  and  took  Thee  in  ?  or 
naked,  and  clothed  Thee  ?  And  when  saiv  ive 
Thee  sick,  or  in  prison,  and  came  unto  Thee  ? 
And  the  King  shall  answer  and  say  unto  them, 
Verily  I  say  unto  you,  Inasmuch  as  ye  did  it 
unto  one  of  these  My  brethren,  even  these  least, 
ye  did  it  unto  Me.  Then  shall  He  say  also 
unto  them  on  the  left  hand,  Depart  from  Me,  ye 
cursed,  into  the  eternal  fire  which  is  prepared 
for  the  devil  and  his  angels :  for  I  ivas  an 
hungred,  and  *e  gave  Me  no  meat :  I  ivas 
thirsty,  and  ye  gave  Me  no  drink :  I  ivas  a 
stranger,  and  ye  took  Me  not  in;  naked,  and 
ye  clothed  Me  not ;  sick,  and  in  pirison,  and  ye 
visited  Me  not.  Then  shall  they  also  answer, 
saying,  Lord,  whensaio  we  Thee  an  hungred,  or 
athirst,  or  a  stranger,  or  naked,  or  sick,  or  in 
prison,  and  did  not  minister  unto  Thee  ?  Then 
shall  He  answer  them,  saying,  Verily  I  say  unto 
you,  Inasmuch  as  ye  did  it  not  unto  one  of 
these  least,  ye  did  it  not  unto  Me.  And  these 
shall  go  away  into  eternal  punishment :  but 
the  righteous  into  eternal  life.  (Matt.  xxv. 
31—46.) 

This  last  third  of  the  twenty-fifth  chapter  of 
Matthew  has  generally  been  understood  to  be 


vii.]  "the  last -judgment."  167 

a  prophetic  picture  of  the  Judgment  of  the 
entire  race  of  mankind,  to  take  place  at  the 
end  of  time.  It  is  commonly  taken  to  be  a 
description  of  "  The  Last  Judgment,"  a  great 
and  general  court  of  God,  in  which  all  the 
deeds  of  earthly  time  are  to  be  reviewed,  and 
sentenced  for  all  eternity.  Whether  it  is 
really  that,  and  what  it  is  if  not  really  that,  is 
the  present  object  of  inquiry. 

If  our  study  should  lead  us  to  conclusions 
widely  different  from  the  traditional  opinion, 
it  will  not  be  the  first  time  that  Biblical  study 
has  given  a  changed  view  of  an  important 
subject.  All  that  part  of  the  Bible  which 
refers  to  the  beginnings  of  things  upon  the 
globe  is  differently  understood,  since  we  have 
studied  it  by  the  light  which  we  have  gained 
from  modern  science.  Likewise,  that  part 
which  refers  to  the  last  things,  such  as  Kesur- 
rection,  Judgment,  and  Ketribution,  may  be 
deemed  capable  of  more  correct  understanding, 
as  study  continues,  and  the  helps  of  study  are 
improved. 

I.  Now,  the  traditional  opinion  that  Matt, 
xxv.  31 — 46  is  a  prophetic  picture  of  "  The 
Last  Judgment,"  in  the  sense  above  described, 
is  challenged  by  the  discovery,  and  that  not  a 
very  recent  one,  that  the   words  rendered  in 


168  BEYOND  THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

our  Bibles,    "  all  the  nations "   will  not  fairly 
bear  the  sense  of  "  all  mankind. " 

The  Gospel  according  to  Matthew  is  ad- 
mitted to  have  been  written  expressly  for 
readers  of  Jewish  birth.  It  was  written 
originally  in  Hebrew,  and  this,  done  over  into 
Greek  with  some  variations,  is  what  we  call 
"Matthew."  Now,  in  the  mind  of  a  Jew,  or 
in  the  pages  of  a  book  written  for  Jews,  the 
term  ta  ethne  (ra  e6vn — "  the  nations  ")  regu- 
larly signified  the  nations  outside  of  the 
Jewish  world,  or,  "  the  Gentiles."  The  Kevised 
Version  sometimes  renders  this  term  as  "  the 
Gentiles "  (Eom.  iii.  29),  and  sometimes  as 
"the  nations"  (Eom.  xvi.  26).  The  interpre- 
tation to  be  popularly  put  upon  the  passage 
before  us  in  Matthew  depended  on  the  trans- 
lators' choice  whether  to  say,  "  the  Gentiles"  or 
"  the  nations."  If  they  had  said,  "  all  the 
Gentiles"  they  would  have  been  accused  of 
teaching  a  new  doctrine  under  the  guise  of 
a  new  translation,  changing  the  traditional 
opinion  by  the  change  of  a  word.  So  they 
translated  literally,  "  all  the  nations,"  more 
correctly  than  the  old  version,  which  omits  the 
article,  but  still  ambiguously,  except  to  one 
who  bears  in  mind  the  Jewish  sense  of  that 
phrase.      To    a   Jew,    however,    that    phrase 


VII.]  "THE  LAST  JUDGMENT."  169 

carried  but  one  meaning,  namely,  the  Gentile 
ivorld.  If  a  Jew  wished  to  say,  "  all  man- 
kind," he  said,  "  Jews  and  Gentiles."  If  he 
wished  to  say,  "  all  mankind  except  the 
Jews,"  he  said,  "  all  the  Gentiles,"  that  is, 
"  all  the  nations"  Now,  this  is  precisely 
what  Jesus,  speaking  to  Jews,  and  Himself  a 
Jew,  says  here.* 

The  words  panta  ta  ethne  (iravra  ra  edvn)? 
taken  simply  as  Greek  words,  undoubtedly 
signify  in  English  "  all  the  nations"  By  that 
we  understand  "  all  mankind."  But  the  Jew 
did  not  so  understand  it.  When  a  Jew  used 
that  phrase  to  Jews,  as  Christ  did  to  the 
Apostles  in  this  passage,  he  meant  the  non- 
Jewish  nations,  just  as  regularly  as  we,  when 
we  speak  of  "  the  heathen,"  mean,  in  general, 
the  non-Christian  nations. 

The  different  sense  which  two  different 
languages  may  put  into  the  same  combination 
of  words,  which,  separately,  word  by  word, 
have  the  same  sense  in  both  languages,  is  illus- 
trated by  the  experience  of  the  American, 
who,  in  addressing  a  Sunday-school  in  France, 
wras  unaware  that  eau  devie  (literally,  "  water 
of  life  ")  is  the  French  phrase  for  brandy,  and 
astonished   his    hearers    by   gravely    assuring 

*  See  also  the  Remark  at  the  close  of  this  chapter. 


170  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

them  that  in  Heaven  there  was  "  a  pure  river 

of  eait  cle  vie."* 

In  this  Judgment  of  "  all  the  nations," 
therefore,  unless  we  think  fit  to  ignore  the 
idiomatic  sense  which  these  words  always 
carried  from  Jewish  lips  to  Jewish  ears,  we 
cannot  recognise  anything  hut  a  description  of 
the  Judgment  of  the  Gentile  part  of  mankind, 
all  except  the  Jews.  It  is  as  certain  as  any- 
thing which  depends  on  the  intelligent  inter- 
pretation of  language  can  ever  he,  that  this 
is  not  the  final  and  universal  Judgment  of 
the  human  race  that  it  has  been  supposed 
to  be. 

(1.)  This  immediately  starts  the  question: 
What  then  of  the  Jewish  portion  of  mankind  ? 
"What  of  their  Judgment  ?     This  is  apparent 
from   a   glance   at   the   preceding   chapters  of 
Matthew,     from    the     twenty-first      onward, 
recording  discourses  which  were  all  delivered 
by  Christ  on  the  same  day  as  this — the  last 
day  of  His  public  teaching.     These  contain  no 
less  than  six  Parables,  of  Judgment,  three   of 
them  addressed    to    the    unbelieving    part    of 
the    nation,    and    three    to  the  few  believers, 
namely : — 

First  Triplet,  addressed  to  the  unbelievers, 

*  He  should  have  said  eau  vive,  "living  water."' 


VII.]  "  THE   LAST   JUDGMENT."  171 

that  is,  either  to  the  nation  generally  or  to 
their  representatives,  as  the  Pharisees. 

(a.)  The  Two  Sons,  xxi.  28—32. 

(b.)  The  Wicked  Husbandmen,  xxi.  33 — 41. 

(c.)  The  Marriage  of  the  King's  Son,  xxii. 
2—14. 

This  last,  connected  as  it  is  with  the  sub- 
ject of  the  Gospel  invitation  to  the  Gentile 
world,  sounds  a  prelude  to  that  subject  of  the 
Judgment  of  the  Gentiles  which  concludes  the 
whole  series  of  these  parables.  For,  obviously, 
the  man  without  "  the  wedding  garment"  was 
one  of  the  outside  multitude,  to  whom  the 
invitation  rejected  by  those  that  scorned  the 
King  was  given. 

Second  Triplet,  addressed  to  the  believers,  the 
Jewish-Christian  Church. 

(a.)  The  Faithful  and  the  Evil  Servant,  xxiv. 
45—51. 

(b.)  The  Wise  and  the  Foolish  Virgins,  xxv. 
1—13. 

(c.)  The  Talents  :  or,  the  Use  and  the  Abuse  of 
Trusts,  xxv.  14—30. 

The  topic  of  each  of  these  parables  is  Judg- 
ment in  varied  aspects.  The  twenty-third 
chapter  and  most  of  the  twenty-fourth, 
intervening  between  the  two  triplets,  is  a 
continuous     thunder-roll     of     the     Judgment 


172  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

impending  over  the  people  and  the  city  to  whom 
the  first  triplet  was  addressed.  These  six  now 
described,  and  the  one  in  the  passage  now 
before  us,  which  is  a  prophetic  picture  rather 
than  a  parable,  must  be  taken  together  to 
make  up  in  combination  a  Judgment-discourse 
applicable  to  Jews  and  Gentiles  both,  that  is, 
to  all  mankind.  Each  of  these  seven  will  be 
found  to  refract  one  or  more  of  those  prismatic 
rays  of  truth  which  are  combined  in  a  perfect 
idea  of  the  judgment  of  God. 

(2.)  A  second  question  touches  next  the  time 
of  the  fulfilment  of  these  Judgment  warnings. 
Some  of  them,  at  any  rate  (such  as  Matt.  xxi. 
43  ;  xxii.  7),  were  fulfilled  in  the  lifetime  of 
some  who  heard  them.  Judgment  fell  upon 
the  Jewish  people  as  predicted,  their  city  was 
destroyed,  and  a  million  of  them  perished  in 
the  ruin.  This  immediate  beginning  of  the 
fulfilment,  so  far  as  the  Jews  were  concerned, 
leads  us  to  anticipate  the  like  so  far  as  the 
Gentiles  were  concerned.  If  there  was  no 
putting  off  on  one  side,  why  should  we  expect 
putting  off  on  the  other  side  ?  We  presume 
that  the  cases  will  probably  be  parallel,  no 
more  delay  of  Judgment  in  the  one  than  in  the 
other.  We  must  so  regard  it,  unless  we  find 
plain  evidence  to  the  contrary. 


VII.]  *'  THE   LAST   JUDGMENT."  173 

Now,  is  there  any  such?  Here  we  shall 
touch  the  only  difficulty  of  any  account,  a  diffi- 
culty mainly  for  this  reason,  that  it  is  harder 
to  get  a  wrong  notion  out  of  our  minds  than 
to  get  a  right  notion  in.  The  wrong  notion, 
in  this  case,  is  due  to  a  wrong  way  of  thinking, 
to  a  mechanical,  unspiritual  way  of  looking  at 
our  Lord's  prophecies  of  great  spiritual  facts  in 
the  unfolding  of  His  kingdom. 

The  time  when  the  Judgment  of  the  Gentile 
part  of  the  world  begins  is  said  to  be  "  when  the 
Son  of  Man  shall  come  in  His  glory,  and  all 
the  angels  with  Him."  This  has  been  gener- 
ally taken  to  mean  a  visible  appearance  of  the 
Lord  Jesus  Christ,  in  the  radiance  of  a  glori- 
fied body,  accompanied  with  hosts  of  celestial 
spirits.  This  seemed  sufficiently  consistent 
with  the  theory  of  an  assemblage  before  Him 
of  the  whole  human  race  in  all  its  countless 
millions — a  grand  and  final  court,  to  review 
and  adjudicate  upon  every  life  that  has  been 
lived.  No  one,  indeed,  has  been  able  to  give 
a  satisfying  answer  to  some  questions  which 
such  a  theory  starts,  namely :  Why  should  all 
these  be  brought  together,  some  from  bliss 
and  some  from  woe,  to  hear  what  they  knew 
already,  and  to  go  back  into  the  bliss  or  woe 
they  came  from  ?     Or,  Why  should  Judgment 


174  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP* 

upon  the  mortal  career  of  each  individual  be 

put  off  thus  to  an  indefinite  future,  and  then 
be  delivered  in  a  lump,  as  it  were  ?  The 
usual  rejjlf  to  this,  that  it  is  for  God's  sake, 
not  man's,  that  this  is  to  be,  to  the  end  that 
His  righteousness  as  the  Judge  may  be  fully- 
manifested  and  acknowledged,  does  not  satisfy. 
For  if  men  do  not  need  this  concourse  before 
God,  if  the  sinner  in  utter  solitariness  may  be 
as  thoroughly  convinced  of  God's  righteousness 
and  his  own  sin  as  in  a  crowd  that  includes  all 
mankind,  then  we  may  be  sure  that  God  needs 
no  such  Judgment-throng  any  more  than  we 
need  it.  Paul  has  set  forth  the  principle  of 
the  Divine  economy  which  determines  our 
conclusion  about  this  :  "  all  things  are  for  your 
sakes."  (2  Cor.  iv.  15.)  But  the  moment  it  is 
seen  that,  according  to  the  very  terms  of  the 
record,  the  Jewish  portior  of  mankind  are  not 
counted  in  this  Judgment-concourse  before  the 
King,  the  theory,  that  here  we  have  a  prophecy 
of  the  visible  appearance  of  Christ  to  pass 
Judgment  on  the  collective  race,  leaks  very 
badly.  On  the  face  of  the  discourse,  this  is 
a  coming  of  Christ  to  only  a  part  of  man- 
kind ;  the  larger  part,  no  doubt,  but  still  a 
part  only. 

Minds  that  are  not  committed  to  defend  any 


vii.]  "the  last  judgment."  175 

dogma  in  the  teeth  of  plain  facts  will  make  due 
account  of  this.  This  cannot  possibly  be  what 
it  has  been  supposed  to  be,  a  visible  coming  of 
Christ  to  judge  all  mankind  at  the  end  of  this 
world's  history.  The  difficulty  presented  by 
such  a  theory  visibly  melts.  So  far  as  that  is 
concerned,  there  is  nothing  adverse  to  our  pre- 
sumption before  stated,  that  the  Judgment  of 
the  Gentile  part  of  the  world  will  run  parallel 
with  the  Judgment  of  the  Jewish  part;  in  fact, 
that  it  began  to  be  fulfilled  immediately,  just 
as  that  began. 

A  striking  confirmation  of  this  view  comes 
from  the  picture  here  drawn  of  the  "  brethren  " 
of  Christ,  that  is,  Christians,  as  hungry,  athirst, 
naked,  sick,  and  in  prison.  We  cannot  mis- 
understand this  allusion  to  the  now  well-known 
circumstances  of  the  Church  of  Christ  during 
her  period  of  conflict,  then  about  to  begin.  We 
see,  indeed,  in  "  these,  My  brethren"  the  repre- 
sentatives of  needy  humanity  in  all  times,  in 
all  its  piteous  appeals  for  benevolent  regard, 
including  the  appeals  even  of  those  deemed  ill- 
deserving  and  justly  punished,  as  the  brethren 
of  Christ  were,  in  early  days,  so  generally 
deemed  by  most  men.  Christians  are  familiar 
with  the  wide  application,  in  many  a  sermon 
to-day,  of  this  designation,  "  My  brethren"  to 


176  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CIIA.P. 

all  who  need  Christian  charity.  Only  let  it 
be  remembered,  both  to  quicken  Christian 
charity,  and  to  sharpen  Christian  insight  into 
the  spiritual  understanding  of  this  whole 
prophecy,  that  Christians  themselves  were 
the  "  destitute,  afflicted,  evil  entreated  "  ones, 
according  to  their  treatment  of  whom  the 
Gentiles  are  here  described  as  judged. 

We  are  now  able  to  answer  the  question: 
When  did  the  Judgment  of  the  Gentiles  begin  ? 

Premising  what  many  forget,  that  nothing 
in  God's  Kingdom  comes  all  at  once,  but  rather 
by  stages  of  continuous  advance — the  Son  of 
Man  came  in  His  glory,  that  is,  began  to  come, 
when  He  began  to  be  preached  and  believed  on 
among  the  Gentiles  as  "  the  Lord  of  glory," 
the  spiritual  King  of  men  ;  when  His  name 
began  to  be  recognised  as  "  above  every  other 
name  "  ;  when  His  Apostles  began  to  proclaim, 
"  Neither  is  there  any  other  name  under  heaven, 
that  is  given  among  men,  wherein  we  must  be 
saved."  (Acts  iv.  12.)  With  Him  were  "  all 
the  angels  " — all  the  miraculous  powers  and 
spiritual  influences*  which  so  marvellously 
aided  the  introduction  of  faith  in  the  Lord  of 
glory  among  the  Gentiles.     The  Apostles  and 

*  The  word  "angel,"  in  the  Old  Testament,  is  applied  both 
to  personal  and  impersonal  agents  of  God. 


VII.]  "  THE  LAST  JUDGMENT."  177 

all  missionaries  of  the  Gospel  are  doubtless 
included  among  these  "  angels"  or  messengers, 
as  the  word  originally  meant.*  Then  did  He 
indeed  begin  to  "sit  on  the  throne  of  His 
glory,"  a  throne  immediately  erected  in  every 
believing  heart,  and  destined  to  be  recognised 
as  established  in  the  world,  in  proportion  as 
the  Christian  element  grew  strong  enough  to 
make  social  usages  and  civil  laws  conform 
more  and  more  to  the  rule  of  Christ. 

Thus  we  are  bound  to  understand  our  Lord's 
prophecy  of  His  coming  by  the  spiritual  aim  of 
all  His  teachings,  which  constantly  point  to 
things  above  the  region  of  outward  show  and 
mechanical  forms.  We  must  here  bear  in 
mind  the  cautionary  remark  of  a  spiritual  mind 
like  that  of  Paul,  about  the  "  veil  on  the  heart" 
that  veil  of  obstinate,  sensuous  prepossessions, 
which  blinded  Jewish  readers  to  the  spiritual 
import  of  the  prophecies  of  the  Kingdom  of 
heaven.  Those  who  insist  on  a  coming  of 
Christ  with  such  accessories  of  light  and  sound 
and  form  as  lie  upon  the  low  level  of  sensuous 
perception,  are  simply  furnishing  powder  and 
shot  to  sceptics,  who  say  that  Jesus  promised 
to  come  in  that  way  before  that  generation  had 

*  The  "  angels  "  of  the  seven  churches  in  John's  Eevelation 
are  generally  supposed  to  hare  been  men,  not  celestial  spirits. 

12 


178  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

passed,  and  has  not  come ;  so  that  He  must  be 
accounted  a  false  prophet. 

The  idea  of  a  coming  of  Christ  in  such  form 
and  glory  as  are  apparent  to  the  senses  is 
borrowed  from  the  Jews,  who  anticipated  the 
coming  of  the  Messiah  in  that  manner.  The 
genuinely  Christian  idea  of  His  coming  views 
Him  as  coming  to  the  hearts  and  consciences 
of  men  with  spiritual  power,  converting  in- 
dividuals, purifying  society,  shaping  institu- 
tions and  laws,  communicating  ideas  that 
expand  with  power,  principles  that  grow 
toward  sovereignty,  a  spirit  that  by  degrees 
"  leavens  ,?  the  world,  and  at  length  controls 
the  world,  recognisably,  that  is,  visibly  to  our 
minds.  Such  spiritual  ascendency  is  true 
glory,  the  highest  glory.  In  such  glory  the 
Son  of  Man  began  to  come,  as  He  said,  within 
the  lifetime  of  some  of  His  hearers.  (Matt, 
xvi.  28.) 

II.  To  exhibit  the  harmony  of  the  remainder 
of  the  chapter  with  the  view  that  has  now  been 
presented,  a  running  commentary  will  suffice. 

"  Before  Him  shall  be  gathered  all  the  nations  " 
(verse  32).  This  began  to  be  fulfilled,  as  all 
nations  began  to  be  brought  before  Him  in  the 
world-wide  preaching  of  His  Gospel. 

"  And  He  shall  separate  them,'"  etc.     This 


VII.]  "  THE   LAST  JUDGMENT."  179 

also  began  to  take  place,  as  they  began  to 
separate  themselves  to  right  and  left  as 
believers  or  opposers,  "  sheep "  or  "  goats." 
Wherever  Christ  is  preached,  men  take  sides. 
This  division  took  place,  notably,  among  those 
who  heard  Jesus  speak.  (John  vii.  43.)  That 
this,  as  stated  in  our  Lord's  prophecy,  is  the 
first  result  wherever  He  comes  among  men, 
our  Lord's  explicit  words  testify  :  "  Not  psace, 
but  division"     (Luke  xii.  51.) 

"  Then  shall  the  King  say  unto  them" 
etc.  (verses  34 — 45).  In  this  twofold  address 
of  the  King,  I  find  foreshadowed  that  authori- 
tative preaching  of  the  Gospel  of  the  Kingdom, 
which  sets  forth  the  law  of  the  Kingdom,  and 
pronounces  who  have  part  and  tvho  have  no  part 
therein.  Let  us  not  forget  that  the  Gospel  of 
Christ  is  essentially  a  law  of  life,  announcing 
the  conditions  of  life.  Such  a  Gospel  applies  a 
test  to  its  hearers,  enabling  each  to  judge  on 
which  side  of  the  law  of  life  he  stands.  The 
preaching  of  this  Gospel  is,  primarily,  a 
declaration  of  Judgment  upon  the  position 
which  its  hearers  take ;  a  Judgment  which 
each  hearer,  whose  conscience  is  awake,  must 
needs  apply  to  himself.  The  two  different 
courses,  here  described  as  ministering  or  not 
ministering  to   the  neediness  of  the  afflicted 


180  BEYOND  THE   SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

Christians,  may  be  simply  generalised  as  obedi- 
ence or  disobedience  to  the  Gospel  law  of  love. 
(1  John  iv.  21.) 

The  general  view  here  taken  may  be  stated 
thus  :  This  Judgment-prophecy  is  designed  to 
include  the  whole  period  of  the  Kingdom  of 
Christ,  from  the  beginning  of  the  spread  of  "  the 
Gospel  of  the  Kingdom"  It  announces  prin- 
ciples of  Judgment  which  apply  to  all  duration, 
in  all  worlds,  as  taking  effect  now,  in  a  Divine 
Judgment  beginning,  though  not  ending,  in  this 
world. 

Conformably  to  what  has  just  been  said,  in 
the  "Come,  ye  blessed,"  and  "Depart,  ye 
cursed,"  we  shall  miss  the  sense,  if  we  think 
we  hear  an  irreversible  allotment  to  those  who 
have  made  an  unalterable  choice,  and  taken  a 
final  and  fixed  position  for  ever.  I  am  aware 
how  almost  invincible  is  the  pre-possession 
which  will  deny  this,  but  I  am  content  in 
stating  a  fact,  which  candid  inquiry,  freeing 
itself  from  the  shackles  of  ignorance  and  of 
blind  dogmatism,  will  ere  long  freely  admit. 
The  language  is  intense,  and  the  description  is 
picturesque,  but  this  well  befits  the  fact,  that 
our  Lord,  as  the  nations  are  brought  before 
Him,  in  the  preaching  of  His  Gospel,  declares 
the  ultimatum  of  human  destiny  as  settled  by  the 


VII.]  "THE   LAST  JUDGMENT."  181 

law  of  love.  The  "Come,"  and  "Depart," 
instead  of  expressing  the  unalterable  conditions 
of  the  hearers,  express  rather  the  unalterable 
issues  of  the  courses  which  the  hearers  choose  ; 
unalterable  in  nature,  but  conditioned  upon  the 
hearers'  choice:  "  Gome,'"  or  "  Depart"  accord- 
ing as  you  fulfil  or  resist  the  bidding  of  the  law 
of  love.  It  is  fixed  in  the  nature  of  things,  as 
an  eternal  law,  that  the  loving,  the  merciful, 
the  unselfish,  and  only  they,  can  come  into 
fellowship  with  the  Lord  of  glory,  while  the 
hard,  the  unpitying,  the  selfish,  can  only  be 
parted  from  Him  into  fellowship  with  the 
enemies  of  mankind,  "  the  devil  and  his 
angels"  This  is  in  substance  equivalent  to 
"He  that  believeth  shall  be  saved,  but  he  that 
disbelieveth  shall  be  condemned."  (Mark  xvi. 
16.)  As  a  statement  of  "  the  terms  of  salva- 
tion," the  passage  before  us  runs  in  the  same 
line  of  thought  as  earlier  sayings  that  Matthew 
has  recorded,  such  as  these  :  "  Blessed,  are  the 
merciful,  for  they  shall  obtain  mercy  "  (v.  7)  ; 
1  Whosoever  shall  give  to  drink  unto  one  of 
these  little  ones  a  cup  of  cold  water  only,  in  the 
name  of  a  disciple,  verily,  I  say  unto  you,  he 
shall  in  no  wise  lose  his  reward."  (x.  42,) 

Let  us  reflect  on  this,    that   wherever  this 
Gospel    of    the    Lord    is    faithfully  preached 


182  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

to-day,  He  is  continually  sitting  in  judgment 
upon  the  choices  that  the  hearers  make,  and 
continually  repeating  these  Judgment  words, 
"Come"  "Depart"  in  the  varied  forms  in 
which  the  Gospel  pronounces  the  Divine  ulti- 
matum, in  all  the  varied  phrases  by  which  it 
declares  that  spiritual  life  or  death  is  the  issue 
of  the  opposite  choices  which  men  make. 
These  words  express  a  finality,  because  they 
express  what  is  in  the  nature  of  things  un- 
changeable. But  ifc  is  a  finality  which  is  offered 
to  the  election  of  the  hearer  still. 

Here  we  must  observe  two  things.  It  is, 
indeed,  to  those  who  are  ranged  on  opposite 
sides  that  the  King  says  "  Come"  *'  Depart" 
But  this  is  the  very  aspect  which  the  world,  so 
far  as  evangelised,  presents  to-day,  a  world  in 
two  divisions,  on  opposite  sides  of  "  the  law  of 
Christ."  And  all  preaching  of  the  Gospel  pre- 
supposes the  power  of  voluntary  transition 
from  side  to  side.  The  "  Come"  and  "  De- 
part," therefore,  however  expressive  of  the 
solemn  finality  of  that  law  of  consequences, 
which  demands  that  "whatsoever  a  man  soweth, 
that  shall  he  also  reap,"  are  very  far  from 
fixing  "  a  great  gulf"  between  the  saved  and 
the  lost.  He  who  in  the  depths  of  conscience 
to-day  hears  the  word  "  Depart,"  in  a  feeling 


VII.]  "  THE   LAST   JUDGMENT."  183 

of  his  utter  unfitness  for  the  Father's  blessing, 
may  yield  to  the  conviction,  may  honour  the 
law  of  Christ  by  a  consecration  of  his  life, 
may  cross  from  the  left  to  the  right,  and 
"  Come"  among  those  that  are  coming  to  the 
Lord. 

Or,  on  the  other  hand,  he  may  persistently 
refuse  to  come.  What,  then,  but  a  going  on 
in  the  evil  way  to  the  uttermost  of  evil  conse- 
quence ?  "  These  shall  go  away  into  the  eternal 
punishment."  They  have  been  going  away, 
departing  from  the  Lord  and  His  Kingdom, 
ever  since  they  cast  off  His  law  of  love.  They 
simply  go  on  in  their  chosen  way  of  departure. 
It  is  a  way  of  punishment,  in  the  nature  of 
things,  that  is,  eternally,  as  long  as  they 
go  on,  the  more  departure  the  more  sin  and 
punishment,  though  they  should  go  on 
sinning  without  end. 

Now  this  is  matter  of  experience  in  the 
present  world.  Men  who  have  been  brought 
before  Christ,  either  in  the  preaching  of  the 
Gospel,  or  as  they  have  seen  "  the  Word  made 
flesh"  in  some  saintly  life,  hear  the  "Come" 
or  the  "  Depart"  in  their  inmost  souls  to-day, 
as  Judgment  is  pronounced  in  conscience  upon 
the  issues  of  their  life  in  coming  to  or  depart- 
ing  from   the   Lord.     Not   only  this,  but  the 


184  BEYOND  THE   SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

experience  of  these  issues,  in  the  peace  and 
blessedness  which  the  loving  and  self-denying 
life  "inherits"  or  in  the  unrest  and  cankered 
spirit  of  the  selfish  worldling,  begins  to  be 
realised  here. 

When  we  read,  therefore,  "  these  shall  go 
away  into  eternal  'punishment,  but  the  righteous 
into  eternal  life"  we  are  not  to  see  in  picture 
any  final  opening  and  shutting  of  heaven 
gates  or  of  hell  gates  at  the  end  of  a  last  and 
universal  Judgment  of  mankind.  Nor  are  we 
to  think  that  this  saying  marks  probation  as 
closed,  and  having  given  place  to  retribution. 
"We  are  to  see,  rather,  the  Gospel  ultimatum 
beginning  to  take  effect  in  the  present  experience 
of  every  hearer,  according  as  his  choice  in  the 
present  moment  places  him  on  the  right  or  the 
wrong  side  of  the  law  of  the  King. 

I  am  aware  that  it  will  take  time  and 
thought,  aye,  and  a  more  spiritual  ivay  of 
thinking,  to  efface  the  inveterate  impression  of 
the  Christian  world  on  this  subject,  so  as  to 
dispel  the  traditional  illusion  that  Christ 
terms  punishment  and  life  "eternal,"  because 
measured  by  a  sort  of  infinite  almanac  or 
clock.  Rather  is  it  the  nature  of  things,  inde- 
pendently of  any  measure  of  time  or  quantity, 
which    makes    the   punishment   and   the   life 


vii.]  "the  last  judgment."  185 

"  eternal"       Just  as   hardness  of  heart  eter- 
nally, that  is,  in  the  timeless  and  unchange- 
able   nature    of  things,  results   from    acts    of 
selfishness,  without  regard  to  clock  or  almanac, 
with  equal  inevitableness  after  one  moment  or 
a  million  years,  so  is  "  the  eternal  punishment" 
that  which  the  spiritual  nature,  not  duration, 
brings  upon  the  violators  of  the  eternal  law  in 
this  world  and  in  all  the  worlds  of  God.     It 
may    begin    in    any   time   or    any    place  ;    it 
may   end    in   any   time   or   place;    but   it    is 
nothing  connected  with  beginning  or  ending, 
nor  is  it  any  relation  to  time  or  place,  that 
constitutes  it  "  eternal"  but  simply  its  nature^ 
as  the  invariable  result  of   law.     Repentance 
and  conversion  may  cut  it  short  in  a  day;* 
but  it  is    "  eternal"    all  the  same.       It  may 
cease  to  exist,  but  it  can  cease  only  when  the 
cause  ceases  to  exist,  from  whose  existence  it 
must  necessarily  follow. 

So,  also,"  the  eternal  life"  is  not  a  certain 
measure  of  existence,  but  a  certain  kind  of 
existence ;  that  kind  which  results  in  the 
timeless  and  unchangeable  nature  of  things, 
that  is,  eternally,  from  the  specific  causes 
mentioned  by  our  Lord  in  John  xvii.  3.     This 

*  "  A  man  may  be  in  one  place  in  eternal  life,  and  a  rod  be- 
yond in  eternal  death ;  or  in  one  hour  in  eternal  life,  and  in 
another  hour  in  eternal  death."—  Erskine. 


186  BEYOND   THE   SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

also  oegms,  as  Christ  and  His  Apostles  ex- 
plicitly declare,  in  the  present  world.  (John 
iii.  3G  ;  1  John  v.  11,  etc.) 

III.  The  grand  lesson  of  this  Judgment 
prophecy  is  now  before  us.  Judgment  begins 
here,  though  it  does  not  end  here.  Nay,  "  after 
death,  Judgment"  as  well  as  before  death,  but 
so  much  more  completely  developed,  that  we 
may  speak  with  a  deep  spiritual  significance 
of  ''the  world  of  Judgment,"  not  forgetting, 
however,  that  this  world,  and  any  world,  is  a 
world  of  Judgment  so  far  as  it  is  a  world  of 
law.  Judgment  is  simply  the  experience  and 
manifestation  of  the  consequences  of  keeping 
or  breaking  law.  It  takes  time  to  manifest  all 
the  consequences,  time  that  outreaches  the 
present  world.  But  the  manifestation  of  these 
consequences  exists  in  one  stage  of  develop- 
ment or  another,  wherever  law  exists.  This 
world  is  a  world  where  Judgment  goes  on  to- 
day, according  to  the  law  of  Christ  the  King. 
The  system  of  things  is  not  double,  all  proba- 
tion here,  and  all  Judgment  there,  but  single, 
probation  and  Judgment  combined  in  one 
system  of  things,  from  the  time  that  man 
begins  to  be  capable  until  he  ceases  to  be 
capable  (if  he  ever  ceases)  of  choosing  whether 
he  will  obey  or  disobey  the  law  of  God. 


vii.]  "the  last  judgment."  187 

What  then  becomes  of  the  doctrine  of  "  the 
last  Judgment  "  in  the  light  of  this  exposition? 
It  is  not  abolished.  It  is  transformed.  A  lot 
of  useless  stage  machinery  is  put  away.  A 
spiritual  reality  is  made  manifest.  Like  other 
Christian  doctrines,  the  doctrine  of  the  last 
Judgment  must  lose  its  grosser  form,  to  live  in 
purer  and  truer  form.  In  a  very  true  and 
solemn  sense,  we  see  in  this  passage  the  last 
Judgment.  It  is  recorded  at  the  close  of  the 
narrative  of  our  Lord's  public  teaching,  as  His 
ultimatum  to  the  world,  His  final  and  conclusive 
Judgment  upon  the  two  courses  that  the  hearers 
of  His  Gospel  may  elect — His  last  and  great 
word  of  destiny.  But  it  is  not  pronounced 
after  probation  has  ended ;  while  probation  is 
in  progress,  rather;  while  the  Gospel  invita- 
tion is  open,  while  a  Saul  may  change  to  a 
Paul.  In  its  presentation  of  the  two  un- 
changeable alternatives  for  our  choice,  it  falls 
upon  our  ears  with  solemnity  as  the  final  word 
of  the  King,  the  last  Judgment  that  can  ever 
express  our  relation  to  His  eternal  laic. 

To  ire,  and  I  hope  to  others,  thinking  in 
this  way,  an  increased  solemnity  is  imparted  to 
the  present  life,  the  present  hour,  as  the  begin- 
ning of  that  spiritual  Judgment  before  the 
Lord,  through  whose  uttermost  processes  each 


188  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

one  must  pass,  until  all  that  is  sown  in  the 
present  shall  be  reaped  in  the  present  and  the 
future.  That  welcome  "  Come"  that  dread 
41  Depart,"  are  not  to  be  heard  as  from  a  vast 
remoteness,  but  as  if  spoken  in  our  ears  :  the 
present  decision  must  be  made  in  mindfulness 
of  the  immeasurable  potency  of  the  good  or 
the  evil  germ  to  develop  itself  blissfully  or 
woefully.  The  mediaeval  notion  of  a  fiery  hell- 
dungeon,  peopled  with  devilish  tormentors, 
and  the  twin  chimera  of  a  heavenly  colosseum, 
peopled  with  the  singers  of  an  endless  concert 
of  praise,  have  both  given  place  to  conceptions 
of  the  future  more  rational  and  true.  But 
though  the  imaginative  forms,  in  which  the 
truth  was  rudely  clothed  for  a  while,  have  been 
discarded,  the  substance  of  the  truth  is  with  us 
still.  Judgment  and  Ketribution,  both  through 
the  present  and  through  the  future,  abide  as 
living  truths,  which  experience  and  reflection 
imbed  ever  more  deeply  in  the  convictions  of 
thoughtful  minds. 

As  men  study  the  actual  phenomena  of 
human  life,  the  more  convinced  are  they,  that 
the  Divine  Judgment  is  not  something  that 
stands  deferred  to  eternity.  It  begins  here,  if 
it  ever  begins,  at  least  in  inward  fact,  if  not  in 
outward  demonstration.      And  as  men  study 


vii.]  "the  last  judgment."  189 

the  phenomena  of  character,  the  formation  of 
habits  and  tempers,  of  principles  and  disposi- 
tions, the  more  convinced  are  they,  that  the 
Judgment  most  to  be  dreaded  and  hardest  to 
escape  in  any  world  where  the  law  holds,  that 
"  whatsoever  a  man  soweth,  that  shall  he  also 
reap,"  is   a  character  set  wrong  by   sceptical 
habits    and    selfish    principles,    settling    into 
wrong  by  indifference  to  truth,  by  contempt  of 
duty,   in   a    reckless    and    selfish    use  of   the 
present  hour.      Such  a   character  is  seen   to 
carry  in  itself  evidently  developing  germs  of 
evil,  whose    development    has    all   the   future 
to  mature   in,    and    whose  very   nature '  is  to 
demoralise  and  destroy.     The  full  unfolding  of 
these  in  a  spiritual  world,  where  every  screen 
of  flesh  and  blood  is  dropped,  where  each  goes 
"  to  his  own  place  "  and  to  his  own  sort,  accord- 
ing to  what  he  is,  in  spirit  and  tendency,  may 
fully  justify  the  impression  which  the  general 
tone  of  the  New  Testament  makes  upon  us, 
that   this  brief  life   of    ours    may  be   abused 
to  consequences  which  are  past  remedy.     Sin 
may  prove — there  is  great  reason  to  think  so — • 
a   spreading    cancer  in   our    spiritual  nature, 
whose  burning  is  inextinguishable,  everlasting, 
till   the    ruin    is    complete    in    the  extinction 
of  personal  existence  itself,  fulfilling  thus  the 


190  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

sternest  warning  our  Saviour  ever  uttered,  in 
actually  destroying  "  both  soul  and  body  in 
hell"  (Matt.  x.  28.) 

From  the  view  which  has  been  taken  in  this 
and  in  the  foregoing  chapter,  the  conclusion 
is  unavoidable,  that  the  popular  doctrine  of 
the  day  of  Judgment  has  been  read  into  the 
Scripture,  and  not  read  out  of  it.  In  the 
Scripture  we  find  no  warrant  for  looking 
forward  to  a  Judgment  to  be  delivered  to 
mankind  in  a  mass,  and  to  be  displayed 
after  the  manner  of  the  Dies  Ira, 

"  When,  shrivelling  like  a  parched  scroll, 
The  flaming  heavens  together  roll, 
And  louder  yet,  and  yet  more  dread, 
Swells  the  high  trump  that  wakes  the  dead." 

There  are  special  days  of  Judgment,  days  of 
the  Lord,  in  the  Old  Testament  sense  (Isa. 
xiii.  6),  like  the  day  when  Babylon  was 
judged.  The  fall  of  the  Koman  Empire,  the 
French  Revolution  of  1792,  the  American 
Civil  War,  were  such  days.  Beside  such  par- 
ticular days,  and  inclusive  of  them,  there  is  a 
general  day  of  Judgment.  In  such  a  day,  or 
period,  we  now  are  living.  The  law  delivered 
by  Christ  is  being  manifestly  executed  in  the 
experience  both  of  society  and  of  individuals. 


VII.]  "the  last  judgment."  191 

Beyond  the  grave  there  is  a  further  day,  or 
period,  of  Judgment,  when  the  evil  that  has 
escaped  fall  disclosure  and  condemnation  in  a 
world  of  fleshly  forms  will  no  more  escape, 
where  we  are  to  see  as  we  are  seen  and  to  know 
as  we  are  known,  where  everything  that  has 
been  veiled  in  the  body  must  be  manifested  in 
the  spirit.  So  searching,  so  complete,  may 
such  Judgment  be  anticipated  to  be,  that  we 
may  speak  of  it,  in  that  sense,  as  the  Judgment. 
But  to  this  we  go,  each  of  us  alone,  at  death. 
Not  in  a  mass,  but  one  by  one,  are  wre  to  be 
confronted  with  it  in  the  still  court  of  con- 
science, ablaze  at  last  with  the  unobstructed 
light  of  the  Most  Holy.  For  this  there  is  no 
waiting  of  long  ages.  As  soon  as  we  enter  the 
unseen  world,  our  Judgment  is  immediate,  at 
least  in  its  beginning. 

So  far,  then,  as  Eesurrection  is  to  be  re- 
garded as  antecedent  to  Judgment,  there  is  no 
more  postponement  of  the  one  than  of  the 
other.  The  immediateness  of  Judgment  after 
death  implies  the  immediateness  of  what 
Christ  calls  "  the  Resurrection  of  Judgment''' 
(John  v.  29.) 


Eemark. — With  reference  to  the  Jewish  sense  which  in 
the  above  exposition  is  attached  to  the  phrase  "  all  the 


192  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.      [CHAP.  VII. 

nations"  as  importing  only  the  non- Jewish  portion  of 
mankind,  it  has  been  said,  that  the  line  between  Jew  and 
Gentile  disappears  in  the  Evangelical  narrative  ;  that  this 
assumes  such  a  prevalence  of  Christianity  before  the 
coming  of  the  Lord,  that  that  phrase  loses  its  Jewish  and 
takes  on  the  Christian  sense.  This,  however,  imports  into 
the  historical  document  an  idea  of  which  it  contains  no 
trace.  In  Paul's  doctrine  of  the  spiritual  unity  of  the  race 
in  Christ,  "  there  is  neither  Greek  nor  Jew."  But  that 
was  a  revelation  which,  in  their  Master's  life-time,  the 
Apostles  were  " not  able  to  bear"  (John  xvi.  12.)  In 
the  sayings  of  our  Lord  which  Matthew  has  gathered  up,  a 
broad  line  is  drawn  between  "the  circumcision"  and  "  the 
uncircumcision."  The  Jewish  physiognomy  and  accent 
of  Matthew  are  unmistakable.  It  is  pre-eminently 
"  the  gospel  of  the  circumcision."  Unless  one  ignores  a 
fundamental  law  of  interpretation,  its  reference  to  "  the 
nations "  must  be  taken  in  the  historical,  idiomatic, 
Jewish  sense.  Whatever  else  may  be  questioned,  this 
certainly  is  beyond  question,  that  the  burden  of  proof 
rests  on  any  claim  that  the  phrase,  as  used  in  a  parti- 
cular instance,  does  not  refer  to  the  Gentiles  as  it  usuaily 
does. 


CHAPTEE   VIII. 

PABTICULABS    ELUCIDATED    BY 
PRINCIPLES. 


13 


CHAPTEK  VIII. 

PARTICULARS   ELUCIDATED   BY   PRINCIPLES. 

"  Tfie  Lord  Himself  shall  descend  from  heaven  with  a  shout, 
with  the  voice  of  the  archangel  and  the  trump  of  God,  and  the 
dead  in  Christ  shall  rise  first.  Then  we  that  are  alive,  that  are 
left,  shall  together  with  them  be  caught  up  in  the  clouds,  to  meet 
the  Lord  in  the  air:  and  so  shall  we  ever  be  with  he  Lord." — 
1  Thess.  iv.  16,  17. 

I.  So  far  as  we  have  studied  the  subject  of 
the  Resurrection  in  the  teachings  of  Christ  and 
of  Paul,  we  have  seen  reason  to  think  : — 

(1.)  That  it  is  not  reserved  till  the  end  of 
time,  but  is  now  taking  place  in  the  unseen 
world,  through  the  continuously  acting  opera- 
tion of  the  spiritual  power  which  was  manifest 
in  Him  who  said,  "  I  AM  the  Resurrection  and 
the  Life" 

(2.)  That  there  is  a  wide  difference  between 
the  Resurrection  which  ensues,  in  the  spiritual 
order  of  things,  upon  a  life  that  has  neglected 
to  cultivate  a  Christly  condition,  and  the 
Resurrection  which  ensues  upon  the  Christian 
endeavour  which  Paul  described,  when  he  said 


196  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [dlAP. 

that  he  made  all  sacrifices,  "  if  by  any  means 
I  may  attain  unto  the  resurrection  of  the  dead." 
This  is  what  Christ  calls  "  the  resurrection  of 
life"  in  the  full  harvest  of  spiritual  endea- 
vours;  the  other  is  what  He  calls  "  the  resur- 
rection of  judgment,"  in  life  that  is  not  life,  an 
existence  in  privation  and  loss,  destitute  of 
all  the  spiritual  fruits  for  which  no  seed  was 
sown.* 

(3.)  The  Kesurrection,  whether  "  of  life  "  or 
<(  of  judgment,"  is  not  a  single  and  simul- 
taneous event,  affecting  all  the  dead  at  the 
same  moment,  but  the  continuous  process  of 
the  rising  of  spirits  "  each  in  his  own  order" 
into  that  condition  of  existence  in  spiritual 
bodies  which  they  are  fitted  to  rise  into. 

(4.)  This  condition,  whatever  it  be,  involves 
such  a  conscious  experience  of  the  spiritual 
results  of  the  present  life  as  will  perfectly 
declare  the  Divine  jud<.mmt  upon  "  the  deeds 
done  in  the  body." 

(5.)  There  is  no  middle  state  of  waiting  to 
be  refurnished,  at  some  great  distant  day,  with 
a  body,  all  men  at  once,  nor  is  there  any  sub- 
sequent standing  all  together  in  the  bodies 
so  given  before  the  throne  of  God  to  receive 
Judgment  in  a  mass,  but  onward  movement 

#  Sec  Note  B,  appended  to  Chapter  iv. 


VIII.]       particulars  and  principles.         197 

ever  without  arrest  or  halt,  both  in  embodied 
life,  and  under  law,  and  in  the  Judgment-con- 
sequences of  continuously  operating  law  ;  as 
what  we  already  know  of  the  works  and  ways 
of  God  requires  us  to  believe. 

These  ideas  appear  to  be  expressed  in  a 
few  great  sayings  of  Christ,  and,  for  the 
most  part,  to  be  repeated  in  substance  by 
Paul. 

II.  But  difficulties  start  up,  when  we  attempt 
to  harmonise  with  these  leading  ideas  some 
particular  statements  which  we  find  chiefly  in 
the  writings  of  Paul.  Such  a  statement  occurs 
in  his  first  letter  to  the  Corinthians  (xv.  51,  52.)* 
"  We  shall  all  be  changed,  in  a  moment,  in  the 
twinkling  of  an  eye,  at  the  last  trump  :  for  the 
trumpet  shall  sound,  and  the  dead  shall  be 
raised  incorruptible,  and  we  shall  be  changed.''' 
Another  such  statement  is  made  in  that 
extract  from  Paul's  first  letter  to  the  Thessa- 
lonians  which  is  prefixed  to  this  chapter. 

On  such  passages,  and  on  others  that  have 

*  The  true  reading  in  the  original  is  doubtful.  The  "we" 
refers  to  those  who  shall  be  living  on  the  earth  at  the  end.  Of 
these  the  Apostle  says,  "  None  of  us  (who  are  then  living  on  the 
earth)  will  die,  but  all  of  us  will  be  changed."  So  verse  52  says, 
" The  trumpet  shall  sound,  and  the  dead  (all  hut  those  then  on  the 
earth)  shall  be  raised,  and  we  (all  then  on  earth)  shall  be  changed." 
This  admits  the  possibility  of  an  interval  of  time  between  the 
"  trumpet  "  and  the  change. 


198  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

already  been  examined,  the  traditional  concep- 
tion of  the  Kesurrection  rests,  which  even  now 
is  closely  patterned  after  the  belief  of  the  Jews 
before  Christ.  The  Jews  believed  that  the 
Christ  was  to  come  in  visible  glory,  and  that 
the  dead  were  then  to  rise  for  Judgment  amid 
the  terrors  of  a  day  of  fire.  The  Apostles 
inherited  this  belief.  As  one  of  their  earliest 
and  most  deeply  rooted  ideas,  it  had  an  influ- 
ence upon  their  way  of  thinking  and  speaking, 
which,  even  under  the  spiritual  teaching  of 
Christ,  they  never  quite  outgrew.  There  is 
profound  truth  in  it  underlying  the  pictur- 
esque description  we  are  familiar  with. 
But  an  error  has  overlaid  the  truth.  What 
should  be  regarded  as  purely  symbolic  and 
suggestive  has  been  taken  as  literal  and  repre- 
sentative. Thoroughly  Jewish,  mechanical 
and  unspiritual  is  the  current  representation, 
stereotyped  in  the  creeds  and  in  the  hymns,  of 
a  momentary  event,  a  supernatural  display,  a 
Divine  form  of  glory,  a  world -awakening 
reveille,  followed  instantly  by  the  simul- 
taneous rising  of  the  dead  out  of  the  dust  and 
out  of  the  sea;  the  re-clothing,  in  the  twinkling 
of  an  eye,  of  every  disembodied  spirit  with  a 
new  body,  the  transformation  of  the  world  of 
living  men  at  once  into  spiritual  conditions,  the 


VIII.]         PARTICULARS   AND   PRINCIPLES.  199 

massing  of  all  the  risen  and  all  the  changed 
multitudes  about  the  Judgment  throne,  while 
the  heavens  and  the  earth  melt  in  a  fiery 
catastrophe, — 

"  Dies  iras,  dies  ilia, 
Solvens  sseclum  in  favilla." 

Not  only  mediaeval  and  rude,  but  thoroughly 
Jewish  and  fictitious  as  this  conception  is,  it  is 
time  that  Christian  people  discarded  it,  time 
that  our  hymn-books  were  purged  of  it,  time 
that  what  is  true  in  it  were  separated  from 
what  is  not  true. 

One  of  the  most  instructive  phenomena  that 
have  recently  occurred  in  the  Christian  world 
was  the  convention  that  assembled  in  the  city 
of  New  York,  toward  the  close  of  the  year 
1878,  in  the  interest  of  one  of  these  super- 
annuated and  obsolescent  Jewish  fictions, — the 
advent  of  Christ  in  visible  form  and  in  display 
to  the  senses.  Including,  as  it  did,  some  of  the 
ablest  preachers  in  the  several  Protestant  com- 
munions, the  result  which  this  convention 
achieved,  through  the  wide  currency  which 
the  metropolitan  journals  gave  to  its  elaborate 
discussions,  was  the  most  significant  thing 
about  it.  That  result  was  the  incredulity  and 
apathy  with  which  the  Christian  public  gener- 
ally received  the  theories  of  the  convention. 


200  BEYOND  THE   SHADOW.  [dlAP. 

This  seemed  to  demonstrate  that  the  Church 
is  emerging  from  the  mediaeval  and  Jewish 
way  of  thinking  about  the  coming  of  the  Lord, 
and  about  the  Kesurrection  and  Judgment 
associated  in  the  Scriptures  with  it.  Few 
educated  Christians  care  for  the  millenarian 
theories,  because  few  are  content  with  the 
materialistic  way  of  thinking  that  is  common 
to  them  all.  Christian  thought,  however  un- 
defined, demands  a  more  spiritual  presentation 
of  the  doctrine  of  the  Lord's  coming.  In  these 
misconceived  prophecies  the  profoundest  truths 
lie,  still  waiting  their  time  to  be  reformulated. 
To  contribute  somewhat  toward  such  a  result, 
as  a  labour  in  which  many  must  co-operate,  is 
our  present  endeavour. 

III.  Now  how  shall  we  get  at  such  a  result  ? 
There  are  two  methods. 

One  may  first  tell  people  what  to  think,  what 
interpretation  to  attach  to  the  Scripture  texts. 
Or, 

One  may  first  show  people  how  to  think, 
what  principles  to  apply  in  order  to  bring  out 
the  truth  which  is  wrapped  in  the  imaginative 
language  of  the  Scriptures. 

(1.)  This  latter  seems  the  better  method. 
It  not  only  works  toward  the  true  result,  but 
gives  reasonable  confidence  that  the  result  is 


VIII.]         PAETICULAES   AND   PKINCIPLES.  201 

the  true  one,  because  one  sees  that  the  true 
way  has  been  followed. 

In  following  this  method,  which  shows  us 
Jwiv  to  think  upon  this  subject,  we  have  to 
apply  these  two  principles  to  the  interpretation 
of  the  Scripture-teaching  about  future  things. 

(a.)  The  facts  which  a  prophet  (like  Paul) 
reports  to  us  are  one  thing;  his  views  of  them, 
or  opinions  about  them,  are  another.  We 
accept  the  former,  we  do  not  always  accept 
the  latter. 

Through  the  glass  of  revelation  the  prophet 
sees  the  salient  facts  of  the  future,  as  one  sees 
far  off  the  summits  of  a  mountain  chain.  They 
lie  in  apparent  connection  with  each  other, 
projected  against  the  blank  sky  like  the  teeth 
of  a  gigantic  saw.  But  the  traveller,  on 
coming  to  the  mountain  chain,  finds  the  peaks 
draw  apart.  Between  those  which  from  afar 
appeared  close  together  he  finds  wide  valleys 
and  broad  plateaus  intervening,  of  which  the 
distant  view  gave  no  suggestion.  Thus  we 
may  find  the  testimony  of  prophecy  supple- 
mented and  qualified  by  that  of  experience. 
Paul  describes  great  facts  of  the  future  as  he 
sees  them  standing  forth,  one  next  to  another. 
Facts,  which  experience  will  show  separated 
by  a  wide  interval  of  progress,  as  the  coming 


202  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

of  the  Lord  in  His  Kingdom,  and  the  change 
of  those  on  earth  "to  meet  the  Lord  in  the  air," 
he  states  in  the  same  breath,  just  as  his  pro- 
phetic vision  discerned  them  in  the  same 
glance.  Very  likely  he  may  have  thought 
them  close  together  in  one  point  of  time. 
But  nothing  depends  on  what  he  thought. 
Paul's  personal  opinions  about  the  facts  of 
which  he  testified  bind  no  man's  judgment. 
Peter,  himself  also  a  prophet  of  the  future, 
tells  us  that  the  Divine  realities  are  larger  than 
any  man's  thought  about  them.  "  No  prophecy 
of  Scripture  is  of  private  interpretation."  The 
contents  of  prophecy  are  not  measured  by  the 
minds  of  the  prophets.  The  prophet's  private 
opinion,  however  manifest  it  be,  is  not  to  be 
confounded  with  his  official  testimony.  This 
is  the  New  Testament  doctrine,  as  in  1  Pet.  i. 
10 — 12,  where  it  is  said  that  the  prophets 
did  not  always  comprehend  the  significance  of 
their  own  testimony.  Our  conclusions,  there- 
fore, while  controlled  by  Paul's  prophetic 
report  of  certain  facts,  will  not  be  controlled 
by  Paul's  opinions  respecting  those  facts.  We 
shall  exercise  our  liberty  to  think  upon  those 
facts  in  the  light  of  our  times  as  well  as  in  the 
light  of  His. 

Few  persons  who  study  this  subject  care- 


VIII.]        PARTICULABS  AND  PKINCIPLES.  203 

fully  will  judge  that  the  Apostles  correctly 
understood  the  relation  and  connection  of  the 
facts  in  the  future  which  they  prophesied. 
Certain  as  those  facts  were,  the  opinions  of 
the  Apostles  concerning  them  were  not  always 
correct.  This  is  demonstrable  to  a  certainty. 
It  is  a  law  of  the  human  mind,  that  our  under- 
standing of  any  new  fact  is  regulated  and 
shaped  by  the  ideas  already  in  our  minds. 
This  was  illustrated  by  the  German  peasant, 
who  saw  for  the  first  time  a  locomotive  speed- 
ing along.  After  an  earnest  gaze,  endeavour- 
ing to  comprehend  the  secret  of  its  motion,  he 
at  last  ejaculated,  "  Es  mnssen  Pferde  darin 
seyn  (there  must  be  horses  inside)."  The  new 
phenomenon  he  explained  by  one  of  his  estab- 
lished beliefs,  namely,  that  a  wheeled  vehicle 
in  motion  must  be  connected  with  horses.  If 
not  outside  they  must  be  inside. 

Now,  it  is  demonstrable  to  any  one  who 
traces  the  history  of  Jewish  thought  upon  the 
doctrine  of  the  Messiah's  coming,  that  the 
Apostles'  minds  were  dominated  by  an  estab- 
lished belief,  which  unfitted  them  for  truly 
interpreting ,  as  distinct  from  reporting,  our 
Lord's  prophecies  of  His  coming.  This  belief 
was,  that,  in  the  nearness  of  the  Messiah's 
advent,  the  career  of  human  institutions  and 


204  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

governments  was  near  its  end.  The  world 
was  "  growing  old."  The  empires  of  the 
Gentiles  had  had  their  day.  "  The  end  of  all 
things,"  said  Peter  (1,  iv.  7),  "is  at  hand."  A 
grand  catastrophe,  not  a  grand  development, 
was  impending.  No  new  empires,  no  new 
civilisation,  no  new  continent  beyond  the 
sea,  no  age-long  progress  of  a  spiritual  king- 
dom "  growing  from  within  outward  "  (as  the 
philosophic  Church-historian  Neander  so  fre- 
quently describes  it), — but  a  "  descent"  of  the 
Lord  "from  heaven  in  flaming  fire"  wherein 
"  these  things  are  all  to  be  dissolved"  *  was  an. 
event  to  be  daily  expected.  Such  a  mode  of 
thought,  developed  by  the  apocalyptic  litera- 
ture t  which  had  saturated  the  Jewish  Church 
for  two  hundred  years,  does  not  give  way  at 
once.  It  can  be  transformed  only  by  ex- 
perience. Yet  such  was  the  prevailing  mode 
of  thought  in  the  minds  through  which  our 
Lord's  prophecies  of  the  future  have  been 
transmitted  to  us.  We  should  naturally  expect 
such  a  mode  of  thought  to  give  its  peculiar 
colour,  as  it  has,  to  the  Apostles'  testimony 
of  the  things  to  come.  Those  things  were, 
indeed,    as    the    Apostles    testified,    "  at   the 

*  See  Note  D,  appended  to  this  chapter. 
f  As  in  the  "  Book  of  Enoch,"  quoted  hy  Jude  (14,  15). 


VIII.]         PARTICULARS   AND   PRINCIPLES.  205 

doors,"  only  not  in  such  manner  as  they  ex- 
pected. 

"The  end  of  the  world"  was  at  hand,  but 
it  was  the  end  of  the  Jeivish  "  world,"  or 
"  age, "—the  end,  not  of  the  physical  but  of 
the  spiritual  course  of  things  then  current,  the 
end  of  the  period  preparatory  to  the  manifesta- 
tion of  the  Christ  as  the  spiritual  King  of  the 
world.  The  Son  of  Man  was  about  to  come  in 
His  Kingdom  ("  before  this  generation  shall 
pass,"  said  He),  but  not  in  any  display  of 
wonders  to  the  senses.  The  Kesurrection- 
period,  as  we  shall  presently  explain,  was  near, 
but  no  such  general  and  simultaneous  Kesurrec- 
tion  as  some  of  the  Apostolic  sayings  seem  to 
intimate.*  A  Judgment-period,  too,  was  near, 
but  no  such  general  and  final  Judgment  as  was 
probably  fancied.  Instead  of  a  final  catas- 
trophe, a  final  stage  of  progress  was  about  to 
open.  The  facts  were  about  to  take  place,  not 
as  brief  convulsive  events,  but  in  the  gradual 
unfolding  of  a  vast  and  age-long  development. 

(b.)  The  other  principle  to  be  always  applied 

*  Some  advance  in  thought  is  discernible  in  the  later  as 
compared  with  the  earlier  writings  of  Paul.  We  are  not  to 
suppose  that  he  gained  at  once  all  the  light  he  ever  had.  What 
he  says  to  the  Thessalonians  about  the  Resurrection  must  be 
supplemented,  perhaps  qualified,  by  what  he  says  later  to  the 
Corinthians. 


206  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

to  the  interpretation  of  the  Scripture  teachings 
is  this  : — 

Spiritual  truths  must  be  discriminated  from 
the  material  forms  and  fleshly  drapery  in  which 
they  are  pictured.  We  are  familiar  with  this 
principle,  but  we  need  to  be  more  consistent 
in  its  application.  We  have  learned  to  apply 
it  to  the  Old  Testament  descriptions  of  God. 
We  read  of  God's  hands  and  feet,  His  eyes  and 
ears,  His  arms  and  wings,  His  nostrils  and 
mouth,  and  even  of  His  fury,  jealousy  and  war- 
likeness.  We  speak  in  the  same  fashion.  We 
distinguish  between  the  spiritual  reality  and 
the  fleshly  form  of  representation.  By  God's 
"  ha?id"  we  refer  to  His  power,  by  His  "  eyes  " 
to  His  cognisance,  by  His  "  mouth  "  to  His 
revelations.  It  makes  no  difference  to  us 
what  ideas  the  Hebrews  may  have  attached  to 
these  fleshly  words  ;  we  attach  our  own  ideas 
to  them.  We  think  it  possible  that  even  the 
inspired  prophet  of  twenty-five  hundred  years 
ago  may  have  attached  to  such  words  an 
idea  of  the  Infinite  Sovereign  less  true  than 
ours. 

Now  consistency  requires  that  this  discrim- 
ination between  the  spiritual  reality  and  the 
material  form  should  be  carried  into  the  New 
Testament,    and    into    such    subjects   as   the 


VIII.]         PARTICULARS   AND   PRINCIPLES.  207 

Kesurrection  and  the  Judgment  and  the 
coming  of  the  Lord  to  judge  and  to  reign. 
We  make  some  such  discrimination  already, 
as  in  reading  John's  Kevelation,  where  few 
thoughtful  people  understand  that  God  has  a 
city  in  cubical  form,  with  real  walls  of  precious 
stones  and  gates  of  pearls  and  a  street  of  gold. 
But  we  must  carry  this  discrimination  con- 
sistently through  the  whole  range  of  thought 
in  which  spiritual  conceptions  have  heen  trans- 
lated, for  the  help  of  infantile  or  immature 
thought,  into  material  terms.  We  must,  in 
our  thinking,  translate  these  terms  bach  again, 
so  far  as  we  have  the  spiritual  discernment  to 
do  it,  and  power  to  grasp  an  idea  apart  from 
its  conventional  symbol. 

It  must  certainly  be  admitted,  that  the 
traditional  notion  of  a  great  catastrophic  day 
at  the  end  of  Time's  calendar,  on  which  the 
Christ  descends  in  fiery  clouds,  archangels  fly 
to  and  fro  blowing  trumpets,  and  a  police  of 
celestial  marshals  gathers  the  million  million 
suddenly-roused  occupants  of  graves  around  a 
great  white  throne,  to  hear  Divine  lips  utter 
words  which  doom  them  to  the  prison  of  the 
damned,  or  welcome  them  to  the  city  of  God, 
is  as  unlike  the  spiritual  reality,  as  is  the 
Hebrew  picture  of   a  Deity    with    arms    and 


208  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

wings  enthroned  on  the  vertex  of  the  blue 
arch  of  sky,  or  careering  along  in  a  chariot 
of  clouds. 

And  yet,  let  us  not  forget,  while  it  is  only 
a  picture,  a  fleshly  and  thoroughly  material 
symbol  of  a  spiritual  reality,  yet  it  is  a  grand 
and  awful  picture,  the  grandest  ever  drawn 
by  man.  The  reality  behind  the  symbol  is 
certainly  no  less  grand  and  awful. 

The  two  principles  now  laid  down  show  us 
how  to  think  toward  a  true  understanding  of 
the  Scripture  teachings  about  the  future.  We 
are  to  discriminate  the  facts  of  the  prophetic 
testimony  from  the  opinions  of  the  prophetic 
witnesses ;  also,  the  spiritual  realities  from 
the  material  symbols  and  forms  in  which  they 
are  conveyed. 

(2.)  When  we  thus  see  how  to  think,  the 
remainder  of  our  inquiry  is  what  to  think ; 
what  results  shall  we  come  to  in  the  appli- 
cation of  these  principles  ? 

Taking  the  statements  of  Paul  in  combi- 
nation, we  find  positive  testimony  to  certain 
facts.  These  facts,  however,  depend  not  on 
Paul's  testimony  only.  Christ  is  the  princi- 
pal witness  for  most  of  them.  By  comparing 
what  Paul  says  with  what  Christ  says  we 
are    able    to    distinguish     between    the    fact 


VIII.]        PAETICULAES  AND   PEINCIPLES.  209 

which   Paul    affirms   and    the   opinion   about 
it  which  appears  in  Paul's  language. 

(a.)  The  first  fact  is  the  coming  of  the  Lord 
— "  the  Lord  shall  descend'''  The  Lord  did 
come,  as  He  foretold,  before  the  generation 
which  heard  Him  speak  had  passed  away. 
His  prophecy  was  fulfilled  when  Moses's  seat 
as  law-giver  and  judge  in  the  religious 
world,  was  removed  by  the  destruction  of 
the  Temple,  and  was  replaced  by  the  throne 
of  Christ,  as  the  manifest  Head  of  the  King- 
dom of  God  upon  earth.  This  has  been 
explained  at  length  in  a  preceding  chapter. 
As  to  the  manner  in  which  Paul  expected 
the  Lord  to  come,  his  substituting  "descend" 
for  "come"  looks  as  though  he  thought  of 
a  coming  down  upon  the  world,  rather  than 
of  a  spiritual  development  within  the  world. 
An  external  coming,  a  descent  within  the 
sphere  of  the  senses,  was  certainly  what  his 
Jewish  training  predisposed  him  to  think  of.* 

*  We  can  hardly  avoid  noticing  how  an  Apostle,  who  at 
times  seems  to  see  profoundly  into  the  spiritual  teachings 
of  our  Master  about  the  future  things,  at  other  times  shows 
the  persistent  force  of  an  early  and  deeply  rooted  way  of 
thinking  on  them,  by  sliding  into  expressions  derived  from 
the  superficial  beliefs  in  which  he  had  been  educated.  Here 
we  seem  to  see  something  of  what  Paul  himself  felt  as  to 
his  situation  as  a  disciple,  or  "learner,"  when  he  said,  "  Not 
that  I  have  already  obtained,  or  am  already  made  perfect  " 
(Phil.  iii.  12.) 

14 


210  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

(b.)  Closely  combined  with  the  coming  of 
the  Lord  is  the  attendant  ministry  of  ancjds 
— "with  a  shout,  with  the  voice  of  the  arch- 
angel, and  with  the  trump  of  God."  The 
core  of  this  statement  is  furnished  by  the 
sayings  of  Christ  (Matt-  xxiv.  31  ;  xxv.  31), 
but  in  Paul's  writings  this  core  of  fact  is 
overlaid  with  Paul's  opinions  as  to  who  these 
angels  of  the  Son  of  Man  should  be.  I 
think  that  Christ  used  the  term  "angels" 
in  the  comprehensive  sense  in  which  the  Old 
Testament  makes  it  include  impersonal  as 
well  as  personal  agents  of  God.  Thus  we 
find  it  in  the  104th  Psalm :  "  He  maketh 
the  ivinds  His  messengers,  the  lightnings  His 
minister s''  Used  in  this  comprehensive  way, 
the  term  would  include  all  agents  whatso- 
ever in  the  service  of  the  Kingdom,  besides 
apostles,  missionaries,  and  the  "  ministering 
spirits"  (Heb.  i.  14)  who  are  beyond  our 
sight.  But  Paul  seems  to  have  thought  ex- 
clusively of  celestial  beings,  for  he  substitutes 
"archangel"  for  the  simple  and  comprehen- 
sive term  "angels,"  which  Christ  had  used. 
Here,  then,  while  accepting  the  fact  of  an 
attendant  ministry  of  angels  at  the  coming 
of  the  Lord,  we  must  revise  Paul's  opinion 
about  it.     There  are  angels,  no  doubt,  intel- 


VIII.]         PAETICULAES   AND   PEINCIPLES.  211 

ligent  beings  of  higher  rank  than  ours, 
but  these  are  not  the  only  angels  in  the 
service  of  the  Kingdom.  The  angelic  trum- 
pet-call which  our  Lord  foretold  took  place 
in  that  apostolic  preaching  of  the  Gospel 
of  the  Eesurrection,  of  which  an  echo  still 
reverberates  in  Paul's  quotation  to  the  Ephe- 
sians :  "Aivake,  thou  that  steepest,  and  arise 
from  the  dead,  and  Christ  shall  shine  upon 
thee"  (v.  14.)  Whatever  evidence  has  been 
displayed  to  show  that  our  Lord's  prophecies 
of  His  coming  have  already  entered  upon 
their  course  of  fulfilment,  so  much  reason 
we  have  to  bind  us  to  this  understanding 
of  the  part  that  "  angels  "  bear. 

(c.)  The  third  fact  is  the  Eesurrection — "the 
trumpet  shall  sound,  and  the  dead  shall  be 
raised  incorruptible:"  —  "the  dead  in  Christ 
shall  rise  first."  This  is  not  all,  but  this  is 
"first"  The  sounding  of  the  Gospel  trumpet 
through  this  world,  as  explained  in  the  pre- 
ceding paragraph,  is  followed  by  Eesurrection 
in  the  next  world,  that  is,  the  Eesurrection, 
"  the  Eesurrection  of  Life,"  as  explained  in 
Chapter  iv.  In  other  words,  the  period  of 
the  Gospel  here  has  corresponding  to  it  the 
period  of  Eesurrection  there.  Manifestly;  since 
the  Gospel    brings    men    under  the   spiritual 


212  BEYOND   THE   SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

power  of  Him  who  is  the  Resurrection  and 
the  Life,  so  that  they  strive,  as  Paul  strove, 
to  "attain  unto  the  Resurrection"  this  will  be 
followed  by  the  appropriate  spiritual  results 
in  their  rising  from  the  dead.  Corresponding 
to  this  period  of  Gospel  influence  and  Chris- 
tian endeavour  in  the  visible  world,  there 
must  be  in  the  invisible  world  a  period  of 
attainment  and  realisation  of  the  fruits 
thereof.  This  is  the  Resurrection  "at"  the 
coming  of  the  Lord,*  not  a  single,  explosive, 
simultaneous  event,  but  a  continuous  process 
throughout  the  whole  period  of  His  coming 
and  presence  ("  parousia")  —  the  rising  of 
those  who  are  prepared  into  that  for  which 
they  are  prepared. 

(d.)  The  last  fact  mentioned  by  Paul  is  a 
final  change  to  pass  upon  all  such  as  are  living, 
at  the  last,  upon  the  earth.  He  writes  to  the 
Corinthians,  "  We  [all  of  us  then  on  earth] 
shall  all  be  changed."  Some  years  previously 
he  had  written  to  the  Thessalonians,  "  We  that 
are  alive,  that  are  left,  shall  be  caught  up  in 
the  clouds."  Paul's  earlier  idea  of  the  Resur- 
rection was  apparently  that  of  a  single  and 
simultaneous  event,  with  a  change  of  the 
living  immediately  after.    We  must  revise  his 

*  See  Note  D,  appended  to  Chapter  v. 


VIII.]         PAETICULAES   AND   PRINCIPLES.  213 

opinion,  and  regard  the  Kesurrection  as  con- 
tinuing through  a  period.  But,  after  this 
period,  what?  Paul  speaks  of  a  "last  trump" 
a  final  summons  of  some  sort,  which,  accord- 
ing to  this  epithet  "  last"  may  not  be  the 
same  as  the  previous  Kesurrection-call,  and 
then  of  a  change  of  those  still  living  on  the 
earth. 

As  to  this,  whether  we  regard  the  opinions 
of  some  of  the  Greek  philosophers,*  which 
Paul  may  not  have  been  ignorant  of,  or  the 
opinion  of  modern  scientists,  or  whether  we 
regard  Paul  as  speaking  by  revelation,  as  he 
says  he  does  ("by  the  ivord  of  the  Lord"),  the 
conclusion  is  the  same.  The  Gospel-period 
on  earth,  the  Kesurrection-period  in  the  un- 
seen world,  will  sometime  terminate.  The 
existing  course  and  order  of  things  are  not 
permanent.  Though  we  may  still  be  far  dis- 
tant from  the  end  of  human  development  on 
earth,  yet  the  end  will  come.  Some  of  the 
prophets  of  science  tell  us  that  the  globe 
will  sometime  become  what  the  moon  is,  a 
planet  without  water,  without  an  atmosphere, 

*  Heraclitus  in  the  6th  century  B.C.,  and  Zeno  in  the  3rd  (the 
latter  the  founder  of  the  Stoics  whom  Paul  encountered  at 
Athens),  taught  a  doctrine  of  the  periodic  formation  and  anni- 
hilation of  the  material  universe.  All  things,  as  Heraclitus 
held,  originate  out  of  "  fire,"  and  ultimately  return  to  it. 


214  BEYOND  THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

incapable  of  sustaining  the  life  it  now  sustains. 
This  condition,  indeed,  they  set  at  an  im- 
mense distance  from  the  present.  Whether 
the  change  of  the  living  that  Paul  speaks  of 
be  long  anterior  to  this  ;  whether  it  is  to  be 
both  instantaneous  and  simultaneous,  or  in 
some  gradual  and  progressive  manner ;  whether 
the  suddenness  and  brevity  expressed  by  the 
phrase,  "in  a  moment,  in  the  twinkling  of  an 
eye"  be  true  only  of  its  beginning,  as  a  pro- 
cess, or  of  its  beginning  and  ending,  as  a 
momentary  event,  are  questions  which  only 
the  future  can  answer.  The  naked  fact,  how- 
ever, stands.  A  change  of  some  sort,  in 
some  manner,  awaits  the  present  condition, 
both  of  the  earth,  and  of  the  life  that  has 
been  adapted  to  it  as  at  present.  At  this 
"  end,"  we  are  told  that  the  Gospel  period  is 
to  reach  its  earthly  end.* 

Of  this  end  of  the  Gospel-period  on  earth 
Paul  seems  to  have  prophesied  in  the  grandest, 
but  in  some  respects  most  mysterious,  of  all 

*  Here  we  by  no  means  rule  out,  but,  on  the  contrary,  grant 
room  for  any  " miraculous  manifestations"  that  may  be  sup- 
posed destined  to  attend  the  close  of  the  earthly  career  of 
mankind,  that  is,  such  phenomena  as  would  have  produced 
in  the  apostolic  age,  however  resulting  from  physical  causes, 
the  impression  of  miraculous  "signs  and  wonders." 


VIII.]         PARTICULARS   AND   PRINCIPLES.  215 

bis    predictions ;   for    remarks    on   which    see 
Chapter  ix.  Note  D. 

"  Then  cometh  the  end,  when  He  shall  deliver 
up  the  Kingdom  to  God,  even  the  Father; 
ivhen  He  shall  have  abolished  all  rule  and  all 
authority  and  power.  For  He  must  reign,  till 
He  hath  put  all  His  enemies  under  His  feet. 
The  last  enemy  that  shall  be  abolished  is  death. 
For,  He  put  all  things  in  subjection  under 
His  feet.  But  when  He  saith,  All  things  are 
put  in  subjection,  it  is  evident  that  He  is  ex- 
cepted who  did  subject  all  things  unto  Him. 
And  when  all  things  have  been  subjected  unto 
Him,  then  shall  the  Son  also  Himself  be  sub- 
jected  to  Him  that  did  subject  all  things  untc 
Him,  that  God  may  be  all  in  all"  (1  Cor.  xv, 
24—28.) 

Our  endeavour  in  the  present  chapter  has 
been  to  discover,  if  we  may,  under  an  apparent 
dissonance,  a  real  harmony  between  the  pre- 
vious results  of  our  study,  as  stated  at  the 
beginning  of  this  chapter,  and  certain  pro- 
phecies of  Paul  upon  the  Resurrection  at  the 
coming  of  the  Lord.  Our  recognition  of  any 
such  harmony  depends  upon  the  influence 
upon  our  way  of  thinking,  which  we  allow  to 


216  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

the  two  cardinal  principles  already  laid  down, 
namely,  the  discrimination  of  the  prophet's 
testimony  to  facts  from  the  prophet's  personal 
opinions  about  them,  which  we  discover 
blending  with  his  testimony ; — then,  the  dis- 
crimination of  the  spiritual  fact  itself  from  the 
fleshly  drapery  under  which  it  is  represented. 

IV.  It  now  remains  to  ask,  What  is  the 
substantial  truth  conveyed  to  us  by  those 
specific  prophecies  of  the  Resurrection  which 
we  have  been  examining  ?  It  seems  to  be 
this  : — 

The  coming  of  our  Lord  in  His  Kingdom  on 
earth,  when  Judaism  was  supplanted  by  Chris- 
tianity, ushered  in  the  Resurrection-period  in 
the  world  to  come.  I  do  not  say,  began  the 
Besurrection,  as  if  there  had  been  no  Resurrec- 
tion before.  Of  this  more  will  be  said  pre- 
sently. I  say  rather,  began  the  period,  whose 
distinguishing  characteristic  is  the  manifested 
power  of  the  Besurrection,  "  the  Besurrection  of 
Life"  In  a  broader  statement,  the  Christian 
period  is  characteristically  the  period  of 
spiritual  life,  exalted  and  diffused,  and  this 
in  both  woblds.  Our  Lord  seems  to  have 
intimated  this  when  He  said:  "I  came  that 
they  may  have  life,  and  that  they  may  have 
it  abundantly."     (John  x.  10.) 


VIII.]        PARTICULAES  AND  PRINCIPLES.  217 

(1.)  To  comprehend  this,  let  us  reflect  that  as 
the  Gospel  spreads,  and  Christian  principles 
acquire  ascendancy,  the  glory  of  our  Lord  is 
manifested  more  and  more  as  Spiritual  King 
on  earth,  and  as  the  power  inwardly  working 
here  toward  the  Kesurrection  hereafter.  As 
faith  and  love  and  righteousness  and  fidelity 
to  Christ  here  inspire  greater  numbers  with 
the  spirit  of  the  life  eternal,  so  must  greater 
numbers  pass  into  the  unseen  world  fitted  to 
rise  through  Christ  into  the  fulness  of  life,  into 
what  Paul  calls  "  the  revealing  of  the  sons 
of  God,"  "  unto  the  measure  of  the  stature 
of  the  fulness  of  Christ."  That  is  to  say,  the 
greater  the  spiritual  development  before  death, 
the  greater  the  spiritual  development  after 
death.  The  period  of  the  one  must  coincide 
with  the  period  of  the  other,  for  continuity  of 
progress  marks  all  the  working  of  God  that  we 
can  see.  This  is  what  is  meant  by  saying, 
that  the  beginning  of  the  Gospel-period,  when 
the  Son  of  Man  came  in  His  Kingdom,  marked 
the  begining  of  the  Resurrection-period  corre- 
sponding thereto. 

(2.)  We  may  rest  confidently  in  this  conclu- 
sion, not  on  the  score  of  any  skill  in  interpret- 
ing the  original  language  in  which  the  facts 
were  uttered,  but  through  confidence  in  the 


218  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [dlAP. 

principles  which  guide  our  thinking.  The 
critical  question  is  not,  What  does  this  or  that 
Greek  word  mean  ?  but  this  rather  :  Hoio  shall 
ice  think  upon  the  great  facts  of  the  Kingdom 
of  the  Spirit  ?  Shall  we  cling  to  the  Jewish 
notion  of  an  advent,  within  the  sphere  of  the 
senses,  which  the  Apostles  inherited  and  never 
outgrew?  Shall  we  limit  ourselves  by  all  the 
opinions  of  the  Apostles,  as  if  Christian  ex- 
perience had  given  us  no  new  light  in  new 
developments  of  the  Kingdom  of  Christ  ? 
Shall  we  materialise  the  New  Testament  pro- 
phecies of  [Resurrection  and  Judgment,  as  the 
Jews  materialised  the  Old  Testament  pro- 
phecies of  the  Kingdom  of  God  upon  earth  ? 
Shall  we  ignore  all  that  men  have  discovered 
of  the  universality  of  law  and  the  continuity  of 
progress  in  the  works  of  God  ?  If  so,  let  us 
be  consistent.  Let  us  continue  to  believe, 
with  the  ancient  creeds,  in  "  the  Eesurrection 
of  the  flesh,"  and  the  reanimation  of  the 
buried  and  scattered  dust  into  "  the  self-same 
bodies."  But  if  this  is  beyond  our  present 
power  of  belief,  let  us  be  consistent,  and  make 
thorough  work,  till  all  the  rubbish  of  Jewish 
and  materialistic  and  mechanical  notions  has 
been  cleared  away,  and  this  great  doctrine, 
after  waiting  nineteen  centuries  for  intelligent 


VIII.]        PAETICULAES  AND   PEINCIPLES.  219 

elaboration,  is  unfolded  in  the  lucid  order  of 
Christian  and  spiritual  conceptions. 

Whoever  endeavours  to  strike  a  just  balance 
between  the  traditional  view  of  the  Resurrec- 
tion, and  that  which  has  been  presented  in 
these  pages  as  a  substitute  for  it,  has  one 
crucial  question  to  settle.  Is  the  Resurrec- 
tion represented  in  Scripture  as  a  single  and 
simultaneous  event,  affecting  all  mankind  at 
once,  such  as  a  universal  earthquake  would 
be  ?  It  cannot  be,  if  we  admit  the  testimony 
of  John  to  u  the  fiest  resurrection"  (of  which 
more  will  be  said  in  the  next  chapter),  or  if 
we  admit  the  testimony  of  Paul,  "each  in  his 
own  order"  Is  it  then  a  process,  running 
through  a  period,  and  operated  by  a  continu- 
ously acting  spiritual  power  ?  It  must  be,  if 
Christ's  Resurrection-power  be  not  exception- 
ally different  from  all  the  other  powers  which 
He  claimed  as  present  activities  by  His  signifi- 
cant "  I  am."  Now  as  soon  as  one  substitutes 
for  the  idea  of  an  event  the  idea,  of  a  continuous 
process  operated  by  a  continuous  power,  it  will 
be  found  that  various  perplexing  passages  of 
Scripture  are  readily  harmonised  with  this 
idea  by  applying  the  principles  of  thought 
that  have  been  followed  in  the  foregoing 
pages. 


220  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

V.  Brief  answers  may  now  be  given  to  a  few 
remaining  questions. 

(1.)  Did  not  our  Lord  repeatedly  say  that 
He  wou]d  raise  up  the  believer  "  at  the  last 
day  "  /  (John  vi.  39,  40,  44,  54)  and  does  not 
"at"  refer  to  an  event,  rather  than  to  the 
period  of  a  process  ? 

The  word  our  Lord  used,  en  (eV),  may  mean 
either  at  or  in.  The  idea  we  have  of  "  the 
last  clay  "  decides  which  of  these  two  mean- 
ings we  will  adopt.  If  we  think  of  "the  last 
day  "  as  an  event,  like  the  day  of  Pentecost, 
we  shall  say  "  at.,y  If  we  think  of  it  as  a 
period,  through  which  a  process  is  continuing, 
we  shall  say  "  in."  The  original  word  allows 
an  even  choice,  which  depends  wholly  on  our 
idea  of  the  "day."  Our  translators  probably 
had  the  idea  of  an  event,  and  preferred  to 
say  "  at."  I  have  the  idea  of  a  period,  and 
prefer  to  say  "  in."  By  "  the  last  day  "  it 
is  altogether  probable  that  our  Lord  meant 
no  end  of  the  earth's  calendar,  like  a  31st  of 
December,  but  a  day  of  centuries  or  ages, 
like  one  of  the  six  days  of  creation.  It 
denotes  the  last  period  of  human  progress 
under  Divine  revelation,  the  day  or  period 
of  our  Lord's  manifested  kingly  power  on 
earth,  and  of  the  coincident  manifestation  of 


VIII.]        PAETICULAES  AND   PEINCIPLES.  221 

His  Resurrection-power  in  the  unseen  world. 
If  this  be  so,  as  I  see  no  reason  to  doubt, 
we  may  believe  that  His  promise  is  now 
receiving  its  fulfilment  in  the  immediate 
Resurrection  of  those  who  "  depart  to  be  with 
Christ."* 

(2.)  But  is  not  the  Resurrection  still  a 
thing  of  the  future  rather  than  of  the  pre- 
sent ?  Is  it  not  written  that  "  the  dead  shall 
be  raised  "  ? 

The  Resurrection  certainly  is  future  to  all 
to  whom  death  is  future.  "The  living"  (as 
we  call  ourselves,  in  a  merely  phenomenal 
distinction  from  "the  dead")  must  ever  speak 
of  it  as  a  thing  that  shall  be.  But  what  a 
thing  is  to  us  does  not  define  what  it  is  to 
those  who  have  gone  before  us,  and  are  no 
more  among  us.  Speaking  of  them,  we  find 
that  Christ  in  talking  with  the  Sadduceesf 
does  not  say  ((the  dead  shall  be  raised,"  but 
"  are  raised"  or  "  rise."  In  the  world  of 
those  whom  we  call  "the  dead"  the  Resur- 
rection is  no  more  future,  as  to  us,  but  a 
present  reality. 

(3.)  Must  we  think  of  all  the  dead  during 
the    ages   before    Christ    as   waiting    for    the 

*  See  Note  D,  appended  to  Chapter  v. 
f  See  Note  A,  Chapter  ii. 


222  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

Eesurrection,  until  Christ  came  among  the 
living  to  say,  "I  am  the  Eesurrection"  ? 

Not  so.  The  Gospel-period  has  been  shown 
to  have  in  the  nature  of  things  a  Eesurrec- 
tion-period  coincident  with  it ;  but  this  does 
not  imply  that  there  was  no  Eesurrection  be- 
fore the  Gospel.  When  Christ  affirms  that 
"the  dead  are  raised,"  he  instances  Abraham, 
Isaac,  and  Jacob.* 

A  parallel  case  may  serve  for  illustration. 
John,  speaking  of  Jesus 's  lifetime,  says  that 
"the  Spirit  was  not  yet  given"  (vii.  39).  He 
does  not  mean  to  deny  that  the  Spirit  had 
been  given  to  the  ancient  prophets ;  he 
means  not  given,  as  afterward  at  Pentecost, 
in  general  diffusion  among  the  "people  pre- 
pared for  the  Lord."  The  Old  Testament 
reveals  the  Spirit  of  God  as  operating  with 
increasing  power  from  first  to  last.  But  in 
the  earlier  times  the  Spirit  appeared  limited 
to  here  and  there  "a  man  of  God,"  an  Enoch, 
an  Abraham,  a  Moses.  The  period  of  the 
Spirit's  diffusion  began  with  the  diffusion  of 
the  Gospel  of  the  Eesurrection. 

Thus  we  must  think  of  the  Christian  Eesur- 
rection, "  the  Eesurrection  of  Life,"  not  as 
beginning  when  the  Gospel   of  the  Eesurrec- 

*  See  Note  A,  appended  to  this  chapter. 


VIII.]        PAETICULAES  AND  PEINCIPLES.  223 

tion  began,  but  as  manifested  and  spreading 
when  the  Gospel  was  spread.  An  experience 
of  the  earliest  ages  for  as  many  as  were 
spiritually  fitted  for  it,  it  must  have  become 
more  frequent  as  spiritual  men  became  more 
numerous.  And  when  at  length  the  Gospel 
of  the  Eesurrection  began  to  be  proclaimed 
and  obeyed  in  this  world,  the  period  of  its 
manifestation  and  spread,  as  the  fruit  of 
obedience  to  the  Gospel,  must  have  set  in 
in  the  world  to  come.  Moses  and  Elijah, 
whose  glorified  forms  appeared  in  society 
with  Jesus  on  the  Transfiguration  Mount, 
attest  that  it  is  not  time,  before  Christ  or 
after  Him,  which  determines  men's  realisa- 
tion of  "  the  power  of  His  Eesurrection, ,"  but 
spiritual  fitness  to  rise  into  the  inheritance 
of  the  children  of  God,  personal  capacity  for 
the  power  and  blessedness  and  glory  of  the 
life  eternaL 

Here  we  may  utter  to  one  another  a  word 
of  comfort  and  hope.  The  life  that  follows 
Christ  on  earth,  the  life  that  rises  from  the 
dead  in  "  the  poioer  of  His  Eesurrection"  is 
one  continuous  and  unbroken  life.  The  sleep 
of  the  grave  is  but  a  figure  of  speech.  The 
crowded    waiting-room    of    an    intermediate 


224  BEYOND  THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

state,  anticipating  a  grand  and  general  open- 
ing   of    heavenly    gates,   is   a  mere    illusion. 
The  dreaded  "shadow  of  death"  is  attenuated 
to    a    thread,   where    only   a  gated    archway 
spans    the    road,  to  mark    the   boundary   be- 
tween  two  worlds.      That    road   is  light,   on 
this    side    the   archway   and    on    that.      The 
passage  of  the  shadow  is  only  the  passage  of 
the  gate  from  light  to  light.     No  pause,  no 
break    is  there   in    the   spirit's    experience   of 
the  power  of  Christ  to  guide,  to  nourish,  to 
deliver,  to  raise  through  grace  to  glory.     On 
earth  and  in  heaven  the  Christly  life  is  one, 
indissoluble,   eternal.     If  our  feet  are  on  the 
King's  highway,  if  the  Spirit  of  the  Lord  is 
"the  soul  of  the  soul,"  then,  though  a  cloud 
may  rest  on  the  horizon  of  our  mortal  pros- 
pect,   it    is   a   cloud    in   whose   bosom  glory 
dwells,    for    we    may    say    with    Paul,    "  He 
abolished  death,   and  brought  life  and   incor- 
ruption  to  light  through  the  Gospel"     (2  Tim. 
i.  10.) 

NOTE  A. 
ON   RESURRECTION   PRIOR   TO   CHRIST. 

But  now  hath  Christ  been  raised  from  the   dead,  the 
first-fruits  of  them  that  are  asleep.     (1  Cor  xv.  20.) 
The  statement  above  made,  that  there  must  have  been 


VIII.]     EESUEEECTION  PEIOE  TO   CHEIST.        225 

Eesurrection  prior  to  Christ  for  as  many  as  were  capaci- 
tated for  it  (Abraham  and  Moses  for  instance),  may  seem 
to  some  to  need  reconciliation  with  the  statement,  so 
frequently  made  in  the  New  Testament,  that  Christ  is 
"  the  first-fruits  of  them  that  are  asleep."  (1  Cor.  xv.  20, 
23),  "  the  first  born  from,  or  of,  the  dead"  (Col.  i.  18; 
Kev.  i.  5.)  To  see  how  this  is  perfectly  consistent  with 
the  fact  of  Eesurrection  prior  to  Christ,  we  have  only  to 
apply  the  distinction  already  pointed  out  (Chapter  iii.) 
between  the  language  of  appearance  and  the  language  of 
reality.  Christ  first  manifested  the  Eesurrection,  first 
walked  among  men  in  the  spiritual  body  (which  distin- 
guishes the  Resurrection  of  Christ  from  the  reanimation* 
of  Lazarus  and  others.)  He  thus  made  Himself,  relatively 
to  our  knowledge,  the  beginning,  or  "first-fruits  "  of  the 
Eesurrection,  that  is,  of  the  rising  after  death  into  blessed 
life  in  the  spiritual  body. 

This  does  not  conflict  with  the  fact  that  it  was  in  the 
spiritual  body  of  the  Eesurrection-state,  that  Moses  and 
Elijah,  previous  to  Christ's  Eesurrection,  were  seen  with 
Jesus  upon  the  Transfiguration  Mountain.  From  such  a 
manifestation  nothing  certain  could  have  been  known; 
questions  whether  they  were  phantoms,  or  something 
more  substantial,  could  never  have  been  answered;  the 
mystery  of  the  future  life  remained  as  inscrutable  as  ever, 
until  Christ  should  clear  it  up.  This  He  did  by  the 
experiences  which  He  granted  to  the  "  witnesses  chosen  of 
God,  who  did  eat  and  drink  with  Him  after  He  rose  from 
the  dead.,}  (Acts  x.  41.)  The  beginning  of  our  positive 
knowledge  of  the  Resurrection-life  in  the  spiritual  body  is 
therefore  found  in  Christ.  So  far  as  we  know  anything 
of  it,  Christ  is  "  the  first-fruits."  This,  however,  by  no 
means  makes  it  improbable  that  the  reality  existed,  before 
it  was  demonstrated. 

#  See  Chapter  iii.,  Note  B. 

15 


226  BEYOND   THE   SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

NOTE  B 
ON   THE   DOCTRINE    OF    A    PAST    RESURRECTION. 

Who  concerning  the  truth  have  erred,  saying  that  the 
Ecsurrection  is  past*  already ;  and  overthrow  the  faith 
of  some.    (2  Tim.  ii.  18.) 

As  distinct  from  the  heresy  here  condemned,  the  view 
presented  in  these  pages  is,  that  the  Resurrection  is  as  to 
its  beginning  past,  as  to  its  continuance  present,  and 
as  to  its  consummation  future. 

The  doctrine  which  Paul  here  censures  was  probably 
one  of  the  earlier  developments  of  the  Gnostic  heresy, 
which  in  the    next  century  became  so  widely  spread. 
Paul  had  described  the  present  state  of  believers  in  Christ 
as  a  new  and  higher  life,  and  had  compared  it  to  Christ's 
Besurrection-life  (Bom.  vi.  4) ;  nay,  had  spoken  of  it  as  a 
kind  of  Resurrection  (Eph.  ii.  6  ;  especially,  v.  14).     Pro- 
bably this  gave  the   starting-point  for  the   conception 
of  Hymen&us  and  Philetus,t    that  this  was  the   only 
Resurrection  to  be  thought  of.   Despite  of  Paul's  doctrine 
of  the  spiritual  body— a  doctrine  even  now  but  very  poorly 
appreciated  in  the  Church—the  Jewish  notion  of  a  resus- 
citation of  the  buried  body  from  the  grave  very  thoroughly 
penetrated  the  primitive  Church,  as  the  writings  of  the 
Fathers  abundantly  show,  embracing  in  its  anticipations 
even  the  teeth,  the  nails  and  the  hair.     This  doctrine, 
always  the  scandal  of  philosophy,  as  well  as  a  perversion 
of  Scripture,  drove  men  into  that  one-sided  view  which 
Paul  here  condemns,  which  gives  no  place  to  the  Christian 
conception  of  the  spiritual  body  of  the  future,  and  fixes 
attention  exclusively  on  a  present  rising  (already  accom- 
plished) to  higher  views  of  truth,  and  higher  ideals  of  life. 

*  More  literally,  "  is  already  come  to  pass." 
+  We  must  locate  these  two  at  or  near  Ephesus,  which  tra- 
dition makes  the  place  of  Timothy's  ministry. 


vni. J  david's  resurrection.  227 

This  Paul  regards  as  an  "  overthrow  of  faith,"  because  by 
refusing  to  look  at  the  crown  in  the  future  it  enfeebles  the 
energy  of  the  race  to  be  run  in  the  present. 


NOTE  C. 

ON  DAVID'S  RESURRECTION. 

For  David  ascended  not  into  the  heavens  :  hut  he  saith 
himself,  The  Lord  said  unto  my  Lord,  Sit  Thou  on  My 
right  hand.     (Acts  ii.  34.) 

In  what  Peter  here  says,  a  contradiction  may  appear  to 
the  statements  advanced  above  respecting  the  Kesurrection 
of  pious  men  before  Christ,  as  well  as  since.  I  think  it  is 
unquestionable  that  Peter  supposed  David  to  be  still  in 
Sheol,  waiting  for  the  Kesurrection. 

He  draws  a  sharp  distinction  here,  in  applying  the 
words  of  Psa.  xvi.  10,  between  Christ,  who  is  risen,  and 
David,  who  is  not.  Christ,  in  his  view,  was  not  left  in 
the  grave,  but  David  was.  This  being  evidently  Peter's 
opinion,  the  only  question  is,  What  account  must  be 
made  of  it  ? 

It  may  help  us  to  answer,  if  we  ask,  What  account  must 
we  make  of  the  statement  in  Psa.  cxv.  17,  "  The  dead 
praise  not  the  Lord,  neither  any  that  go  down  into 
silence"!  No  Christian  is  willing  to  adopt  that  as  a 
statement  of  the  truth,  or  of  his  own  belief.  There  has 
been  a  progress  of  doctrine  since  that  time.  Later  utter- 
ances of  the  Bible  correct  the  earlier. 

There  is  reason  to  class  Peter's  assertion  about  David 
with  the  assertion  of  the  115th  Psalm  about  the  dead. 
Peter's  case  may  be  described  in  Pastor  John  Robinson's 
remark  about  the  Protestant  Churches"  in  his  times  :  "It 
is  not  possible  the  Christian  world  should  come  so  lately 
out  of  such  thick  anti- Christian  darkness,  and  that  full 
perfection  of  knowledge  should   break  forth  at  once." 


228  BEYOND    THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

Peter  stood  at  Pentecost  on  the  threshold  of  his  apostolic 
career.  He  did  not  then  know  all  that  he  was  ever  to 
know.  He  had  not  gotten  clear  of  all  his  Jewish  notions 
in  a  flash.  \He  was  inspired,  but  not  omniscient,  not  in- 
fallible, anymore  than  the  writer  of  the  115th  Psalm. \ 
We  must  apply  to  his  statement  about  David  the  same ' 
principle  that  we  apply  to  the  statement  of  that  Psalm 
about  the  dead,  namely,  The  Bible  isaself-correcting 
booh.  This  remark  of  Peter  is  not  our  only  source  of 
knowledge  about  David's  Kesurrection. 

In  view  of  the  abundant  superseding  testimony  which 
we  have  found  in  the  Gospels  and  Epistles,  it  cannot 
stand,  any  more  than  the  statement  in  Ecclesiastes  (ix.  5), 
that  "  the  dead  Jcnow  not  anything,"  or  any  more  than 
Dr.  Watts's  hymn  based  on  that  passage  can  stand, 
though  it  used  to  be  sung  in  the  churches  not  long  ago. 

"  The  living  know  that  they  must  die, 
But  all  the  dead  forgotten  lie  ; 
Their  memory  and  their  sense  is  gone, 
Alike  unknowing  and  unknown." 

There  is  a  deal  of  false  doctrine  still  sung  out  of  our 
popular  hymn-books  about  the  Advent,  the  Kesurrection, 
and  the  Judgment,  which  is  destined  to  be  put  quietly 
away,  some  time,  to  keep  company  on  the  shelf  with  the 
above  stanza. 


NOTE   D. 

ON  THE  END  OF  THE  WORLD  AT  THE  DAY  OF  THE 
LORD. 

But  the  day  of  the  Lord  will  come  as  a  thief;  in  the 
which  the  heavens  shall  x>ass  away  with  a  great  noise, 
and  the  elements  shall  be  dissolved  with  fervent  heat, 
and  the  earth  and  the  ivorhs  that  a,  e  therein  shall  be 
burned  up.      Seeing  that  these  things  are  thus  all  to  be 


VIII.]  THE   END   OF  THE   WOELD.  229 

dissolved,  what  manner  of  persons  ought  ye  to  be  in  all 
holy  living  and  godliness,  looking  for  and  earnestly 
desiring  the  coming  of  the  day  of  God,  by  reason  of 
which  the  heavens  being  on  fire  shall  be  dissolved,  and 
the  elements  shall  melt  with  fervent  heat  ?  But,  accord- 
ing to  His  promise,  we  looJc  for  new  heavens  and  a 
new  earth,  wherein  dwelleth  righteousness.  (2  Pet.  iii. 
10—13). 

It  is  noteworthy  that  Christ  never  referred  to  an  end 
of  the  physical  world.  The  Greek  has  two  words  of  dif- 
ferent signification,  each  of  which  is  rendered  in  English 
as  "  world."  One  of  these  is  ceon  (aUv),  signifying  a 
period,  or  a  connected  system  of  causes  and  effects 
with  peculiar  characteristics,  continuing  through  such  a 
period.  We  use  "world"  in  the  same  sense,  when  we 
speak  of  the  Gentile  world,  the  Jewish  world,  the  heathen 
world,  the  literary,  or  religious,  or  political  world,  the 
world  of  our  forefathers,  etc.  This  word  ceon  is  the  one 
which  Christ  iemploys  in  all  His  references  to  "  the  end 
of  the  world,"  signifying  thereby,  nothing  more  than 
the  end  of  the  period  preparatory  to  His  enthronement 
through  the  spread  of  the  Gospel. 

The  other  Greek  word  for  world  is  Tcosmos  {k6<thos),  the 
specific  meaning  of  which  is,  first,  the  heavens  and  earth, 
or  the  universe  in  its  established  order ;  then  the  earth, 
or  world,  and  terrestrial  things  in  general,  especially  as 
dominated  by  an  anti- Christian  spirit.  It  is  the  end 
of  the  physical  Tcosmos  which  Peter  is  prophesying,  an 
idea  which  is  utterly  wanting  in  the  teachings  of  Christ. 
This  idea  of  the  destruction  of  the  Tcosmos  by  fire  appears 
in  the  speculations  of  the  Greek  philosophers,  as  well  as 
in  the  apocalyptic  literature  of  the  Jews  prior  to  Christ. 
lb  is  very  plain  from  the  course  of  thought  in  this 
chapter,  that  Peter — if  we  may  assume  the  disputed 
point  of  Peter's  authorship  of  the  Second  Epistle- 
regards  the  grand  catastrophe  of  the  physical  universe 


230  BEYOND   THE   SHADOW.    [CHAP.  VIII. 

at  the  coming  of  the  Lord  as  close  at  hand,  since  he 
addresses  his  argument  to  those  who  might  be  troubled 
by  its  delay. 

No  clearer  proof  than  this  can  be  looked  for,  that  the 
Apostles  occasionally  misinterpreted  their  Master.  It  is 
clear  that  in  such  a  passage  as  this  the  Apostle  does  not 
speak  infallibly.  That  he  speaks  as  an  inspired  man,  is 
also  clear  from  the  elevated  spiritual  tone  of  his  ex- 
hortation to  Christian  earnestness,  faith  and  diligence. 
It  is  in  the  moral  characteristics  of  the  Apostles'  writings 
that  the  evidences  of  their  inspiration  are  found.  The 
intellectual  judgments  even  of  inspired  men  were  neces- 
sarily conditioned  by  the  stage  of  intellectual  attainment 
at  which  they  stood,  within  the  narrower,  or  the  wider 
horizon  of  their  times. 


CHAPTEE  IX. 

THE    BESURRECTION   A    DEVELOP- 
MENT, NOT  A   MIRACLE. 


CHAPTER    IX. 

THE   RESURRECTION  A   DEVELOPMENT,  NOT  A 
MIRACLE. 

"  He  that  eateth  My  flesh  and  drinheth  My  blood  hath  eternal 
life;  and  I  will  raise  him  up  in*  the  last  day." — John  vi.  54. 

In  bringing  to  a  close  our  present  study  of 
the  Resurrection,  the  main  conclusions  thus  far 
reached  must  be  carried  in  mind.  The  Resur- 
rection is  not  a  far-off  event  of  the  future,  but 
a  continuous  process  now  going  on  in  the  in- 
visible world.  But  resurrection,  equally  with 
life,  is  a  word  which  has  a  higher  meaning 
and  a  lower,  a  full  sense  and  a  bare  sense.  In 
any  case,  it  denotes  entrance  into  embodied 
existence  in  a  future  state.  But  that  entrance 
may  be  either  into  what  is  bare  existence 9 
described  in  terms  expressing  its  poverty  and 
destitution,  or  into  what  is  full  existence,  de- 
scribed in  terms  expressing  its  richness  and 
completeness,  and  emphatically  termed  "Life." 

#  For  the  substitution  here  of  "in"  for  "at,"  see  the 
preceding  chapter. 


234  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

Which  of  these  is  the  future  portion  of  the 
spirit,  depends  on  Christian  endeavour,  in  a 
normal  and  necessary  relation  to  Christ,  as 
the  Eesurrection-power,  the  source,  morally 
speaking,  of  spiritual  well-being,  or  "  life." 
The  New  Testament  urges  us  to  such  endea- 
vour to  "  attain  unto  the  Resurrection"  by 
living  as  Christ  lived,  so  as  to  rise  as  Christ 
rose.  For  this  depends  on  fitness  to  rise,  on 
a  personal  possessing  of  the  Christly  capacity 
and  power  for  what  Paul  calls  "  life  indeed" 
(1  Tim.  vi.  19.) 

The.  chief  remaining  question  on  the  gen- 
eral  subject    concerns   the   manner   in  which 
Christ's  Eesurrection-power  works   its   effect. 
"  Hoto  are  the  dead  raised?"      This   is  even 
a  more  central  question  than  that  which  we 
have  already  considered  at  such  length,  When 
are   the  dead  raised?       We  are    now  better 
prepared  to  appreciate  the  answer  which  our 
Lord's  words,  quoted  at  the  beginning  of  this 
chapter,  unfold  to  thought.     This  answer  will 
not  only  give  us  confidence  in  the  conclusions 
already    reached:     what    is    of    still     further 
importance,  it  will  manifest  the  Eesurrection 
as  a  consistent  part  of  the  orderly  system   of 
God's  ivorks.     And  from  the  nature  of  Christ's 
agency  as  the  Eesurrection-power  it  will  show 


IX.]  DEVELOPMENT,  NOT  MIEACLE.  235 

Christ's  indispensableness  to  us  for  the  condi- 
tions of  the  Resurrection-hope. 

Premising  now  that  Resurrection  means,  in 
any  view  of  it,  entrance  into  a  newly  embodied 
existence  of  some  kind,  let  the  sharp  discrimi- 
nation already  drawn  be  well  kept  in  mind, 
between  Resurrection  in  the  full  Christian 
sense,  its  usual  sense  in  the  New  Testament, 
as  entrance  into  well-conditioned  and  blessed 
life,  the  fruit  of  spiritual  endeavour,  and 
Resurrection  in  the  bare  and  privative  sense, 
as  entrance  into  an  existence  which  is  devoid 
of  the  fruit  of  such  endeavour.  All  exist  here- 
after, not  all  live  ;  all  are  in  being,  not  all  iD 
well-heing,  save  so  far  as  endeavour  has  pre- 
pared the  conditions  of  well-being,  as  in  the 
present  world.  We  are  now  prepared  to  see, 
that  the  Resurrection  which  is  the  object 
of  Christian  hope  is  not  a  miraculous  new 
creation,  but  the  normal  development,  of  the 
fruits  of  Christian  endeavour,  in  that  life  in  the 
spiritual  body,  which  is  endued  with  power 
and  glory  by  the  Spirit  of  Christ. 

The  manner  in  which  the  Christian  Resur- 
rection comes  to  pass,  will  appear  as  soon  as 
Christ's  words,  already  quoted,  are  put  under 
the  lens  of  discriminating  thought  :  "  He  that 
eateth  My  flesh  and  drinketh  My  blood  hath 


236  BEYOND  THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

eternal  life;  and  I  will  raise  liim  up  in  the 
last  day" 

I.  Look  first  at  the  main  outlines  of  this 
statement.  Food  is  mentioned  first,  to  which 
the  flesh  and  blood  of  Christ  are  compared  in 
a  sense  that  will  soon  be  considered.  From 
food  comes  life,  and  we  are  told  that  from 
that  peculiar  food  comes  a  peculiar  life  ;  he 
that  eats  it  "  hath  eternal  life"  Life  tends  to 
advancement  of  some  kind,  and  this  peculiar 
life  tends  to  a  peculiar  advancement,  or 
exaltation :  "  I  will  raise  him  up."  Thus, 
in  the  main  outlines  of  this  great  saying, 
these  three  ideas — food,  life,  advancement 
—  appear  in  the  same  orderly  succession 
in  which  we  find  them  in  the  world. 
They  follow  each  other  in  a  connection  of 
natural  development,  like  the  parts  of  a  plant 
— root,  stem  and  leaves,  flower.  The  Resur- 
rection is  stated  as  resulting  from  what  has 
gone  before,  as  the  outcome  and  flower  of 
vital  processes.  It  is  the  consequent,  which, 
under  the  laws  of  spiritual  life,  grows  from 
such  antecedents. 

With  the  idea  thus  outlined  of  a  Resurrec- 
tion which  comes  through  an  orderly  devel- 
opment of  a  spiritual  effect  from  a  spiritual 
cause,    compare     the     traditional    notion    as 


IX.]  DEVELOPMENT,   NOT   MIRACLE.  237 

reflected  in  the  hymn-books.  There  is  to  be 
a  penetrating,  world-resounding  call,  a  sum- 
mons irresistible,  compelling  the  assembling  of 
all  spirits  in  a  mass,  angelic  trumpeters,  mar- 
shalling mankind  in  ranks  before  a  throne, 
Paradise  for  the  time  emptied  of  its  holy 
population,  and  Gehenna  of  its  wretched 
multitudes,  to  stand  for  a  brief  time  in  a 
Judgment  concourse,  and  all  these  newly  and 
simultaneously  provided  with  bodies,  which 
since  the  moment  of  death  they  had  lacked 
till  then,  bodies  innumerable,  all  built  "  in  a 
moment ,  in  the  twinkling  of  an  eye,"  from 
the  mortal  dust,  or  some  fraction  of  it,  that 
had  once  belonged  to  the  form  of  flesh  and 
blood.  This  is  the  traditional  idea,  but  we 
may  be  absolutely  certain  it  was  not  our 
Lord's  idea.  His  idea,  as  outlined  in  His 
own  words,  is  that  of  a  growth  from  within  ; 
the  traditional  idea  is  that  of  an  operation 
from  without.  Our  Lord's  thought  is  of  a 
development ;  the  thought  of  the  creeds  is 
of  a  miracle. 

Amid  the  contradictions  with  which  modern 
thought  assails  the  creeds,  it  has  become  of 
great  importance  to  form,  if  we  can,  a  true 
idea  of  our  relation  to  Christ  as  the  Kesur- 
rection-power,  and  to   understand   what   sort 


238  BEYOND  THE   SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

of  agency  He  asserts  when  He  declares,  "  I  am 
the  Besurrection  and  the  Life."  Unless  we  can 
have  a  rational  idea  of  this,  how  can  we  have 
any  but  an  irrational  faith, — a  saving  faith, 
perhaps,  but  a  puerile  faith  ? 

It  is  a  fact  beyond  question,  that  the  common 
notion  of  Christ's  agency  in  the  Resurrection 
directly  tends  to  create  scepticism,  and  rejection 
of  the  Gospel  of  life  through  Christ.  That 
notion  is  patterned  after  the  scene  at  the  grave 
of  Lazarus,  where  Jesus  stood,  and  "  cried  with 
a  loud  voice,  Lazarus,  come  forth.  And  he 
that  ivas  dead  came  forth."  This  instance  of 
simple  resuscitation  is  taken  as  a  type  of  Resur- 
rection* This  act  of  supernatural  power  in 
recalling  the  spirit  into  a  body  four  days  dead 
is  "  enlarged,"  as  the  photographers  say,  into 
a  vast  picture  of  Omnipotence  suddenly  recon- 
structing bodies,  and  reuniting  them  to  spirits, 
in  a  simultaneous  operation  upon  every  indivi- 
dual of  the  million  millions  whom  death  has 
unclothed  of  flesh  and  blood.  This  notion  is 
patterned  after  ideas  of  God's  mode  of  working 
which  modern  thought  has  for  ever  discarded, 
and  which,  whenever  Christian  men  present 
them,  only  furnish  fuel  to  scepticism.  Those 
who  still  persist  in  presenting  such  notions  as 

*  See  Note  B,  Chapter  iii. 


IX.]  DEVELOPMENT,   NOT   MIRACLE.  239 

the  teaching  of  Christ  are  simply  hindering  the 
Gospel  which  they  would  gladly  promote.  It 
is  a  duty,  which  we  owe  our  Lord,  to  show  that 
His  Gospel  is  not  responsible  for  fictions  that 
are  absurdly  ascribed  to  it. 

With  the  general  idea  now  in  mind,  which 
our  Lord's  words  have  enabled  us  to  outline, 
that  the  Resurrection  is  a  development  from 
within  us,  we  have  to  observe,  next,  that : — 

II.  This  agrees  with  facts  which  our  present 
form  of  existence  discloses.  It  is  said,  very 
truly,  that  a  body  is  given  to  every  spirit  in  the 
Resurrection.  But  the  same  is  true  of  our  life 
in  this  world.  Of  every  kind  of  organised  life  in 
this  world  it  is  true,  as  Paul  says  of  the  seed 
which  germinates,  "  God  giveth  it  a  body  even 
as  it  pleased  Him"  (1  Cor.  xv.  38.)  But  how 
does  God  give  that  body  ?  Simply  through  the 
methods,  or  laws,  of  organic  growth,  which 
He  has  ordained,  and  through  which  He 
works.  A  vital  power,  derived  originally  from 
the  Divine  source  of  all  life,  is  in  the  germ,  and 
this  builds  up  its  own  body  by  assimilating  the 
matter  which  it  finds  appropriate.  We  need 
not  here  affirm  whether  the  vital  power,  which 
builds  the  present  body,  is  in  one  or  another 
element  of  our  being.  Whether  it  be  in 
" matter,"  or  in  "soul,"  or  in   "spirit,"  it  is 


210  BEYOND   TILE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

enough  that  it  is  present,  for  the  energy  of  life 
is  the  body-building  power.  Simply  because 
the  tiny  germ  is  alive,  it  involves  "  the  promise 
and  the  potency "  of  the  fully  developed 
organism.  The  body  thus  formed  is  none  the 
less  "given"  by  God,  none  the  less  a  work  of 
God,  for  being  given  through  the  mediation  of 
a  body-building  power  operating  according  to 
natural  laws  of  growth.  Its  constitution  is  as 
Divinely  effected  as  if  it  had  sprung  into  mature 
completeness  at  a  fiat  of  Omnipotence. 

Now  our  conviction  of  the  invariableness  with 
which  God  works  through  law  impels  us  to  re- 
gard God's  way  of  giving  us  bodies  through  the 
operation  of  organic  laws  in  this  world,  as  indi- 
cating the  way  in  which  He  will  give  us  bodies 
in  the  next  world.  We  see  that  God  gives 
bodies  by  giving  to  existing  life  the  power  to 
form  bodies.  Within  the  mother's  body  }:% 
forms  a  new  body  in  the  babe,  whose  body  is, 
during  the  formative  processes,  a  part  of  the 
mother's  body,  while  unfolding  toward  a  dis- 
tinct and  separable  individual  existence.  Is  it 
a  gratuitous  fancy,  that  here  may  be  somewhat 
analogous  to  the  formation  of  the  spiritual 
body,  beginning  possibly  even  here  under  the 
physical  ?  We  need  hazard  nothing  beyond  the 
question.     The  general  fact  that  life,  zvherevcr 


IX.]  DEVELOPMENT,    NOT   MIRACLE.  241 

it  appears,  appears  to  be  a  body -builder,  deter- 
mines us  toward  some  general  conclusion.  We 
cannot  entertain  any  such  notion  as  that  living 
spirits  will  remain  for  ages  disembodied,  and 
then  all  at  once  will  be  clothed  with  bodies  by 
an  Almighty  fiat.  The  only  reasonable  and 
consistent  view  is  this  :  The  spirit  which  goes 
through  the  death-gate  into  the  future  is  a 
living  thing.  Whatever  the  origin  of  its  life, 
the  essential  fact  is  that  it  has  life.  Now  we 
must  attribute  to  life  everywhere  the  power 
which  we  see  it  manifesting  here.  If  life  exist- 
ing in  a  human  germ  here  is  found  building  its 
own  body,  life  existing  in  a  human  spirit  here 
or  there  will  be  found  no  less  able  to  build  itself 
a  body.  Very  probably,  for  aught  we  know, 
it  may  begin  to  build  the  spiritual  body  here 
behind  the  screen  of  flesh  and  blood,  just  as 
plant  life,  while  forming  the  seed  under  the 
husk,  begins  to  form  within  the  seed  the  leaflets 
that  are  to  unfold  into  the  future  plant. 

Of  what  substance  the  spiritual  body  is,  we 
know  not.  In  what  manner  formed,  we  know 
not.  But  that  the  body-building  power  is 
an  inalienable  prerogative  of  life,  cannot  be 
doubted.  What  sort  of  a  body  the  living  spirit 
shall  build,  or  is  building,  is  a  question  we 
may  well  be  content  to  postpone  for  the  far 

16 


242  BEYOND  THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

more  important  question,  which  each  of  us  is 
required  to  settle  by  his  own  action,  namely  : 
What  sort  of  a  spirit  is  it  which  builds  that 
mysterious  house  of  the  future?  In  this 
question  it  begins  at  length  to  dawn  on  us 
what  is  our  necessary  relation  to  Christ  as  the 
Kesurrection-power,  when  we  perceive  that 
He,  by  His  truth  and  love  and  righteousness, 
develops  and  perfects  the  spirit  that  is  to  form 
and  adapt  to  itself  the  spiritual  body. 

III.  What  this  relation  to  Christ  is,  is 
vividly  set  forth  in  His  saying  already  quoted : 
•'He  that  eateth  My  flesh  and  drinketh  My 
blood  hath  eternal  life,  and  I  will  raise  him 
up  in  the  last  day."  The  figure  is  intense, 
because  an  intense  thought  has  to  be  carried. 
Christ  must  be  in  us,  inwrought  into  us,  the 
very  "  soul  of  the  soul."  How  else  could  this 
have  been  so  luminously  expressed  as  by  the 
striking  figure  of  eating  His  flesh  and  drinking 
His  blood?  As  the  food  we  eat  and  drink 
carries  nourishment  into  every  part  of  the 
body,  so  that  there  is  not  one  tiny  cell  where 
it  is  not  built  into  the  very  substance  of  our 
frame,  so  must  Christ,  that  is  to  say,  Christ's 
Divine  Spirit  of  truth  and  love  and  righteous- 
ness, mingle  with  the  current  of  our  own 
spiritual  life,  carrying  the  power  of  His  Divine 


IX.]  DEVELOPMENT,   NOT   MIRACLE.  243 

life  into  all  our  affections  and  thoughts  and 
determinations.  This  is,  of  course,  a  process, 
a  growth.  He  syrnbolised  it  as  such,  and 
reiterated  the  very  idea  now  before  us,  when 
He  said,  "  I  am  the  vine,  ye  are  the  branches.''* 
(John  xv.  5.)  To  have  this  growth  constantly 
advancing,  never  arrested,  complete,  not 
partial,  is  the  object  of  that  endeavour, 
already  insisted  on,  which  distinguishes  a  real 
Christian  from  a  nominal  one. 

(1.)  What  now  is  the  development  which 
this  growth  unfolds  from  the  beginning 
onward  ?  Such  a  man,  says  our  Lord,  "  hath 
eternal  life"  This  does  not  mean,  has  a  pros- 
pect of  existing  for  ever,*  but  has,  has  now, 
that  hind  of  life  which  is,  in  the  nature  of 
things,  capacitated  for  well-conditioned  exist- 
ence in  any  and  all  worlds  and  times.  Evi- 
dently he  has  it,  for  he  has  the  Christly  spirit, 
whose  truth  and  love  and  righteousness  are 
the  eternal  powers,  which  involve  the  highest 
development  of  life  both  in  the  present  and 
the  future.  And  what  follows  from  the  fact 
that  he  who  has  the  Christly  spirit  has  the 

*  In  the  popular  notion,  eternal  life  is  assumed  to  mean  the 
same  as  endless  existence.  Granting  that  it  extends  to  endless 
existence,  its  primary  meaning  is  not  a  certain  extent,  but  a 
certain  hind  of  existence,  quality,  not  quantity  of  existence. 
(See  John  xvii.  3  ;  1  John  v.  11, 12.) 


244  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

eternal  life?  This:  "I  will  raise  him  tip  in 
the  last  day."  This  must  follow,  for  he  has 
that  in  him  which  must  rise,  even  the  Christ. 
While  he  lives  in  flesh  and  blood,  such  a  man 
may  say  with  Paul  :  "I  live,  yet  no  longer  I, 
but  Christ  liveth  in  me"  (Gal.  ii.  20.)  And 
when  the  earthly  tabernacle  dissolves,  he  may 
still  speak  in  the  same  spirit  of  fellowship  with 
the  Lord  of  his  life  :  "  I  rise,  yet  no  longer  I, 
but  Christ  riseth  in  me."  How  manifest,  that 
our  Lord's  idea  of  His  Resurrection-power  is 
that  of  an  agency  operating  not  from  without 
us,  but  from  within  !  The  cause  of  the  eternal 
life  which  the  man  has,  the  cause  of  his  being 
raised  up  in  the  last  day,  is  the  Christ,  not 
as  descending  from  heaven  in  clouds,  with 
dazzling  light  and  miraculous  energies,  but  as 
"  eaten  "  and  "  drunk  "  by  the  man  who  keeps 
the  word,  and  cherishes  the  love,  and  lives  in 
the  spirit,  of  Christ,  and  thus  builds  Christ  into 
his  own  spirit,  as  the  energising  and  develop- 
ing principle  of  his  life.  He  must  rise,  there- 
fore, because  Christ  is  in  him.  His  Resurrec- 
tion is,  therefore,  not  a  physical  but  a  spiritual 
fact,  the  development  and  flower  of  spiritual 
growth.  The  risen  spirit  carries,  as  every 
spirit  carries,  the  life,  whose  essential  property 
it  is  to  build  and  organise  a  body  to  itself 


IX.]  DEVELOPMENT,   NOT   MIRACLE.  245 

But,  what  is  of  vastly  greater  consequence, 
this  life,  building  the  spiritual  body,  is  the 
Christian  life,  capacitated  eternally,  that  is,  in 
the  nature  of  things,  independently  of  all  space 
and  time  relations,  for  vigour,  health,  blessed- 
ness, and  moral  glory. 

This  is  the  spiritual  and  Christian,  as 
distinct  from  the  mechanical  and  Jewish,  idea 
of  the  Besurrection,    as  the    entrance  into 

THAT  PERFECTED  STATE  OF  EMBODIED  BEING 
WHICH  IS  THE  SPIRITUAL  RESULT  OF  A 
CHRISTLY  LIFE    IN  THE  PRESENT  WORLD.      In  a 

superficial  point  of  view,  it  is  the  manifestation 
of  the  spirit  in  a  new  body.  In  the  central 
and  vital  point  of  view,  it  is  the  manifestation 
of  the  iv ell-conditioned  spirit,  the  Christly 
spirit,  that  builds  itself  a  body  appropriate  to 
its  Christly  condition  of  moral  glory.  This  is 
not  only  Kesurrection,  it  is  Besurrection  and 
Life.  And  here  at  length  we  have  reached 
the  full  significance  of  that  great  saying  of  our 
Lord,  at  which  we  began  our  study  of  this 
subject :  "I  am  the  Kesurrection  and 
the  Life." 

(2.)  What  "  the  first  Besurrection "  pro- 
bably is  (Eev.  xx.  5,  6),  begins  to  appear  at 
this  point.  When  we  conceive  of  that 
Resurrection    and    Life,  just    spoken    of,    as 


246  BEYOND    THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

realised  immediately  after  death,  when  we 
think  of  holy  men,  like  Moses  and  Elijah, 
like  Paul  and  John,  rising  up,  through  the 
Christ-life  in  them,  into  the  fulness  of 
spiritual  well-heing  in  the  spiritual  body,  we 
have  found  a  place  for  that  doctrine  of  "  the 
first  Resurrection  "  which  has  dropped  out  of 
Christian  thought,  through  that  mechanical 
misinterpretation  which  attributes  it,  as  a 
special  privilege,  to  the  martyrs.  "  The  first 
Resurrection"  is  not  the  getting  of  new  bodies 
before  others,  but  rising  into  life,  or  well-being, 
before  others.  New  bodies  are  insured  to  all, 
as  soon  as  the  mortal  bodies  drop  off,  but  the 
strong  and  glorious  Christly  life  in  the  new 
or  spiritual  body  is  assigned  only  to  the  holy  : 
"Blessed  and  holy  is  he  that  hath  part  in  the 
first  Resurrection  :  over  these  the  second  death 
hath  no  power,  but  they  shall  be  priests  of  God 
and  of  Christ  [engaged  in  ministrations  of 
Divine  grace  to  others],  and  shall  reign  [as  the 
loving  always  reign]  with  Him  a  thousand 
years."  The  period  of  a  thousand  years 
assigned  to  this  "reign"  Christian  thought 
will  not  measure  by  a  fixed  number  of  the 
earth's  revolutions  about  the  sun,  but  will 
regard  as  simply  a  period  of  vast  and  indefinite 


IX.]  DEVELOPMENT,   NOT  MIKACLE.  247 

duration.  It  is  the  Resurrection-period  that 
has  been  already  described  (Chap,  viii.)  as 
corresponding  to  the  Gospel-period*  "While 
"the  Gospel  of  life  "  is  here  ("  in  the  last  day," 
or  Christian  period  of  history)  preparing  us 
for  "  the  Resurrection  of  Life"  those  who  are 
made  fit,  through  Christ,  are  continually  rising 
into  the  Christly  life  beyond  the  grave.  But 
Christian  thought  cannot  regard  the  blessed- 
ness of  this  first  Resurrection  as  limited  to 
the  martyrs,  for  whose  encouragement  John 
originally  prophesied  it — "  the  souls  of  them 
that  had  been  beheaded  for  the  testimony  of 
Jesus"  etc.  Whether  or  no  the  prophet's 
thought,  in  his  light,  were  as  full  as  our 
thought,  in  our  light,  is  a  question  quite 
unimportant  to  raise  here.  Such  a  Resurrec- 
tion as  is  possible  for  us  to  believe  in  cannot 
be  dependent  on  any  such  external  and  acci- 
dental circumstance,  as  whether  a  man  were 
beheaded  for  being  a  Christian.  It  must  be 
equally   the    inheritance  of   all  who  have  the 

*  This  will  "be  found  stated  with  more  precision  in  Note  C, 
appended  to  this  chapter.  I  deem  the  thousand  years  to  be 
commensurate,  not  with  the  whole  of  the  Gospel  period,  but 
with  that  part  of  it  which  includes  the  whole  development  of 
Christianity,  the  period  of  the  growth  of  the  kingdom  of  Christ, 
from  its  initial  to  its  final  conflict  and  victory.  For  a  fuller 
explanation  see  the  Note  referred  to. 


248  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

spirit  of  Him  whom  the  prophet  calls  "  the 
faithful  Witness ,"*  the  Christly  spirit  of  self- 
sacrifice  and  faith. 

IV.  Our  study  has  now  brought  us  to  a 
point  where  but  little,  if  any,  doubt  can 
remain,  which  of  two  answers  we  must  give 
to  the  question,  What  is  the  Besurrection  ? 

(1.)  The  common  answer  is :  It  is  the 
giving  of  a  new  body  to  a  spirit  which  death 
stripped  of  its  former  body,  and  left  waiting 
in  a  disembodied  state. 

According  to  this  answer,  the  essential  thing 
in  the  Besurrection  is  the  bodij,  for  which  the 
spirit  waits,  in  a  state  of  privation,  and  which 
is  finally  furnished  to  it  by  a  power  from 
without  itself  through  a  Divine  fiat  and 
miracle.  Moreover,  this  re-embodiment  is 
spoken  of  as  "  the  general  Besurrection,''  one 
and  the  same  event  to  all  at  the  same  moment, 
simply  the  simultaneous  refurnishing  of  all 
waiting  spirits  with  bodies.  In  this  view  it  is 
hard  to  know  what  Christ  meant,  when  He 
spoke  of  those  "  that  are  accounted  worthy  to 
attain  to  the  Resurrection"  or  what  Paul 
meant,  in  speaking  of  his  struggle  to  "attain 
unto  the  Besurrection."  For  worthiness,  or 
struggle    to    attain,    is    out    of    the     question 

*  Literally,  the  faithful  martyr,  i.e.,  Christ."     (Rev.  i.  5.) 


IX.]  DEVELOPMENT,    NOT   MIRACLE.  249 

in   anything  that   is    to    be   a   general   event 
to  all. 

(2.)  The  answer  toward  which  our  study 
tends  is  this  :  Kesurrection  is  the  entrance 
into  embodied  existence,  after  death,  of  the 
spirit  to  which  God  has  given  the  power  of 
building  for  itself  the  spiritual  body.  The 
Kesurrection,  in  the  Christian  and  ideal  sense 
of  the  word,  is  the  entrance  of  the  Christly 
spirit,  with  that  power,  into  that  embodied 
life  which  is  "  life  indeed."  So  far  as  present 
endeavour  can  bring  it  to  pass  that  "  Christ 
is  formed  in "  us  as  "  the  hope  of  glory " 
(Gal.  iv.  19;  Col.  i.  27),  so  far  the  Kesur- 
rection is  a  thing  of  present  determination, 
and,  potentially,  of  present  attainment.  This 
seems  to  be  the  thought  which  underlies 
Paul's  expressions  in  his  letter  to  the  Philip- 
pians. 

According  to  this  answer,  the  essential 
thing  in  the  Kesurrection  is  the  spirit,  with 
its  character  and  its  corresponding  capacity 
and  power.  The  body  is  not  left  out,  but  is 
the  product  of  the  spirit's  life.  The  spirit  is 
not  left  without  a  body  in  a  middle  state  of 
arrested  development,  but  unfolds  the  con- 
structive power  of  its  life,  without  arrest,  in 
forming  its  own  body.     No  universal  miracle 


250  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CIIAP. 

is  demanded  to  form  new  bodies  on  the  instant 
by  the  million  million.  Instead  of  a  physical 
operation  from  without,  a  spiritual  growth 
from  within  builds  the  habitation  and  organ 
of  each  spirit,  according  to  the  endeavour  of 
each  in  obedience  to  the  laws  of  vital  develop- 
ment in  spiritual  health.  Does  not  the  fact, 
that  the  Resurrection  is  made  so  prominent 
in  what  the  Fathers  called  "the  spiritual 
Gospel  "  of  John,  speak  something  for  this 
view  of  the  Resurrection? 

In  this  view  of  the  Resurrection,  it  is,  as 
Christ  and  Paul  and  John  have  taught,  not 
the  same  general  event  to  every  individual. 
It  depends  on  what  the  spirit  is,  and  on  what 
it  has  become  by  its  life  in  this  world.  And 
so,  as  we  are  expressly  instructed,  the  Resur- 
rection is  the  grand  object  of  Christian  en~ 
deavour.  The  need  of  striving  to  "attain 
unto  the  Resurrection  of  the  dead"  now 
becomes  intelligible.  We  see  that  we  must 
live  as  Christ  lived  here,  in  truth  and  love 
and  righteousness,  so  as  to  establish  the  vital 
conditions  for  rising  there  into  a  true,  strong, 
and  healthful  existence,  according  to  the 
Christly  pattern  of  the  life  eternal. 

Let  the  reader  judge  which  is  most  likely 
to  be  the  true  answer  to  the  question,   What 


IX. J  DEVELOPMENT,   NOT   MIRACLE.  251 

is  the  'Resurrection  ? — the  one  which  is  mainly 
concerned  about  the  providing  of  a  new  body, 
or  the  one  which  looks  rather  to  the  condition 
of  the  spirit  that  carries  the  body-building 
power.  Which  best  accords  with  the  positively 
known  and  fundamental  fact,  that  God  works 
in  a  method  of  development,  and  with  con- 
tinuity of  progress  ?  Which  best  accords  with 
the  fact,  that  Christ's  idea  of  the  Kesurrection 
seems  to  be  that  of  a  spiritual  development 
rather  than  a  physical  operation,  an  inward 
process  rather  than  an  outward  event,  a  powTer 
manifested  rather  in  an  orderly  growth  than  in 
a  miraculous  explosion  ?  Which  best  discloses 
our  necessary  relation  to  Christ  as  the  Kesur- 
rection-power  amid  the  preparatory  processes 
of  the  present  life  ? 

V.  The  subject  of  the  present  chapter,  The 
Christian  Resurrection  as  a  Spiritual  Develop- 
ment from  within,  has  thus  far  been  studied  on 
the  positive  side.  To  bring  out  the  truth  with 
the  emphasis  due  to  the  subject,  the  negative 
or  privative  side  should  now  come  up  for 
contrast. 

What  if  this  spiritual  development  be 
neglected,  interfered  with,  distorted?  What 
of  those  in  whom  the  Christly  power  of 
well-conditioned  life   is    deficient   or  absent? 


252  BEYOND    THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP- 

They  live  hereafter  ;  but  how  ?  The  spirit 
forms  its  own  body  ;  but  ichat  spirit?  On  the 
spirit  all  depends.  We  are  sufficiently  familiar 
with  the  phrases  of  Holy  Scripture:  "wrath  and 
indignation,  tribulation,  and  anguish"  "  cast- 
away" "reprobates"  "the  worm  that  dieth 
not,  and  the  fire  that  is  not  quenched."  What 
else  can  we  know,  or  forecast,  that  can  invest 
these  general  terms  with  greater  defmiteness 
in  our  thought  ? 

If  one  principle  is  applied  in  our  studies 
more  frequently  than  any  other,  it  is  this :  to 
divine  God's  unknown  procedures  by  observing 
the  known.  Apply  it  in  this  present  question 
as  to  the  influence  of  antecedent  life  upon 
subsequent  life.  Death  is  our  birth  into  subse- 
quent life.  Our  life  before  that  birth  has  what 
effect  on  our  life  after  ? 

Must  we  not  reflect  here  on  what  we  know 
of  lives  in  this  world,  that  are  weak  or  dis- 
torted, miserable  or  depraved,  because  of  what 
we  call  "ante-natal  conditions"?  The  body- 
building life-power  was  interfered  with,  or  was 
deficient,  before  birth,  and  lo  !  that  interfer- 
ence or  defect,  brief  as  it  was,  manifests  its 
effects  in  years  of  ill-conditioned  life.  One  is 
deaf  and  dumb,  or  blind,  or  a  cripple,  or  insane, 
or  idiotic.     He  lives,  but  his  living  is  life  only 


IX.]  DEVELOPMENT,   NOT   MIRACLE.  253 

in  part.  The  ill  condition  is  grievous  enough, 
though  he  himself  is  not  to  blame  for  it.  But 
what  if  he  were  to  blame?  What  if  self- 
reproach  were  added  to  the  life-long  burden 
under  which  he  groans  ?  How  little  of  life 
would  there  be  in  such  living ! 

The  suggestion  reveals  a  cluster  of  con- 
jectures that  we  must  deem  more  than  mere 
possibilities.  What  are  the  precise  limits  of 
the  analogy,  we  cannot  affirm.  But  that 
here  is  an  analogy,  and  a  most  instructive 
one,  can  hardly  be  denied.  Seeing  how  our 
present  life  has  been  permanently  conditioned 
by  causes  transiently  operating  under  the  laws 
of  preparatory  growth,  we  can  hardly  resist 
the  persuasion,  that  the  laws  of  spiritual 
growth  now  operating  in  our  life  are  to 
develop  enduring  conditions  out  of  the 
transient  antecedents  that  we  now  have  the 
power  to  determine. 

No  one,  therefore,  who  perceives  and  in- 
telligently reflects  on  the  ante-natal  causes, 
which  determined  the  defective,  distorted, 
crippled,  impotent  sort  of  life,  that  we  see 
so  much  of  in  this  world,  can  avoid  putting 
to  himself  _  such  questions  as  these:  What 
if  I  allow  a  sceptical  habit  to  quench  the 
faith-faculty,  the  eye  of  the  soul  ?     What  if 


254  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

the  ear  of  obedience  to  the  Divine  law  be 
unformed  in  a  will  disloyal  to  right  ?  What 
if  conscience,  the  moral  reason,  become 
beclouded  or  subverted  ?  "What  if  the  under- 
standing be  not  informed  and  regulated  by- 
truth  ?  What  if  selfishness  spread  its  scrofula 
through  the  vital  currents  of  feeling  and 
thought  ?  Must  not  such  sins  against  the 
laws  of  spiritual  life  leave  their  enduring  mark 
in  ill  conditions  of  the  future  life  ?  If  the 
interference  of  only  a  few  days  or  hours  with 
the  normal  processes  of  life  before  our  mortal 
birth  can  perpetuate  its  evil  in  defects  of  body 
and  mind  to  the  full  term  of  old  age,  what 
perpetuation  of  evil  may  not  the  present 
transmit  to  the  future,  from  violations  of  the 
Divine  law  that  we  may  commit  in  forming 
the  spirit,  which  is  to  be  born  at  death  into 
the  hereafter?  The  gross  fancy  of  some  of 
the  Jews,  that  the  buried  body  itself  should 
be  raised  again,  with  all  its  defects  and 
blemishes  reproduced,  may  really  have  a  side 
of  truth  to  it,  as  a  picture  of  the  entrance 
of  spirits  into  the  future  life  deficient  and 
distorted,  impotent  through  moral  weaknesses, 
blind  through  unbelief,  deaf  through  dis- 
obedience and  wilfulness,  insane  because  in- 
capable  of   recognising    truth,    leprous    with 


IX.]  DEVELOPMENT,    NOT   MIEACLE.  255 

selfishness.      Beside    this,    remorse    for    self- 
inflicted  mischief.     Beside  this,  shame. 

For  what  must  we  infer,  when  we  see, 
further,  that  even  the  form  of  flesh  and 
blood  is  gradually  penetrated  by  the  expres- 
sion of  the  spirit  which  it  screens  ?  How 
even  plain  faces  become  transfigured  with 
the  beauty  of  loving  souls  ?  How  even  classic 
features  become  overcast  with  the  gross  look 
of  the  sensual,  or  the  hard  look  of  the  selfish, 
spirit !  Much  more  must  the  spiritual  body 
be  as  a  transparent  medium  to  reveal  the 
character  of  the  indwelling  spirit  that  has 
formed  it.  Then  must  the  word  of  the  Lord 
be  fulfilled  to  the  uttermost :  "  There  is 
nothing  covered  up  that  shall  not  be  revealed." 
(Luke  xii.  2.)  Screens  of  flesh  and  blood 
are  withdrawn.  "The  books"  are  "opened" 
The  self-registry  is  apparent.  The  work  of 
the  spirit  is  made  manifest.  And  what  is 
this  but  misery  and  shame  to  the  ill-con- 
ditioned, ivhose  sin  expresses  itself  in  what 
they  are  ?  What  is  this  but  a  "  revelation  of 
judgment  "  upon  "  the  deeds  done  in  the  body" 
which  are  apparent,  not  as  past  actions,  but 
as  a  present  net  result  in  an  existing  spiritual 
condition  ?  And  what  can  we  call  such  ill- 
conditioned    births    into    the   world    of    the 


256  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP 

Kesurrection — with  the  formative  processes  of 
truth  and  love  and  righteousness  so  ill- wrought, 
or  unwrought,  but  entrance  into  an  existence 
that  is  not  life  ?  What  is  it  but  "  the  Besur- 
rection  of  Judgment  "  ? 

Our  wisdom  on  this  subject  is  found  less 
in  utterance  than  in  silence,  as  soon  as  we 
attempt  to  pass  from  general  principles  to 
particular  phenomena.  We  see,  of  course, 
that  either  godliness  or  ungodliness  must  be 
the  general  character  of  every  spirit ;  that  is 
to  say,  that  the  prevailing  inclination  and 
tendency  of  every  one  must  be  either  toward 
God,  or  away  from  Him ;  that  there  can  be 
no  such  thing  as  moral  indifference  toward 
God,  inclining  neither  way.  But  whether,  in 
these  two  main  divisions  of  character,  there 
can  be,  as  most  pulpits  teach,  and  as  most 
Christians  believe,  only  two  sorts  of  exper- 
ience, complete  blessedness  and  utter  wretch- 
edness :  whether  there  can  be  only  two 
conditions,  complete  well-being  and  utter 
ill-being ;  whether,  even  among  "  saints,'' 
there  will  not  be  imperfect  ones;  whether 
crooked,  stunted,  weak,  and  faulty  growths, 
transplanted  from  earth's  nursery  to  Paradise, 
will  not  find  defects  of  blessedness  and  draw- 
backs   of    advancement,    corresponding    to    a 


IX.]  DEVELOPMENT,    NOT    MIRACLE.  257 

merely  partial  fitness  for  the  "  resurrection  of 
life " — are  questions  that  are  destined  to 
receive  more  thoughtful  consideration  than 
the  indiscriminate  positiveness  of  the  creeds 
has  thus  far  encouraged.*  But  amid  all  such 
questions,  to  which  the  experience  of  the 
future  realities  will  bring,  there  is  reason  to 
think,  some  unanticipated  replies,  one  principle 
may  be  held  with  absolute  certainty,  as  the 
fundamental  law  of  consequences  under  which 
all    life    is    lived  :     "  Whatsoever    a    man 

SOWETH,   THAT   SHALL    HE    ALSO    REAP."       Any 

view  of  the  future  that  harmonises  with  this 
may  be  true  ;  any  that  conflicts  with  it  must 
be  false. 

Enough  for  the  negative  aspect.  The  con- 
trast adds  fresh  emphasis  to  the  positive  side 
of  the  truth,  so  conspicuous  in  Holy  Scrip- 
ture. There  the  laws  of  spiritual  life  are  re- 
vealed, that  we  may  obey  them,  and  through 
obedience  rise  into  the  fulness  of  life.  There 
the  Divine  pattern  of  humanity  is  set  before 
us   in  Christ  Jesus  our  Lord.       He  Himself, 

*  The  Westminster  Assembly's  Shorter  Catechism  teaches 
(§37)  that  "the  souls  of  believers  are  at  their  death  made 
perfect  in  holiness  " ;  that  is,  all  believers,  one  as  much  as 
another,  to  whatever  greater  or  less  degree  sanctification  has 
spread  through  their  character  in  this  life,  find  themselves,  so 
far  as  the  sanctification  of  character  is  concerned,  equalised  by 
dying.    All  "  are  at  their  death  made  perfect  in  holiness." 

17 


258  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

in  His  truth  and  love  and  righteousness,  is 
commended  to  us  as  the  inwardly  working 
Resurrection-power.  His  sympathy  with  our 
struggle  in  our  weakness  stands  before  us  in 
the  symbol  of  His  cross,  to  draw  us  to  the 
beginning  of  an  eternal  fellowship  in  life  with 
Him.  "  Glory,  and  honour,  and  incorruption," 
in  a  perfected  spiritual  nature,  after  the  pat- 
tern of  Christ,  are  held  out  to  us  as  the  future 
flower  of  a  present  fellowship  and  following 
with  Him.  The  preparation  time,  how  brief ! 
The  fruition  time,  how  boundless  !  how 
blessed  !  Let  Faith  hear  :  let  Reason  judge. 
0  Divine  Hope  !  0  Divine  Helper  !  0  happy 
they  who  hear  His  voice,  and  walk  with  Him  ! 


NOTE  A. 

ON    THE    THOUSAND    YEARS,    OR    "  MILLENNIUM." 

And  I  saw  thrones,  and  tliey  sat  upon  them,  and 
Judgment  ivas  given  unto  them  :  and  I  saw  the  souls  of 
them  that  had  been  beheaded  for  the  testimony  of  Jesus, 
and  for  the  word  of  God,  and  such  as  worshipped  not 
the  beast,  neither  his  image,  and  received  not  the  marJc 
upon  their  forehead  and  upon  their  hand  ;  and  they 
lived,  and  reigned  with  Christ  a  thousand  years. 
(Kev.  xx.  4.) 

The  idea  of  a  millennial  period  of  glory  to  come  on 
earth  was  cherished  by  the  Jews  prior  to  the   time  of 


IX.]  THE    ,:  MILLENNIUM."  259 

Christ.  "  The  Jews  supposed  that  the  Messiah  at  His 
coming  would  reign  as  king  upon  the  earth,  and  would 
reside  at  Jerusalem,  the  ancient  royal  city.  The  period 
of  His  reign  they  supposed  would  be  very  long,  and 
therefore  put  it  down  at  a  thousand  years,  which  was  at 

first   understood   only   as    a    round   number 

This  period  was  conceived  of  by  the  Jews  as  the  return 
of  the  golden  age  to  the  earth,  and  each  one  formed  to 
himself  such  a  picture  of  it  as  agreed  best  with  his  own 
disposition,  and  that  degree  of  moral  and  intellectual 
culture  to  which  he  had  attained.  Many  anticipated 
nothing  more  than  merely  sensual  delights  ;  others 
entertained  better  and  purer  conceptions." 

This  millennial  hope  passed  over  from  the  Jews  into 
the  Christian  Church.  It  does  not  carry  Christ's  express 
indorsement  in  any  of  His  recorded  sayings.  Yet, 
doubtless,  some  of  His  expressions  might  bear  such  a 
construction,  and  probably  seemed  to  the  Apostles  an 
adequate  sanction  for  holding  on  to  their  traditional 
millennial  views  in  connection  with  the  kingdom  of  which 
their  Master  spoke.  "  And  I  appoint  unto  you  a  king- 
dom, even  as  My  Father  appointed  unto  Me,  that  ye  may 
eat  and  drink  at  My  table  in  My  kingdom;  and  ye  shall 
sit  on  thrones  judging  the  tivelve  tribes  of  Israel." 
(Luke  xxii.  29,  30.) 

The  kingdom  our  Lord  here  speaks  of  John  (Eev.  i.  6) 
explains  as  a  kingdom  of  priests.  It  is  the  loving  who 
gain  sovereign  ascendency  and  influence  ;  and  it  is  in 
the  sacrifices  of  Christian  love  for  others  that  the  royal 
priesthood,  which  Peter  also  speaks  of  (1.  ii.  9),  consists. 
In  these  sacrifices,  and  in  the  ascendency  gained  thereby, 
the  Christian  is  in  that  close  and  joyous  fellowship  with 
his  Lord  which  is  denoted  by  the  figure  of  sharing  His 
table.  What  we  are  to  understand  by  the  Apostles'  en- 
thronement and  judgeship  has  been  discussed  in  Note  A, 
Chapter  v. 


260  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

In  John's  Revelation  the  utterance  of  the  ancient 
millennial  hope  sounds  like  the  old  Jewish  anticipations 
reviving  in  a  more  spiritualised  form.  "  John  does  not 
there  speak  of  Christ  reigning  visibly  and  bodily  on  the 
earth,  but  of  His  spiritual  dominion,  resulting  from  the 
influence  of  Christianity  when  it  shall  at  length  be  univer- 
sally diffused  through  the  earth— a  kingdom  which  will 
last  a  thousand  years,  used  as  a  round  number  to  denote 
many  centuries,  or  a  long  period." 

The  admitted  Jewish  origin  of  the  millennial  hope,  and 
the  evident  Jewish  colouring  which  it  carries  even  in 
John's  mind,  may  disparage  it  in  the  view  of  some.  But 
the  fact  that  the  Jewish  nation  wTas  pervaded  through  its 
whole  career  till  Christ  appeared  with  a  spirit  of  pro- 
phecy, of  which  abundant  demonstration  is  furnished  by 
Christ  Himself,  may  seem  to  others,  as  it  certainly  does 
to  me,  good  ground  for  expecting  to  find  some  substantial 
Divine  truth  in  the  millennial  prophecy  of  John  under 
the  shell  of  the  local  and  temporary  form. 

Remark. — The  quotations  in  the  preceding  paragraphs 
are  from  Knapp's  "  Christian  Theology,"  page  538,  Am. 
Ed.  It  will  be  noticed  that  Dr.  Knapp  regards  the 
thousand  years  as  denoting  the  whole  period  of  Christ's 
kingdom  on  earth.  That  it  refers  rather  to  the  period  of 
the  kingdom's  growth  and  struggle,  up  to  its  final 
victory,  but  not  to  the  whole  period  of  the  kingdom's 
existence,  I  have  aimed  to  show  in  Note  C,  page  263. 


NOTE  B. 

ON    "  THE    FIRST   RESURRECTION." 

The  rest  of  the  dead  lived  not  until  the  thousand  years 
should  be  finished.  This  is  the  first  resurrection.  (Rev. 
xx.  5.) 

[For  the  coincidence  between  John's  teaching  andthat 


IX.]  "  THE   FIEST  KESUKKECTION."  261 

of  Christ,  in  regarding  living  and  rising,  after  death,  as 
equivalent  terms,  see  Chapter  ii.,  Note  A,  at  the  close.] 

Upon  this  we  have  to  observe  : — 

(1.)  They  "  lived  not."  Failure  to  prepare  in  the  pre- 
sent life  the  conditions  of  this  first  Kesurrection  (as 
described  in  our  foregoing  chapter),  subjected  them,  for 
the  period,  to  privation  of  that  blessed  condition  which 
is,  emphatically,  life,  or  "  life  indeed."  Their  existence 
is,  for  the  period,  here  viewed  as  an  experience  of  retri- 
bution for  their  unfitness  for  the  Kesurrection  of  Life,  just 
as  the  whole  period  of  a  long  earthly  life  is  often  bur- 
dened with  retribution  for  violation  of  the  laws  of  life 
during  a  few  months  or  days  before  birth.  This  period, 
indefinite  but  vast,  a  much  more  reasonable  as  well  as 
Scriptural  conception  than  that  of  an  endless  hell,  pre- 
sents a  motive  of  sufficient  urgency  to  deter  from  present 
faithlessness  all  those  whom  foresight  influences  at  all. 

(2.)  They  "  lived  not  until  the  thousand  years  should  be 
finished.'"  This  does  not  deny  that  they  might  live  after, 
at  least  some  of  them.  This  suggests  the  possible 
recovery,  at  least  of  some,  to  Life  in  Christ.  This  tallies 
with  that  hint  of  recovering  processes  which  is  found  in 
the  preaching  of  Christ  to  the  "  spirits  in  prison."* 
(1  Pet.  iii.  19.)  This  also  comports  with  that  doctrine 
which  Augustine  derived  from  Matt.  xii.  32,  namely, 
"  For  it  would  not  be  truly  said  of  some,  that  they  are 
forgiven  neither  in  this  age  nor  in  the  future,  were  there 
not  some  who,  though  not  in  this,  are  forgiven  in  the 
future/'  Heathen  may  hear  the  Gospel  there,  and  there 
may  prepare  the  conditions  of  ultimate  Kesurrection  to 
life.  That  all  will  do  this,  is  a  conclusion  that  cannot  be 
drawn  with  assurance  from  anything  within  the  range  of 
our  experience,  or  from  any  testimony  of  the  Scriptures. 

(3.)  Those  who  "  lived  not  "  are  spoken  of  as  a  class 
"  the  rest."     Into  this  class  some  are  continually  passing 
*  See  Chapter  iii..  Note  D. 


262  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

out  of  the  present  world.  Whether  others  are  meanwhile 
emerging  out  of  this  class  in  a  way  of  recovery,  or  what 
possibilities  and  opportunities  there  may  be  of  any  indi- 
viduals of  this  class  rising  out  of  it  into  Christly  life 
under  the  discipline  of  the  future  state,  does  not  come 
into  the  view  of  the  seer.  His  language  is  general. 
During  that  whole  period  there  is  such  a  class,  whose 
description  is,  "  they  lived  not."  Changes  of  condition, 
if  such  be  possible,  affecting  individuals  who  at  any  time 
are  found  in  this  class,  are  matter  not  of  prophecy  but  of 
speculation. 

(4.)  It  is  not  said  that  all  of  this  class  ("  the  rest  of  the 
dead  ")  attained  to  life  at  or  after  the  end  of  this  Resur- 
rection-period, Only  that  they,  as  a  class,  continued  till 
then  in  a  state  of  privation  consequent  upon  their  pre- 
vious life.  Of  individuals  nothing  is  suggested  in  any 
way.  Nor  is  there  any  clear  intimation  here  of  ar 
ultimate  Resurrection  of  Life  for  all.  We  may  believe 
that  the  recoverable  will  be  recovered.  But  what  of  the 
irrecoverable  ?     Will  there  be  none  such  ? 

Here  we  reach  the  open  door  of  a  great  question,  pre- 
sented by  the  doctrine  of  "  conditional  immortality."  The 
Scriptures  do  not  teach,  and  philosophy  has,  at  the  best, 
but  uncertain  ground  on  which  to  maintain,  that  all  who 
have  at  any  time  existed  will  always  continue  to  exist. 
The  Apostle  Paul,  in  four  remarkable  passages,*  declares 
that  unity,  not  dualism,  is  the  ultimate  state  of  the 
spiritual  creation, — that  all  who  exist  will  be  ultimately 
in  fellowship  and  spiritual  unity  with  God.  But  there 
are  strong  reasons  for  believing  that  all  who  exist  in  that 
ultimate  unity  are  not  so  many  as  all  who  have  existed ; 
that  some  will  ultimately  have  ceased  to  exist,  who  have 
made  themselves  incapable  of  the  eternal  life. 

*  See  Noto  D.,  Chaptei  v. 


IX.]        BINDING  AND   LOOSING   OF   SATAN.        263 


NOTE  C. 

)N   THE  BINDING  AND   LOOSING     OF    SATAN,    CONNECTED   BY 
PROPHECY   WITH    THE    FIRST    RESURRECTION. 

And  I  saw  an  angel  coming  down  out  of  heaven,  having 
the  hey  of  the  abyss  and  a  great  chain  in  his  hand.  And 
he  laid  hold  on  the  dragon,  the  old  serpent,  tvhich  is  the 
Devil  and  Satan,  and  bound  him  for  a  thousand  years, 
and  cast  him  into  the  abyss,  and  shut  it,  and  sealed  it 
over  him,  that  he  should  deceive  the  nations  no  more, 
until  the  thousand  years  should  be  finished :  after  this 
he  must  be  loosed  for  a  little  time. 

And  when  the  thousand  years  are  finished,  Satan  shall 
be  loosed  out  of  his  prison,  and  shall  come  forth  to 
deceive  the  nations  which  are  in  the  four  corners  of  the 
earth,  Gog  and  Magog,  to  gather  them  together  to  the 
war:  the  member  of  whom  is  as  thesandofthe  sea.  And 
they  went  up  over  the  breadth  of  the  earth,  and  compassed 
the  camp  of  the  saints  about,  and  the  beloved  city :  and 
fire  came  down  out  of  heaven,  and  devoured  them.  (Rev. 
xx.  1—3,  7—9.) 

This  vision,  like  the  Apocalypse  in  general,  is  intensely 
realistic.  Its  introduction,  describing  the  restraint  of 
the  world-deceiving  spirit,  connects  plainly  enough  with 
certain  sayings  of  Christ,  namely, "  I  beheld  Satan  fallen 
as  lightning  from  heaven  "  (Luke  x.  18) ;  "  Now  shall 
the  prince  of  this  world  be  cast  out."  (John  xii.  31.) 
Paganism  being  the  grand  obstacle  which  the  Gospel  of 
the  kingdom  had  to  remove,  the  binding  and  casting  out 
of  Satan  into  "  the  abyss  "*  undoubtedly  represents  the 

*  The  word  "abyss"  (ixfivo-cros)  corresponds  to  the  Hebrew 
Vhom,  uniformly  applied  in  the  Old  Testament  to  raging  or  roar- 
ing watery  depths,  whether  of  the  ocean  or  of  streams  and  floods. 
It  here  appropriately  designates,  in  a  shadowy  way,  the  proper 
home  of  rebellious  and  turbulent  spirits. 


264  BEYOND  THE   SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

restraint  and  suppression  of  the  deluding  spirit  of  Pagan- 

m  during  the  Gospel  period. 

The  term  "  the  nations,'"  regularly  denotes,  in  the  New 
Testament,  heathen  nations.  If,  instead  of  "  nations," 
we  translate  the  original  word  in  this  place  by  "  heathen,  * 
the  reasonableness  of  taking  the  vision  to  signify  tho 
suppression  of  Paganism  will  be  more  apparent.  The 
reference  of  the  vision  is,  of  course,  at  least  primarily, 
to  the  non-Jewish  nations  known  to  the  writer,  the 
Mediterranean  nations,  at  that  time  all  of  them  Pagans. 

This  suppression  we  must,  of  course,  think  of  as  having 
its  development  from  a  small  beginning  onward  to  its 
completeness,  just  as  we  conceive  of  the  Gospel  and 
the  kingdom  of  Christ,  in  its  opposition  to  Paganism, 
developing  from  its  germ  to  its  complete  supremac}'. 

If  this  be  the  correct  view,  then  the  loosing  of  Satan 
can  signify  nothing  but  the  revival  of  Paganism,  in  some 
form  or  other,  at  the  end  of  "  the  thousand  years" — a 
period  not  of  that  precise  number  of  the  earth's  annual 
revolutions  round  the  sun,  but  of  vast  and  indefinite 
duration,  the  period  of  Christianity  in  its  triumphs  over 
the  old  Paganism,  triumphs  that  are  still  in  progress. 
The  idea  of  this  revival  of  Paganism  is  here  externalised 
in  vision  as  a  gathering  of  the  hordes  of  barbarians 
from  the  then  unknown  north  ("  Gog  and  Magog  " — as 
in  Ezek.  xxxviii.  and  xxxix),  for  a  devastating  invasion 
of  the  Holy  Land. 

Of  course  it  is  impossible  to  regard  this  as  strictly 
representative  of  the  actual  reality  that  is  to  be.  An 
irruption  of  northern  heathen  is  not  to  be  reckoned  now, 
as  in  the  time  of  John's  writing,  among  the  possible 
apprehensions  of  the  civilised  and  Christianised  world. 
The  revival  of  Paganism,  and  Pagan  assaults,  must  be 
anticipated  in  a  form  that  is  modified  correspondingly 
with  the  changed  condition  of  the  world. 

The  essence  of  Paganism  is  in  the  deification  of  nature 


IX.]        BINDING   AND  LOOSING    OF   SATAN.        265 

and  its  various  powers,  including  man.  To  the  Pagan, 
matter  and  its  manifestations  are  everything,  and  spirit 
nothing  but  a  phantom  or  a  superstition.  Is  nothing  like 
this  beginning  to  be  apparent  in  the  midst  of  Christian 
civilisation  ?  The  modern  Paganism  is  what  we  call 
Materialism.  The  Paganism  of  the  past  will  not  rise 
again,  to  rebuild  its  crumbling  temples.  The  revived 
Paganism  will  redden  no  altars  with  the  blood  of  victims. 
Its  only  shrine  will  be  the  laboratory ;  its  supreme  being, 
matter  ;  its  demigods,  the  forces  in  matter ;  but  in  hostile 
scorn  for  what  it  deems  the  fables  of  Christianity  it  will 
rival  the  ancient  worshippers  of  Jupiter  and  of  the 
divinised  Caesars. 

The  gathering  of  "  the  nations  "  (or  heathen)  in  the  four 
corners  of  the  earth  is  wholly  symbolical.  This  mode  of 
picturing  the  revival  of  Paganism  is  due  to  the  fact  that 
the  old  Paganism  retired  before  the  expanding  power  of 
Christianity  toward  those  "  corners  "  in  all  directions,  like 
an  ebbing  tide.  Hence  a  revival  of  Paganism  is  repre- 
sented as  a  return  of  the  tide  from  thence.  MakiDg  this 
allowance  for  the  form  in  which  the  vision  is  cast,  we 
shall  deem  ourselves  released  from  the  difficult  supposition 
of  an  irruption  of  Pagans  from  Pagan  lands,  and  shall 
follow  the  indications,  already  apparent,  that  the  reality 
will  be  a  development  of  a  modern  Paganism  within  the 
bounds  of  nominal  Christendom  itself.  The  last  and 
subtlest  assault  of  the  enemy  of  Christ  will  not  be  made 
from  without  but  from  within  the  domain  from  which  he 
has  been  banished  in  form  only  to  return  in  spirit.  In 
the  new  form  of  the  reviving  Paganism  will  lie  its  hopes 
and  its  strength.  Its  "last  card"  will  be  confidently 
played.  Its  weapons  will  no  longer  be  such  as  mangle 
the  flesh  of  martyrs,  but  all  the  improved  modern  artillery 
of  science  will  be  appropriated  by  the  spirit  of  Atheism. 

Once  more,  we  are  not  to  literalise  the  vision  so  as  to> 
think  of  this  as  coming  on  suddenly.     Nothing  is  sudden 


2G6  BEYOND   THE   SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

in  the  development,  through  conflict,  of  the  Kingdom  of 
God.  The  ebb  of  the  Pagan  tide  was  gradual,  and 
gradual  will  be  its  return,  its  phenomena  slowly  spread- 
ing before  coming  to  a  head  in  ripeness  for  conclusive 
Judgment. 

But,  especially,  we  must  not  think  of  this  last  conflict 
of  Christianity  as  a  turning  back  of  the  onward  career  of 
the  Kingdom,  as  if  Christianity  had  failed  through  any 
waning  of  its  power,  or  as  if  a  gigantic  apostasy  had  left 
only  a  faithful  few  exposed  to  a  host  "  like  the  sand  of 
the  sea."  There  can  be  no  retrograde  movement  in  the 
development  of  the  Kingdom  of  God.  This  last  conflict 
with  Paganism  is  to  be  thought  of  rather  as  the  last  stage 
of  the  long  development  of  Christianity  into  its  ideal 
character,  and  as  the  means  to  its  consummate  manifes- 
tation as  the  religion  of  the  spirit.  Furthermore,  we  are 
not  to  think  of  the  final  victory  as  wrought  by  a  Divine 
interference  from  without  ("fire  out  of  heaven"),  but  as 
secured  by  a  Divine  development  from  within. 

To  put  the  issue  in  plain  thought  before  us,  let  us  re- 
flect how,  even  now,  as  ever  since  the  beginning,  religion, 
with  comparatively  few  exceptions,  is  externalised  in 
forms  of  church  organisation,  and  forms  of  ritual,  and 
forms  of  doctrine.  No  fault  is  to  be  found  with  this 
externalisation  of  religion,  so  long  as  it  is  needed  as  an 
education  to  what  is  higher,  but  only  when  it  contends 
for  perpetuity,  after  having  served  its  temporary  need  as 
scaffolding.  But  when  we  reflect  on  the  stress  that  is 
laid  even  now  on  religious  forms,  of  order,  ritual  and 
dogma,  as  compared  with  the  stress  that  is  laid  on 
religion  as  a  Divine  life,  we  are  convinced  that  a  long 
advance  has  yet  to  be  made  before  Christianity  manifests 
its  essential  life-power.  The  intellectual  Paganism  of 
to-day  is  not  convinced  by  theological  argument,  or 
affected  by  ecclesiastical  ritual.  It  is  thoroughly  im- 
pregnable to  a  religion  that  marches    in  the  mediaeval 


ix.]     "the  end." — "god  all  in  all."     267 

armour  of  forms.  It  easily  makes  head  against  a  religion 
that  is  weakened  by  the  sectarian  divisions  which  insis- 
tance  on  forms  creates.  It  can  be  vanquished  only  by 
the  spiritual  religion,  whose  unanswerable  argument  is 
its  own  baptism  with  the  Holy  Spirit,  its  transformation 
of  character,  its  reproduction  of  the  life  of  Christ  among 
men. 

The  reviving  Paganism  must  therefore  be  expected  to 
spread,  as  things  now  are,  its  false  prophets  tracking  the 
missionary  among  the  heathen,  and  gathering  proselytes 
among  dogmatists  and  ritualists  at  home,  its  denials  be- 
coming more  scornful  and  more  rampant,  until,  in  the 
crisis,  perhaps  in  some  unprecedented  "  revival  period," 
Christianity  learns  to  suppress  it  for  evermore,  not  with 
furm  and  dogma  and  organisation,  but  with  a  Divine 
life,  the  life  which  is  "  baptized  ivith  the  Holy  Ghost  and 
with  fire."  (Matt.  iii.  11.)  Then  will  the  vision  be  ful- 
filled which  showed  that  "fire  came  down  out  of  heaven 
and  devoured  them."  In  this  final  victory  Christianity 
will  pass  into  its  final  stage,  finding  its  unity,  not  in  form, 
but  in  a  holy  character  inspired  with  Divine  love,  and 
manifesting  both  its  maturity  and  its  power  through  its 
spiritual  life. 


NOTE  D. 
"the  end." — "god  all  in  all.*' 

Then  cometh  the  end,  when  He  shall  deliver  up  the 
kingdom  to  God,  even  the  Father ;  when  He  shall  have 
abolished  all  rule  and  all  authority  and  power.  For  He 
must  reign,  till  He  hath  put  all  His  enemies  under  His 
feet.  The  last  enemy  that  shall  be  abolished  is  death. 
For,  He  put  all  things  in  subjection  under  His  feet. 
But  ivhen  He  saith,  All  things  are  put  in  subjection,  it 
is  evident  that  He  is  excepted  who  did  subject  all  things 


268  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

unto  Him.  And  when  all  things  have  been  subjected 
unto  Him,  then  shall  the  Son  also  Himself  be  subjected 
to  Him  that  did  subject  all  things  unto  Him,  that  God 
may  be  all  in  all.     (1  Cor.  xv.  24 — 28.) 

The  view  developed  in  this  volume  presents  a  Besurrec- 
tion  that  is  now  proceeding  in  the  unseen  world,  and  that 
shall  be  consummated  when  the  mediatorial  work  of 
Christ  is  complete  in  the  redemption  of  the  race. 

Of  such  a  consummation  the  Apostle  speaks  in  the 
passage  now  before  us.  Observe  that  "  the  end  "  signi- 
fies, not  a  finality,  but  a  consummation,  not  merely  a 
limit  which  ends  what  has  gone  before,  but  a  threshold 
bej-ond  which  opens  a  new  stage  of  existence.*  Where 
the  work  of  the  Mediator  ends,  there  the  reign  of  God 
without  a  Mediator  begins.  That  God  may  reign  without 
a  Mediator,  the  Mediator,  having  finished  His  work  of 
redemption,  is  represented  as  delivering  His  temporary 
sovereignty  back  to  God. 

To  enlarge  upon  this  somewhat  mysterious  prophecj', 
and  to  develop,  so  far  as  may  be,  all  its  suggestive  hints, 
is  not  to  the  present  purpose. 

It  does  not  seem  to  be  the  Apostle's  object  here  to 
make  any  discrimination  between  different  destinies,  or 
to  pronounce  concerning  the  ultimate  state  of  such  as 
reject  the  Gospel.  For  a  discussion  of  this  point  see  Note 
D,  Chapter  v. 

So  far  as  light  is  sought  from  this  passage  upon  the 
doctrine  of  the  Trinity,  as  to  which  it  was  a  favourite 
with  the  Arians,  nothing  can  be  gathered  beyond  in- 
ferences that  are  more  or  less  dubious.  But  so  far  as  it 
is  interrogated  concerning  the  ultimate  state  of  the  moral 
universe,  it  seems  to  describe  that  state  as  moral  unit)/ 
wholly  centred  in  God.    According  to  the  character  of 

*  This  is  the  recognised  sense  of  the  Greek  word,  Tthos> 
"end." 


IX.]       "  THE    END." — "  GOD   ALL   IN   ALL."       269 

each  individual,  God  will  cause  Himself  to  be  directly 
realised  by  each  as  the  all-pervading  and  controlling 
power.  But,  in  this  connection,  the  language  used  of 
the  subjection  and  destruction  of  refractory  elements, 
''enemies,"  seems  to  be  less  in  harmony  with  the  idea 
of  universal  restoration  than  with  that  of  the  ultimate 
perishing  of  the  incorrigible  and  irrecoverable  out  of 
existence. 

But, — specially,  this  prophecy  of  the  end  not  only 
points  to  the  ultimate  consummation  of  the  Kesurrection- 
Ijeriocl,  when  the  last  of  all  who  are  to  die  shall  have 
risen  in  the  Christly  life  of  the  future,  but  it  quite  as 
certainly  points  to  the  consummation  of  each  individual 
Christian's  hope,  as  each  attains  "  the  end  of  faith  in 
the  salvation  of  the  soul."  (1  Pet.  i.  9.)  The  consumma- 
tion, or  "  end,"  when  God  shall  be  "All  in  all  "  to  each 
of  the  godly,  is  not  to  be  waited  for  by  the  men  of  every 
age  till  a  definite  point  in  the  far-off  future,  any  more 
than  the  Ptesurrection  is  to  be  waited  for.  It  is  not 
chronology  but  spiritual  capacity,  not  time  but  personal 
fitness,  which  determines  that  experience  in  the  case  of 
each  godly  spirit. 

Paul,  for  instance,  rising  from  the  dead  as  soon  as 
"  the  earthly  house  is  dissolved,"  finds  the  moral  conflict 
of  this  life  (so  intensely  described  in  his  sixth  chapter  to 
the  Ephesians  as  involving  even  invisible  powers)  ended, 
for  him,  in  the  putting  down  of  "  all  rule  and  authority 
and  power"  (verse  24)  that  hindered  his  struggle.  For 
him  "  the  last  enemy  is  abolished  "  (verse  26)  when  he 
has  triumphed  over  death.  And  then,  the  process  of 
Redemption  being  complete  in  him,  the  mediatorial  work 
and  reign  of  Christ  ends  for  him,  as  it  will  ultimately 
end  for  all.  Through  Christ  he  has  come  to  God,  and 
needs  no  longer  a  Great  High  Priest  by  whom  to  come. 
He  has  reached  the  end  of  seeing  "  in  a  mirror,  darkly," 


270  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.       [CHAP.  IX. 

and  the  beginning  of  seeing  "face  to  face."  He  has 
crossed  the  threshold  of  that  career  whose  eternal  course 
will  be  in  perpetually  learning  of  God  and  serving  God,— 
in  which  the  Son  gives  the  first  place,  both  in  our  know- 
ledge and  our  service,  to  the  Father,  and  "  in  all "  of  the 
redeemed  God  is  "All"  that  each  one  needs. 


CHAPTER    X. 
SUMMARY-  AND    CONCLUSION. 


CHAPTEE  X. 

SUMMAKY   AND    CONCLUSION. 

"  Rave  ye  understood  all  these  things  ?  They  say  unto  Rimr 
Yea.  And  He  said  unto  them,  Therefore  every  scribe  who  hath 
been  made  a  disciple  to  the  kingdom  of  heaven  is  like  unto  a  man 
that  is  a  householder,  which  bringeth  forth  out  of  his  treasure 
things  new  and  old." — Matt.  xiii.  51,  52. 

The  course  of  thought  followed  in  these 
studies  upon  the  Kesurrection  has  been 
adapted  to  what  seems  the  most  hopeful  way 
of  obviating  the  difficulties  to  be  encountered 
in  a  transition  from  the  Jewish  to  the  Chris- 
tian way  of  thinking  upon  the  Kingdom  of 
Christ,  and  on  the  method  of  its  progress  to 
its  consummation.  The  main  points  that  have 
been  made,  with  here  and  there  some  unavoid- 
able diffuseness  and  repetition,  as  we  have 
gone  on,  must  now  be  more  compactly  put 
together  in  a  brief  review,  and  this  may  as 
well  be  in  an  order  varying  somewhat  from 
that  which  we  have  followed. 

I.  The  Jews  in   Christ's   time   possessed   a. 

IS 


274  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

well-defined  doctrine  of  a  Resurrection  of  the 
buried  body,  a  coming  of  the  Messiah,  or 
Christ,  in  externalised  glory,  to  raise  the 
dead,  and  a  Divine  Judgment  to  be  executed 
by  Him,  at  the  Resurrection,  in  bestowing 
favour  and  glory  on  His  people,  and  inflict- 
ing retribution  on  the  heathen  and  the  un- 
godly. The  Apostles,  as  Jews,  had  been  im- 
bued with  this  doctrine,  and  were  naturally 
disposed  to  understand  what  our  Lord  said 
of  the  Resurrection,  His  advent,  and  the 
Judgment,  in  the  externalising  sense  in  which 
these  terms  were  then  generally  employed. 

II.  Our  conclusions  from  the  apostolic  pro- 
phecies of  the  Advent,  the  Resurrection,  and 
the  Judgment,  must  be  determined  by  our 
conception  of  the  influence  of  inspiration,  as 
wholly  lifting  or  not  wholly  lifting  the  writers 
out  of  their  inherited  opinions  and  preposses- 
sions, as  to  the  manner  and  the  relation  of 
those  great  facts  in  the  development  of  the 
Kingdom  of  Christ.  And  this,  in  turn,  is  to 
be  determined  not  by  deduction  from  airy 
principles  laid  down  by  dogmatic  theology, 
but  by  induction  from  the  facts  manifest  in 
the  apostolic  writings.  The  Second  Epistle  of 
Peter,  for  instance,  anticipates,  as  an  event 
so  near  that  its  delay   demands  and   receives 


X.]  SUMMARY  AND   CONCLUSION.  275 

an  explanation,  an  advent  of  the  Lord,  which 
is  to  be  attended  by  the  dissolution  of  the 
physical  heavens  and  earth.  The  origin  of 
such  an  anticipation  cannot  be  found  in  any 
teachings  of  Christ,  but  it  is  on  record  as  one 
of  the  opinions  current  among  the  countrymen 
of  the  Apostles  before  Christ  was  born.  The 
only  reasonable  induction  from  such  facts,  as 
determining  our  conception  of  the  influence 
of  inspiration  upon  the  Apostles,  is,  that  the 
inspiration  of  the  Apostles,  which  was  essen- 
tially a  moral  illumination,  was  conditioned, 
as  to  its  intellectual  effect,  by  the  stage  of 
intellectual  development  at  which  they  stood. 
Limited  by  the  intellectual  horizon  of  their 
time,  they  could  not  but  be  subject  to  some 
misunderstanding  of  the  onward  course  of 
things,  which  only  an  expanding  experience 
could  clear  away. 

III.  It  cannot  be  denied  by  any  one  who 
is  familiar  with  the  ideas  then  entertained  by 
the  Jews  upon  these  closely  related  doctrines 
of  the  Resurrection,  the  Advent,  and  the  Judg- 
ment, that  the  Apostles'  language  in  reference 
to  them  is  occasionally  coloured,  and  their 
opinions  sometimes  evidently  biassed  by 
their  traditional  way  of  thinking  ;  as  when 
Paul  speaks  of  the  Lord  Jesus  as  descending 


276  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

from  heaven,  and  revealed  in  flaming  fire ;  or 
as  when  Peter  speaks  of  an  impending  con- 
flagration of  the  heavens  and  the  earth  at  the 
coming  of  the  Lord, — precisely  as  the  Jews 
held  that  a  conflagration  of  the  world  would 
take  place  at  the  time  of  the  Kesurrection  and 
the  Judgment. 

"  The  Apostles,"  says  Professor  A.  A.  Hodge,* 
"  understood  these  predictions  to  relate  to  a 
literal  advent  of  Christ  in  person.    .    .    .     They 
teach   that    His    coming  will  he  visible   and 
glorious,  accompanied  with   the  abrogation  of 
the  present  Gospel  dispensation,  the  destruc- 
tion of  His  enemies,  the  glorification  of  His 
friends,   the   conflagration   of  the  world,  and 
the  appearance  of  the  '  new  heaven  and  new 
earth.'  "     This  satisfies  the  majority  of  Chris- 
tians, as  long  as  they  do  not  inquire  into  the 
source  whence  the  Apostles  derived  these  ideas, 
as   long    as  it  is  taken  for  granted  that  the 
Apostles    derived   them,   in   that  form,    from 
Christ.     But   as   soon  as  it  is  perceived  that 
this  whole  way  of  conceiving   the  subject  of 
Christ's    kingly    Advent    and    Judgment    ori- 
ginated   before    the    time    of    Christ    among 
Jewish  writers,  one  has  to  ask  whether  Christ 
really  set   His   seal  to  that  way  of  thinking, 

#  "  Outlines  of  Theology,"  p.  4±S. 


X.]  SUMMARY   AND    CONCLUSION.  277 

whether    He   does   not,  indeed,  require   some 
of  it  to  be  corrected. 

Nothing  can  be  more  plain  to  a  candid  mind 
than    that   the   Apostles'   inspiration  did  not 
wholly  emancipate  them  from  this  bias  of  in- 
herited opinion,  or  lift  them  above  all  influence 
from    their    early  prepossessions    and    ruling 
ideas,  or  make  their  language,  reflecting  such 
opinions,   free    from    error,   and   an  infallible 
guide.     They   believed  they  were   living  "in 
the  end  of  the  world,"  in  "the  last  time"  and 
spoke  as  men  who  thought  that  "  the  end  of 
all  things  "  was  near.     Peter  evidently  shared 
the  universal  belief  of   his   countrymen,  that 
the   pious   dead   were   still,  in  a  disembodied 
state,  awaiting  the   advent   of  the   Messiah's 
miraculous    power    to    restore    them    to    the 
normal  condition  of  life  in  the  union  of  body 
and  spirit.     Paul  alone  seems  to  have  glimpsed 
a,  more  spiritual  conception  of  the  Resurrection 
as  a  present  reality,  while  his  mode  of  speaking 
of  the  Advent  and  the  Judgment  reflects  the 
Jewish   idea  of  them,  as  events    displayed  in 
form  and  show  to  the  senses. 

IV.  The  way  of  thinking  current  among 
the  Apostles'  countrymen,  and  essentially  the 
same  resulting  conceptions  in  terms  of  physical 
rather  than  spiritual   significance,  have  been 


278  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

preserved  in  the  creeds  down  to  the  present 
time,  and  are  now  current  with  the  majority  of 
Christian  believers,  as  any  number  of  recent 
publications  might  be  cited  to  testify. 

So  far,  therefore,  as  the  doctrine  of  the 
Resurrection  is  concerned,  Christ's  saying  that 
the  instructed  "  scribe,"  or  teacher,  brings  forth 
things  new  as  well  as  old,  has  hardly  been 
verified  thus  far.  The  same  may  be  said  of 
the  closely-associated  doctrines  of  the  Advent 
and  of  the  Judgment.  The  Christian  Church, 
as  represented  in  its  principal  creeds  and  in 
the  prevailing  popular  notions,  has  inherited 
from  the  ancient  Jewish  Church,  as  repre- 
sented, at  least,  by  its  more  spiritual  teachers, 
both  its  way  of  thinking  and  its  conclusions 
upon  these  subjects  with  no  essential  modi- 
fication. 

V.  The  following  difficulties  in  the  way  of 
maintaining  the  traditional  notions  ought  to 
be  specially  noted. 

(1.)  It  is  impossible  to  hold  that  our  Lord's 
prophecies  of  His  coming  still  wait  for 
entrance  upon  a  recognisable  fulfilment,  with- 
out provoking  sceptical  denials  of  His  credi- 
bility that  cannot  be  met,  at  least  without 
arbitrary  exegetical  twists  of  language,  and 
cannot  be  met  at  all  on  the  fair  ground  of 


X.]  SUMMAEY  AND   CONCLUSION.  279 

His  plain  assertion,  that  He  would  come  as  a 
King  during  the  lifetime  of  some  who  heard 
Him  speak. 

(2.)  It  is  impossible  to  hold  that  Kesurrec- 
tion — the  re-entrance  of  the  departing  spirit 
into  embodied  life  in  the  spiritual  world — 
is  deferred  to  a  day  which  is  still  future  to  all 
the  dead,  without  suppressing  the  plainest 
testimony  of  our  Lord  to  its  present  reality, 
through  deference  to  the  supposed  infalli- 
bility of  the  Jewish  opinions  which  colour 
some  of  the  language  of  the  Apostles. 

(3.)  It  is  impossible  to  hold  that  the 
adequate  Judgment  and  retribution  of  the 
dead  are  deferred  to  some  great  and  general 
court  of  God  to  be  opened  at  a  day  still 
future,  except  (not  to  mention  other  grave 
objections)  by  an  interpretation  of  our  Lord's 
Judgment-picture  in  the  twenty-fifth  chapter 
of  Matthew,  that  contradicts  even  the  letter 
of  His  words  under  the  bias  of  a  way  of 
thinking  upon  the  subject  of  the  Judgment, 
which  likens  the  Divine  method  to  that  of 
the  ordinary  judge  upon  the  bench. 

VI.  It  now  remains  only  to  point  out  the 
chief  requisites  in  order  to  a  true  conception, 
at  once  Biblical  and  rational,  of  the  doctrine  of 
the  .Resurrection  in  its   necessary  connection 


280  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

with  the   doctrines   of    the   Advent    and  the 
Judgment. 

(1.)  To  admit  the  fact  that  we  can  under- 
stand the  Gospels  as  well  as  the  Epistles,  our 
Lord's  sayings  as  well  as  those  of  the  Apostles, 
and  to  ground  our  doctrine  less  on  the  com- 
ments supplied  by  Paul  and  Peter  than  on 
the  teachings  of  Christ  Himself,  as  capable  of 
being  adequately  understood  to-day  without 
the  intervention  of  any  human  mediator  to 
interpret  them,  even  though  that  mediator 
be  an  inspired  Apostle. 

(2.)  To  make  allowance,  in  our  study  of 
the  Epistles,  for  the  element  of  inherited 
Jewish  opinions  occasionally  so  apparent  in 
the  language  which  the  Apostles  used  con- 
cerning the  grand  facts  of  the  Kingdom  of 
Christ. 

(3.)  To  apply  the  discrimination  between 
symbols  and  realities,  which  we  have  already 
learned  to  make  in  the  Old  Testament  lan- 
guage concerning  God  —  His  "  eyes"  His 
"hand"  His  "  nostrils"— to  the  New  Testa- 
ment language  concerning  the  spiritual  facts 
of  the  Kingdom  of  God.  We  must  carry  this 
dissrimination  through  the  whole  range  of 
terms  in  which,  for  the  sake  of  those  who 
were  to  be  taught,  we  find   spiritual   concep- 


X.]  SUMMAKY  AND    CONCLUSION.  281 

tions  translated  into  material  forms.     We  must 
learn  to  translate  them  bach  again. 

(4.)  To  avail  ourselves  of  whatever  insight 
the  experience  and  the  learning  of  the  Chris- 
tian centuries  can  give  us  into  the  method  in 
which  God  works,  under  the  universal  reign  of 
law,  through  processes  of  development,  and 
with  continuity  of  progress, — according  to 
which  Life  is  God's  great  body-builder,  all 
physical,  social  and  spiritual  agencies  are  in- 
cluded among  God's  Judgment  "  angels  "  for 
the  elimination  of  evil,  and  Christ,  as  the 
earthly  representative  of  God's  moral  perfec- 
tions, presides,  as  the  moral  King  over  the 
world's  struggling  development  of  a  purified, 
saved  and  glorified  humanity. 

(5.)  The  fundamental  requisite  to  the  con- 
struction of  a  correct  doctrine  of  the  Resurrec- 
tion, the  Advent,  and  the  Judgment,  is  to  con- 
ceive of  the  Kingdom  of  God  as  growing  by 
gradual  development  rather  than  as  set  up  at 
once  by  the  stroke  of  power.  Attention  has 
been  continually  called  to  this  key-truth  in 
the  course  of  these  studies.  It  is  this  which 
requires  us,  guided  by  the  conception  of  a 
movement,  rather  than  of  any  detached  event, 
to  discriminate  between  what  is  inchoate,  and 
what  is  consummate,  in  different  applications 

19 


282  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP. 

of  the  same  words.  "When  Christ  says  (Matt. 
x.  23),  "  Ye  shall  not  have  gone  through  the 
cities  of  Israel  till  the  Son  of  Man  be  come," 
He  refers  to  His  corning  as  inchoate,  in  the 
beginning  of  His  manifestation  as  the  King. 
"When  Paul,  speaking  of  the  Lord's  Supper, 
says  (1  Cor.  xi.  26),  "  Ye  proclaim  the  Lord's 
death  till  He  come"  we  are  to  understand  the 
Lord's  coming  as  consummate,  in  the  com- 
pleteness of  His  redeeming  work,  "  when  all 
things  have  been  subjected  unto  Him." 

It  requires  but  moderate  acquaintance  with 
recent  influential  publications,  to  discover  that 
the  principle  of  development,  or  Evolution, 
which  has  now  become  an  accepted  working 
hypothesis  of  science,  is  being  applied  to  many 
theological,  biblical,  and  ecclesiastical  ques- 
tions. In  proportion  as  this  new  method 
shall  be  applied  with  thoroughness  and  con- 
sistency, we  may  expect  a  wider  horizon  and  a 
higher  level  of  Christian  thought  to  open,  in- 
volving, indeed,  a  change  in  modes  of  concep- 
tion and  forms  of  expression,  but  both  clearing 
and  confirming  the  substance  of  the  Christian 
Revelation.  The  result,  as  in  the  parallel 
movement  of  scientific  discussions,  can  only 
be  a  grander  disclosure  of  the  wisdom  of  Him 
whose  thoughts  are  not  as  our  thoughts. 


X.]  SUMMAEY  AND   CONCLUSION.  283 

If  we  are  disposed  to  harbour  these  conside- 
rations long  enough  to  weigh  them  fairly,  we 
shall  begin    to    discover  in    such    a    line   of 
thought  what  I  believe  is  destined  to  become 
a  growing  conviction   among   reflecting  men, 
that   adherence   to   the   old    Jewish   mode   of 
thought     concerning     the     Kesurrection,    the 
Lord's  Advent,    and  the   Judgment  has  been 
the    grand  mistake    which    the    Church   has 
made    in    its    doctrine    of    the    Kingdom     of 
Christ.       In    the    ideal    point     of    view,     it 
is    a    monstrous    anachronism    in  the  period 
which    Christians    regard   as  "the   Dispensa- 
tion  of  the    Spirit."      In   the  practical   point 
of  view,  it  provokes,  as  did  the  gross  Resur- 
rection-fancies  of    the   Pharisees,    a    develop- 
ment of  Sadduceeism,  disbelief  in  the  Gospel 
of  the  Resurrection,  and   sceptical   denials   of 
Christ  as  the  Resurrection-power.     Therefore, 
there   must  some  time  come  a  reform  of  the 
Church-doctrine  of  the  Resurrection  as  taught 
in  the  creeds  and  the  hymn-books.     It  is  only 
a  question  of  time. 

Confident,  therefore,  as  to  the  real  point 
of  our  Lord's  teaching  as  given  in  the  Gospels, 
I  earnestly  commend  it  to  the  reconsideration 
of  all  those  to  whom  the  doctrine,  so  funda- 
mental in  the  New  Testament,  of  Besurrection 


284  BEYOND   THE    SHADOW.  [CHAP.  X. 

through  Christ,  possesses  interest.  The  con- 
ception of  this  which  is  presented  in  these 
pages,  criticised  as  it  will  be  at  present,  is  the 
one  that  will  stand,  at  least  in  its  essentials, 
when  the  fancies  that  are  now  widely  enter- 
tained have  been  gathered  into  the  museum 
of  theological  relics. 


TV.  SpcaigM  and  Sons,  Printers,  Fetter  Lane,  London. 


THE  NEW 

REF 

This  book  is 
tak 

YORK  PUBLIC  LIBRARY 
ERENCE   DEPARTMENT 

under  no  circumstances  to  be 
en  from  the  Building 

<* 

form  410